Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
WAWA FL Specifications -v19.01
Project Manual Including Specifications For WAWA FOOD MARKETS Store #XXXX XXXXXXX CUHACI & PETERSON ARCHITECTS 1925 Prospect Ave. Orlando, FL 32814 (407) 661-9100 (407) 661-9101 (fax) February 19, 2020 Version 19.01 F85, F85FB, F110, F110v2 5380 Martin Hwy. & High Meadows Ave. Palm City, FL July, 19, 2021 Orange Ave. & Kings Hwy, Ft. Pierce, FL i March 2019 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01001 Instruction to Bidders 01002 Modifications to the General Conditions 01003 Supplement to the General Conditions 01004 Cleaning 01400 Quality Control DIVISION 2 – SITE REQUIREMENTS 02001 Earthwork, Clearing, and Grading 02002 Sitework 02282 Soil Treatment 02530 Sanitary Sewerage 02531 Plumbing Sitework 02810 Irrigation 02900 Landscaping DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03301 Cast-In-Place Concrete Building 03302 Cast-In-Place Concrete Site DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry 04223 Pre-Cast Concrete Wall Base 04720 Cultured Stone DIVISION 5 – METALS 05001 Miscellaneous Metal 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joists 05310 Steel Deck 05400 Cold-formed Metal Framing 05720 Decorative Metal DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS 06001 Carpentry and Millwork 06100 Rough Carpentry DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07001 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07210 Building Insulation 07250 Weather Barrier 07260 Underslab Vapor Barrier 07410 Standing Seam Metal Roofing (Alternate) 07461 Siding 07530 Membrane Sheet Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07720 Roof Accessories 07840 Firestopping 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 08001 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084126 Storefront Glazing 08700 Hardware DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09221 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09240 Stucco Wall System 09250 Gypsum Board 09300 Ceramic Tile 09390 SaniGLAZE 09500 Acoustical Tile Ceilings ii March 2019 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT) DIVISION 9 – FINISHES (cont’d) 09600 Flooring 09700 Wall Finishes 09900 Painting 09960 Coatings for Steel DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES 10155 HDPE Toilet Compartments 10200 Specialties DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11400 Equipment DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15001 Plumbing 15002 Everpure Water Treatment (CSR Unit) 15003 HVAC DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16001 Electrical 16500 Lighting APPENDIX A ADA Building Review Form APPENDIX B BAS Master Specs SECTION 01001 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 01-1 March 2019 01001-01 WORK 01.1 The Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, permits, fees, transportation, equipment, apparatus, energy, scaffolding, tools, and all else necessary for the entire proper completion of the Work. All Work shall conform to the requirements of the Zoning laws, local Building Code, ADA, rules and regulations of the local Board of Health, and all other ordinances which apply. 01001-02 SITE VISIT 02.1 All Bidders submitting proposals for this Work shall first examine site and all conditions thereon. All Proposals shall take into consideration all such conditions as may affect work under the Contract. Failure to examine site will not relieve successful bidder from necessity to provide Work that may be required to complete Work without additional cost to Wawa. 01001-03 BIDFORM 03.1 Bidding shall include the following items: store number (if available), location, date, latest revision date on plans, addenda, base bid, alternate additions and deductions, total bid, and acknowledgment that the bidder has received the proposed Contract Documents, including any Addenda, and has visited the Site. 03.2 Contractors are required to use the Contractors Cost Itemization Form supplied by Wawa, or Bid will not be accepted. 01001-04 DELIVERY OF PROPOSALS 04.1 Bids should be sent via e-mail to thomas.w.bryden@wawa.com, and copy, lorri.krushinski@wawa.com, & kathleen.donithan@wawa.com. If all parties listed are not copied, your bid will not be opened. Proposals shall be identified with the store number and location, and the bidder's name and address. 01001-05 WAWA, INC.- CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT 05.1 All references to "Owner" in these Specifications shall be read as "Wawa, Inc." 05.2 The term "furnish" shall mean to obtain and supply to the job site. The term "install" shall mean to fix in position and connect for use. The term "provide" shall mean to furnish and install. 01001-06 RFI PROCESS 06.1 Bid RFI’s should be sent to thomas.w.bryden@wawa.com. No RFI’s shall be sent within 48 hours (2 business days) of bid due date. END OF SECTION 01001 SECTION 01002 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-2 March 2019 01002-01 CONTRACT DOCUMENT 01.1 Standard "General Conditions of Contract for Construction," AIA A -201, latest edition, shall be considered part of these Specifications. The Architect has not been retained for Construction Observation unless informed otherwise. All reference to "Architect” in AIA Document A-201 shall be read as "Wawa Project Manager." A copy of this document may be examined at office of Wawa, Inc., or at the Architect's office. Copies sent on request only. 01002-02 OSHA 02.1 The General Contractor and all Subcontractors are herewith reminded of their responsibility to, and are required under this contract to conform to, all the governing regulations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Act and to any explanatory or related regulations issued since the Act was passed. This applies to construction operations and all permanent construction. Any discrepancy regulation between these regulations and the Drawings or specifications shall be brought to the Wawa Project Manager's attention before proceeding. 02.2 The Hard Hat Safety Policy shall be as follows: New Stores: ALL personnel on site shall wear hard hats until a temporary certificate of occupancy is obtained (substantial completion) and no overhead or electrical hazards exist. Remodels: ALL personnel on site shall wear hard hats until the store is turned over to Store Operations. Hard hats shall continue to be worn at that point if overhead or electrical hazards exist. Parking Lot Additions: Hard hats shall be worn until all work is completed. Hard Hat Area Signs are to be posted and maintained throughout construction at the construction entrance. The General Contractor, Project Superintendent and Wawa Project Manager shall ask anyone not following OSHA regulations to leave the site until such a time that they are in compliance. 01002-03 LIENS 03.1 The General Contractor shall, without cost to the Wawa, Inc., obtain prompt discharge of any lien or liens that may be filed against the building or property arising out of this Contract. 03.2 Waiver of Liens shall be filed by the Contractor in accordance with loca l legal practice, prior to the commencement of any Work on the Project. 03.3 Release of Liens shall be submitted within thirty days of completion of Work. The General Contractor shall affix to his release, the names of all Subcontractors and prime suppli ers. They, in turn, shall submit individual notarized Release of Liens. Contractor shall resubmit the Subcontractors list. 01002-04 TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION 04.1 The Work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced after notice to proceed has been given by Wawa, Inc., which shall not be earlier than either (1) the time Wawa, Inc. shall have received permits required to commence construction, which may be prior to a building permit being issued, or (2) the filing of a waiver of liens. The work shall be completed with diligence and in a good and workmanlike manner after SECTION 01002 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-3 March 2019 commencement thereof. Completion of Punch List will be done within two weeks of date of Punch Walk, or prior to store opening. 01002-05 INSURANCE 05.1 Contractor shall submit insurance certificate to Wawa indicating the following coverages: (A) General Liability Insurance Bodily Injury and Property Damage 1,000,000 Per Occurrence Limit $2,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate Personal Injury and Advertising Inj ury Insurance - $1,000,000 per occurrence (B) Automobile Liability Insurance Bodily Injury and Property Damage -$1,000,000 Combined Single Limit (C) Workers Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance $1,000,000 per accident, bodily injury by accident $1,000,000 each person, bodily injury by disease $1,000,000 policy limit, bodily injury by disease (D) Umbrella Liability Insurance Bodily Injury and Property Damage Per occurrence - $4,000,000 General Aggregate Limit - $4,000,000 Personal Injury and Advertising Injury - Included in Policy Limit 01002-06 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 06.1 These Specifications are comprehensive for use with many types of Wawa Stores, including but not limited to prototype buildings, leased spaces, and Remodel Stores. 06.2 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to identify all items in the Specifications required to complete the Work shown in the Drawings. 01002-07 PERMITS 07.1 Contractor will secure building Permits if required by Wawa with the exception of those permits which must be secured by respective Subcontractors as the local regulations require (i.e. plumbing, electrical, etc.). Refer to STANDARDS & CODES. Local Licenses will be paid for by the Contractor. 01002-08 STANDARDS AND CODES 08.1 The Architectural Drawings and Specifications are standardized and intended for adaptation and use in any locality. As local codes and conditions may vary and the Architect has limited Construction Observation responsibility, it is important that the Contractor verify the application of both local and state codes and applicable requirements to these Drawings and Specifications. Changes required must be reported to Wawa's Representative for his written approval before proceeding with the Work. 08.2 Workmanship must conform to applicable codes and regulations (see drawings for list) and American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) as well as published trade and manufacturers standards for each material or item of equipment installed. Where any SECTION 01002 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-4 March 2019 standard seems in conflict with the Drawings and Specifications, notify the Wawa Project Manager for direction before proceeding. 01002-09 MEASUREMENTS 09.1 Before ordering any material or doing any Work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building and site and shall be responsible for correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the Drawing; any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Wawa Project Manager for consideration, before proceeding with the Work. 01002-10 GUARANTEES 10.1 General Contractor: Provide Written Guarantee upon substantial completion of work. 10.2 Subcontractors: In the case of work performed by Subcontractors and where written guarantees are required, the Contractor shall secure these from said Subcontractors addressed to and in favor of Wawa, Inc.; and deliver copies of same to the Wawa, Inc. upon completion of the work, countersigned by the General Contractor. 10.3 Terms: Written guarantee(s) shall state that all Work executed under the respective contract(s) will be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period (see 10.4) and that the Contractor will, at his own expense, repair and replace all such defective work during the term of the guarantee-Warranty. 10.4 Time Period: The guarantee period(s) shall be for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion as determined by Wawa, unless longer periods are specifically called for. The Contractor shall not submit any guarantees until he has verified the date of the beginning of the guarantee period with the Wawa Project Manager. 10.5 Construction Closing Documentation shall be provided by the General Contractor per Table 01002-10-10.5. SECTION 01002 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-5 March 2019 01002-10-10.5 TABLE OF CONTENTS Construction Closing Documentation from General Contractor Wawa Food Market # TAB # DESCRIPTION 1. Copies of all Building related permits 2. Copy of the signed off Final Submittal Release Check list from Architect 3. Copy of the Carboline 7-year Paint Warranty 4. Copy of the 20-year Roof Warranty for the Standing Seam main roof and Single-Ply flat roof 5. Copy of the signed off Irrigation Inspection Report 6. Copy of the Sewer As-Built Drawings from the Site Engineer per Wawa specs 7. 2 hard copies and one scanned set of the Site As-Built Drawings showing electric (primary & secondary), water, gas, sewer, irrigation, telephone and all other conduits that cross the parking lot. Conduits and Utilities to be shown with dimensions and depths for locating in the future. 8. 2 hard copies and one scanned set of Architectural As-Builts – As-built only required if there are changes from the construction set. If changes occur only to specific installs; electric for example, than the “E” sheets will only be necessary, not a full set. At the completion of the job, before the punch list walk, a full set must be placed in the drawing tube along with As-built Site Drawings, including landscape sprinkler system layout. These can temporarily be the superintendents set in order to have drawings in store at all times from the time of GC’s completion. 9. Include the potable drinking water well (Drillers Log) to the close out package. This is only applicable to stores that are not provided with water from the municipality and have a drinking water well on-site. 10. Manager to sign-off on receipt of 1 set of Maintenance and Operating Manuals for all the contractor-supplied equipment. 11. Verification of cleaning of all underground piping signed by the Contractor with a copy of invoice from cleaning contractor. 12. Manager to sign-off for keys to the store. (All keys are to be tagged and presented to Store Manager) 13. Manager to sign-off on instruction of the Landscape Irrigation System. 14. 1 copy of the Certificate of Occupancy: original should go to the store 15. Sub-contractor listing with Release of Liens 16. Signed-off punch list by Post Construction Project Manager. 17. Include all warranties in accordance with section 01002-10 of the project manual. 18. Include all product data, maintenance and operations information concerning all equipment and systems. 19. Include all letters of certification, i.e. fuel station equipment systems etc. 20. Include all applicable product approvals and NOA’s. 21. Include building power grounding test certification. 22. Two (2) copies of the Approved Certified Air Balance Report. Approved report shall include the Architect/Engineers review stamp. All of the above closing documentation is to be submitted on CD along with this checklist to the Wawa Construction Project Manager within 60 days of the Punch list Walk. The final $10,000 payment will be held until all documents are received. 10.6 Architect’s Final Submittal Release Checklist shall be obtained by Contractor: Table 01002-10-10.6. SECTION 01002 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-6 March 2019 01002-10-10.6 FINAL SUBMITTAL RELEASE CHECKLIST ARCHITECTURAL All requested submittals have been received. All submittals to be resubmitted have been received. Final punch walk has been completed ADA punch walk has been completed Final punch list issues have been addressed All applicable NOA’s and Product Approvals have been sent to G.C. OUTSTANDING ISSUES: Store Number: ____________________________ Store Address: ____________________________ _________________________________________ General Contractor: ________________________ Wawa’s Project Manager: ___________________ C-P’s Project Arch:______________________ Date: ______________, 2012 Wawa’s Project Manager Sign-Off Approved By: _________________________ Date: _______________________________ STRUCTURAL All requested submittals have been received. All submittals to be resubmitted have been received. Final site observation visit has been completed. Final SOR issues have been addressed. OUTSTANDING ISSUES: MECHANICAL/PLUMBING/ELECTRICAL All requested submittal have been received. All submittals to be resubmitted have been received. Final punch walk has been completed. Balance reports have been completed and accepted Final punch list issues have been addressed. OUTSTANDING ISSUES: SECTION 01002 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-7 March 2019 01002-11 CONTRACTOR SUPERVISION 11.1 The General Contractor shall employ a competent Contractor Superintendent who will be at the project site at all times while work is in progress. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the Superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. All important communications shall be confirmed in writing. 01002-12 SUBCONTRACTORS 12.1 Prior to the start of Construction, the General Contractor shall submit a complete list of Subcontractors for Wawa's records, review, and approval. 12.2 No change in Subcontractor shall be made during the course of the construction operation without notifying the Wawa Project Manager and receiving his approval. 01002-13 TELEPHONE ANDSITE OFFICE TRAILER 13.1 General Contractor to provide on-site telephone from beginning of construction until completion of all Work. 13.2 General Contractor to provide “office-trailer” at all new store construction sites. 01002-14 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL 14.1 Shop Drawings are Drawings, diagrams schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 14.2 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Architect , five (5) sets total of Shop Drawings and similar submittal required by the Contract Documents within two weeks of awarding of the Project and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of Wawa, Inc. or of separate Contractors. Hardware schedules are to be submitted in the format provided by the Door & Hardware Institute. Electronic submission is acceptable. 14.3 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittal. 14.4 By submitting and/or approving Shop Drawings, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 14.5 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requ irements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, or similar submittal by the Architect's approval thereof. 14.6 The Architect will review Contractor's submittal such as Shop Drawings, but only for th e limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review of such submittal is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details SECTION 01002 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-8 March 2019 such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions o f any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. 01002-15 CHANGE ORDERS 15.1 Whenever a change is required a Change Order request must be filed immediately. 15.2 A Change Order request can be initiated by either the Contractor or the Wawa Project Manager. 15.3 A Change Order request initiated by the General Contractor should be completely priced, if initiated by the Wawa Project Manager it will be sent to the Contractor for pricing and shall be returned to the Wawa Project Manager as soon as possible. 15.4 Change Order Request Forms shall be per AIA. 15.5 When work is completed the Contractor will invoice for the Change Order amount and bill on an AIA Request for Payment Form. 15.6 Change Orders are to be submitted on the Wawa Change Order request form to the Wawa Project Manager for approval prior to commencing of work and submittal for payment. All sub-Contractor and/or supplier invoices are to be attached, including labor and material cost break downs. Overhead and Profit for change orders will be 8%. 01002-16 GENERAL 16.1 General Contractor Superintendent and the Subcontractor Foreman will be required to sign a copy of the specification section(s) pertaining to the Subcontractor the first day the Subcontractor is on site to start work. A copy of this is to be kept on site in a three ring binder for the Wawa Project Manager. 16.2 New Stores Only: Invoices for Payment shall be submitted on AIA forms G702 and G703. Column B (Description of Work) on form G703 to be broken down exactly as the cost itemization form submitted for bidding. For Remodels: Invoices for Payment shall be submitted as per the contract breakdown. For All Stores: A cover letter with the amount of payment requested to be attached. The first payment will not be paid until a copy of the building permit is received by Wawa from the General Contractor. 16.3 An AIA Release of Liens form shall be attached to the request for final payment. All Project close-out materials (including one [1] set of As-Built Drawings) shall be turned over to the Wawa Project Manager prior to request for final payment. A copy of the Certificate of Occupancy must be submitted to Wawa prior to final payme nt. 16.4 Punch Lists will be performed by the Architects and Engineers as listed on the Project's Construction Documentation Cover Sheet, by Wawa's Operations and Facilities Departments’ Representatives, and by Wawa's Construction Department's Senior Project Manager. All Punch List items must be signed off by the Wawa’s Project Manager and Wawa’s Facilities Department Representative. If the Punch List items are not completed by the Time Frame given, Wawa reserves the right to hire a third party to complete the work. The cost of this will then be deducted from the General Contractor's Final Draw. This will not impact or invalidate the One Year Warranty provided by the General Contractor. In addition the General Contractor will be back -charged for any return trips required by the Architects, Engineers, Wawa’s Project Manager and/or Wawa’s Facilities Department Representative to follow up on any Punch List items that were not completed upon the Punch List Completion Inspection. SECTION 01002 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-9 March 2019 END OF SECTION 01002 SECTION 01003 SUPPLEMENT TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-10 March 2019 01003-01 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 01.1 These Specifications are comprehensive for use with many types of Wawa Stores, including but not limited to prototype buildings, leased spaces, and Remodel Stores. 01.2 All items relating to Site Work, including, but not limited to Section 2, are noted in the Specifications as requested by Wawa’s Construction Department. All Site Work for all projects to be as per Wawa’s Project Civil Engineers latest Plans and Specifications. 01.3 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to identify all items in the Specifications required to complete the Work shown in the Drawings. 01003-02 BUILDINGS 02.1 Building Plans are intended for adaptation to a variety of Site Conditions, and may require modifications in accordance, but not limited to, the following: (A) For use within fire limits, the building must be modified in accordance with applicable building code requirements for fire resistance ratings of exterior walls. (B) An Engineer-approved Footing and Foundation Plan must be submitted to Wawa's Representative for approval prior to proceeding if soil bearing conditions are not as required by the Architect's Construction Drawings. (C) Sidewalk dimensions, extent and details shown in Construction Dra wings are for general information only and are not to be used for construction purposes. For all information regarding sidewalks and all sitework including storm drainage see latest Site Engineering Drawings. (D) Connections to all utilities shall be modified in accordance with latest Site Drawings by others. Engineer-approved building systems designs shall be submitted to Wawa's Representative for approval prior to proceeding if modifications must be made to accommodate Site Conditions. 01003-05 CHECKLIST FOR GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL/ SHOP DRAWING ARCHITECTURAL Hardware • Storefront • Metal doors and frames • Rest Room Accessories Terrazzo Stucco/Manufactured Stone Roof Materials Cement Fiber Siding STRUCTURAL Structural Steel Shop Drawings (Store) • Erection Drawings • Piece Drawings • Metal Deck Drawings • Prep procedure and priming material • Current Welder’s certifications Structural Steel Shop Drawings (Building and Gas Canopy) SECTION 01003 SUPPLEMENT TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 01-11 March 2019 • Erection Drawings • Piece Drawings • Metal Deck Drawings • Prep procedure and priming material • Current Welder’s certifications Concrete • Mix design • Material certificates • Historical testing background Masonry • Material certification • ASTM test documentation Concrete Reinforcing Shop Drawings (Store & Canopy) • Placement Drawings • Fabrication and Bending Details Light Gage Metal Framing • Manufacturer’s Cut Sheet for Studs & Track MECHANICAL Air Conditioning Units and Controls Air Balancing Report Exhaust Fans Smoke Detectors and Keypads Grilles, Registers and Diffusers Duct Layout Shop Drawings Masterbilt Unit PLUMBING Rest Room Fixtures Grease Interceptor Water Heater Water Meters Backflow Preventors Drains, Floor Sinks, Etc. ELECTRICAL Circuit Breaker Panels Devices and Fixtures Lighting Contractor Panel Emergency Shutoff Contactor Panel END OF SECTION 01003 SECTION 01004 CLEANING 01-12 March 2019 01004-01 FINAL CLEAN-UP 01.1 The General Contractor shall, in addition to any other cleaning specified to be done by him, at his own cost and expense, do the following special cleaning for all Contractors and trades before the final completion of the Work: (A) Clean and polish all finishing hardware. (B) Remove all spots, soil and waste paint from all floors. (C) Clean properties of all debris and dirt. (D) Clean and polish both surfaces of all glazing and mirrors. (E) All trash removal up until turnover to Wawa Store Operations. (F) All New Stores and Remodels require cleaning to be done by a professional cleaner. (G) Remove screws, nails and all construction debris from roof and tower element. 01.2 Cleaning Schedules (A) Prior to shelving installation. (B) Prior to Wawa set-up crew arrival / DOA Inspections. (C) Prior to Punch Walk. 01.3 Third Party Floor Cleaning (A) 24 hours prior to cabinet installation. To be scheduled by Wawa. 01004-02 DAILY CLEANUP 02.1 Clean up daily and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris and waste material. Remove all such items to the place designated for their storage by the Wawa Project Manager. 01004-03 PROTECTION 03.1 The Contractor shall maintain all the necessary safeguards such as barriers, barricades, signs, etc., to protect the work crew and public during the construction periods. 03.2 Verify all utility locations at site. 03.3 Protect all existing utilities, monitoring wells, struc tures, trees, and plantings not marked for removal. Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement of damaged aforementioned items. 03.4 Report any unforeseen conditions to Wawa Project Manager before proceeding with the Work. SECTION 01004 CLEANING 01-13 March 2019 1004-04 POWER WASHING 04.1 At the completion of all Work, the entire exterior of the building and canopy area, including concrete walls, sidewalks, and paved areas, shall be power washed. END OF SECTION 01004 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01400-1 8/2/2012 01400-01 QUALITY CONTROL 01.1 Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions. 01.2 Summary (A) This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services. (B) Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. (C) Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. (D) Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor’s quality- control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services specified by Architect, Wawa, Inc., or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 01.3 Responsibilities (A) Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-control services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. (B) Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are Wawa, Inc.’s responsibility, Wawa, Inc. will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. Where Wawa, Inc. has engaged a testing agency for testing and inspecting part of the Work, and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or related element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by Wawa, Inc. (C) Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor’s responsibility. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor’s responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements. (A) Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2 8/2/2012 and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Provide access to the Work. 2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. 3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples. 4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples. 5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories. 6. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. (B) Regardless of whoever hires the 3rd party or retains the services of the testing agency, the General Contractor will be responsible for coordinating and scheduling the testing. END SECTION 01400 SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-1 July, 2011 02001-01 POLICY 01.1 The following Specifications are to insure that Wawa receives uniform earthwork, clearing and grading from contractors in order to minimize future site deficiencies due to inconsistent site work. These Specifications are to be used as minimum design requirements and it is the responsibility of the Civil Engineer preparing the plans to ensure that the plans address all municipal requirements and regulations. Should any local regulations require deviation from these Specifications, Wawa’s Project Engineer is to give approval prior to submittal. 02001-02 SITE CLEARING 02.1 Project Conditions (A) Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. (B) Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicted to remain in place. 1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Wawa’s property. 2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Wawa Representative. (C) Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. 1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. 2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. 3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to Wawa Representative. Employ a licensed Arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 4. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Arborist. (D) Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing removal and alteration work on property adjoining Wawa’s property will be obtained by Wawa prior to award of contract. Extent of work on adjacent property is indicated on Drawings. (E) Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Wawa’s premises where indicated or directed. 02.2 Existing Utilities (A) General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-2 July, 2011 commencing Work. (B) Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this Work. (C) Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. 02.3 Site Clearing (A) General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. (B) Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). Depth of existing topsoil to be verified in Geotechnical Report. If Site Plan specifies sod to be used on site, topsoil shall be 2 inches in depth. If Site Plan specifies hydroseeding on site, topsoil shall be 4 inches to 6 inches in depth. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. If imported from off-site, topsoil shall be screened and free of debris. 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. Hand rake topsoil to remove all debris. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. 2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion. 3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material. (C) Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. 1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. (D) Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on Mechanical or Electrical Drawings and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 Sections. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction is included under this Section. SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-3 July, 2011 02001-03 TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING 03.1 Quality Assurance (A) Tree Service Qualifications: Engage an experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project. (B) Tree Pruning Standards: Comply with the National Arborist Association’s “Pruning Standards for Shade Trees” except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 03.2 Preparation (A) Temporary Protection: Provide temporary fencing, barricades, or other suitable guards located outside the drip line (outer perimeter of branches) to protect remaining trees and other plants from damage. (B) Protect tree root systems from damage due to noxious materials caused by run-off or spillage while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from flooding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operation. (C) Do not allow fires under or adjacent to remaining trees or other plants. 03.3 Excavation Near Trees (A) Do not excavate within tree drip line, unless otherwise indicated. (B) Where excavation for new construction is required within tree drip lines, hand excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks and comb soil to expose roots. 1. Relocate roots in backfill areas wherever possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose beyond excavation limits as required to bend and relocate without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and relocation is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction. 2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition and temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with earth. (C) Where utilities trenches are required within tree drip lines, tunnel under or around the roots by drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand. Root pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots or tap roots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of new work. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 03.4 Regrading Around Trees (A) Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by Arborist. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed during grade lowering. Do not cut main lateral roots or tap roots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-4 July, 2011 (B) Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches (150 mm) or less below elevation of finish grade shown, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. (C) Moderate Fill: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches (150 mm) but less than 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade elevation, place a layer of drainage fill, filter fabric, and a final layer of topsoil on existing grade. 1. Carefully place drainage fill against tree trunk approximately 2 inches (50 mm) above finish grade elevation and extend not less than 18 inches (450 mm) from tree trunk on all sides. For balance of area within drip-line perimeter, place drainage fill to an elevation 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. 2. Place filter fabric with overlapping edges of 6 inches (150 mm) minimum. 3. Place fill layer of topsoil to finish grade. Do not compact drainage fill or topsoil. Hand grade to required finish elevations. 03.5 Tree Pruning (A) Prune remaining trees affected by temporary and new construction. (B) Prune remaining trees to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during the Contract period as recommended by Arborist. (C) Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to the National Arborist Association’s “Pruning Standards for Shade Trees”. 1. Class II: Standard pruning. 2. Class III: Hazard pruning. 3. Class IV: Crown-reduction pruning. (D) Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. (E) Chip branches removed from trees. Spread material where indicated or as directed by Wawa Representative. 03.6 Tree Repair and Replacement (A) Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations to prevent progressive deterioration. (B) Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that the Arborist determines to be incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced. Plant and maintain as specified under Division 2 Section “Trees and Shrubs.” 2. Provide new trees of 6 inch (150 mm) caliper size and of a species selected by Site Engineer when trees over 6 inches (150 mm) in caliper, measured 12 inches (300 mm) above grade, are required to be replaced. 02001-04 EARTHWORK 04.1 Summary: This Section includes the following: (A) Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and landscaping. SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-5 July, 2011 (B) Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. (C) Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade. (D) Subbase course for walks and pavements. (E) Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. (F) Excavation and backfilling trenches within building lines. (G) Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and appurtenances. Confirm conformance with “Site Sewer Specifications”. 04.2 Definitions (A) Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse of disposal of materials removed. (B) Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. (C) Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations. (D) Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and base course in a paving system or the layer placed between the subgrade and surface of a pavement or walk. (E) Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving system. (F) Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off upward capillary flow of pore water. (G) Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Site Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Site Engineer, shall be at the contractor’s expense. (H) Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. (I) Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within building lines. 04.3 Test Reports (A) Supplied by Owner: In addition to test reports required under field quality control, submit the following: 1. To the Soils Engineer: a. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill from on- site borrow sources. b. One optimum moisture- maximum density curve for each soil material. SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-6 July, 2011 2. To the Structural Engineer: For footings and foundations submit report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each stratum tested. (B) Blasting plan approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 04.4 Quality Assurance (A) Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. (B) Testing and Inspection Service: General Contractor will employ a qualified independent Geotechnical Engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing for all contractors performing work at the site. (C) Preconstruction Meeting: To be coordinated by the Wawa Construction Project Manager and to be held at Project site. Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing authorities, Wawa Representative, Architect, consultants, Geotechnical Engineer, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and requirements. Notify participants at least one week (5 business days prior to convening conference. Architect responsible for a final report, including all disciplines, and for recording discussions and agreements and furnishing a copy to each participant. 04.5 Project Conditions (A) Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Wawa or others except when permitted in writing by Wawa and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. Provide a minimum 48- hours notice to the Wawa Representative and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. (B) Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 04.6 Soil Materials (A) General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. (B) Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. (C) Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. (D) Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. (E) Subbase and Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel and crushed stone, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (75 micrometer) sieve. SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-7 July, 2011 (F) Engineered Fill: Subbase of base materials. (G) Bedding Material: Subbase of base materials with 100 percent passing a 1 inch (25 mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (75 micrometer) sieve. (H) Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1 ½” (38 mm) sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve. (I) Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand, with 100 percent passing a 1 ½ inch (38 mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 (300 micrometer) sieve. (J) Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. (K) Filter Fabric: Manufacturer’s standard nonwoven pervious geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon or polyester fibers, or a combination. Verify with Site Engineer and see Site Plans for exact specifications. Provide filter fabrics that meet or exceed the listed minimum physical properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and the referenced standard test method in parentheses: 1. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632): 100 lb (45 kg). 2. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D 4751): #100 US Standard (150 micrometer) sieve. 3. Permeability (ASTM D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per sq. ft. (102 L/s per sq. m). 04.7 Preparation (A) Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. (B) Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. (C) Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 04.8 Dewatering (A) Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. (B) Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. 04.9 Excavation (A) Explosives: Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing explosives to the site or using explosives on the site. Do not damage adjacent structures, property, or site improvements or weaken the bearing capacity SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-8 July, 2011 of rock subgrade when using explosives. (B) Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered. (C) Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations. Excavation will be classified as earth excavation or rock excavation as follows: 1. Earth excavation includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be demolished and removed; together with soil and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. Intermittent drilling, blasting, or ripping to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of material encountered will be classified as earth excavation. 2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock material and obstructions encountered that cannot be removed by the following heavy-duty excavating equipment without systematic drilling, blasting, or ripping. Rock material includes boulders ½ cu. Yd. (0.38 cu. M.) or more in volume and rock in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits. 3. Rock excavating equipment for footings, trenches, and pits shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 215D LC track-mounted hydraulic excavator, equipped with a 42 inch (1050 mm) wide short-tip radius rock bucket, rated at not less than 120 hp (89 kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 25,000 lb (111 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,7000 lb (83 kN), measured according to SAE Standard J1179. 4. Rock excavating equipment for open excavations shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 973, heavy-duty, track-mounted leader, rated at not less than 210 hp (157 kW) flywheel power and developing minimum of 45,000 lb (200 kN) breakout force, measured according to SAE Standard J732x-69. Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in either length or width are defined as open excavations. 5. Rock excavation will be paid by unit prices included in the Contract Documents. 6. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Soils Engineer. 04.10 Stability of Excavations: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. 04.11 Excavation for Structures: Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches (30 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other construction, and for inspections. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Excavate to required depth and if needed tamp footing bottom and test for proper compaction. 04.12 Excavation for Utility Trenches (A) Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. (B) Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit. SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-9 July, 2011 (C) Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. 1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flat- bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches (150 mm) below invert elevation to receive bedding course. 04.13 Approval of Subgrade (A) Notify onsite testing agent when excavations have reached required subgrade. (B) When testing agent determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. Under footings = 2500 psi concrete; under floor slabs = fill shall be organic granular material, well graded with no pieces larger than 4 inches and not more than 30 percent passing a #200 sieve. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the Contract provisions for changes in Work. (C) Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Wawa Representative. 04.14 Unauthorized Excavation: Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundations or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Project Civil Engineer/Testing Agent. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction directed by the Project Civil Engineer/Testing Agent. 04.15 Storage of Soil Materials: Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line remaining trees. 04.16 Backfill: Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: (A) Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. (B) Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. (C) Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities. (D) Concrete formwork removal. (E) Removal of trash and debris from excavation. (F) Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. (G) Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-10 July, 2011 04.17 Utility Trench Backfill (See test requirements in “Sewer Site Specifications”) (A) Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. (B) Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. (C) Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. (D) New Stores: Backfill parking lot trenches with ¾ inch crushed stone and tamp. Remodel Stores: Backfill all trenches, inside and outside, with ¾ inch crushed stone and tamp. Verify with Site Engineer. (E) Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. 04.18 Fill (A) Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet and unsatisfactory soil material, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface. (B) Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below: 1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material. 4. Under building slabs, use drainage fill material. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 04.19 Moisture Control: Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. (A) Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. (B) Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to specified density. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. 04.20 Compaction (A) Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth. (B) Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. (C) Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, buildings slabs, steps, and pavements, compact the top 12 inches (300 mm) below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-11 July, 2011 percent maximum dry density. 2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches (150mm) below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density. 04.21 Grading (A) General: Uniformly grade areas to smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances (+/-0.1’). (B) Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. (C) Smooth roll construction traffic areas on a daily basis to prevent ponding. 04.22 Subbase and Base Courses (A) Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared subgrades. Place base course material over subbases to pavements. 1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density. 2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 3. When thickness of compacted subbase of base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a single layer. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted. (B) Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide of acceptable soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer. 04.23 Filed Quality Control Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer. Testing agent will be on site at all times when earthwork is being completed. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished SECTION 02001 EARTHWORK, CLEARING, AND GRADING 02001-12 July, 2011 with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017. b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. 2. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, perform at least one test of each soil stratum to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the testing agency. 3. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 4. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face. 5. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 150 feet (45 m) or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. 04.24 Protection (A) Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. (B) Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Wawa Representative; reshape and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density. (C) Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 04.25 Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Wawa’s property. END OF SECTION 02001 SECTION 02002 SITEWORK 02002-1 July, 2013 02002-01 RELATED WORK 01.1 Refer to the latest set of Site Engineering Drawing(s) and related notes and specifications for the extent of Site Work, Soil Erosion, Landscaping and Storm Water Management provisions, including temporary controls. 01.2 Verify all Site Work requirements not specified herein with Wawa Project Manager. 01.3 "Drawings" in this section refers to Site Engineering Drawings furnished by Wawa. 01.4 Any patching of asphalt in the Parking Lot should be tacked at the seams. 01.5 All line, grade, and stake-out will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Work to be performed by a Registered Professional Land Surveyor in the state where the work is done, and be recommended by the Site Engineer. 01.6 Wawa will be responsible for establishing property corners. Corners to be maintained by Contractor during the course of construction. 02002-02 CONCRETE 02.1 Policy (A) The following specification is to be used for all exterior concrete work; canopy and tank mats, on-site curbing, and sidewalks, excluding footers and foundations. (Refer to building plans and specifications for all footers and foundations.) A control joint detail for sidewalks, canopy and tank mat is to be provided by civil engineer on all site plans. (B) Civil Engineer is to review geotech report provided by Wawa and shall provide direction for strengthening the sub-base should conditions warrant, CBR values below 3.5. Refer to ACI 330R-92, minimum acceptable M value is 600 PSI. Notify Wawa Project Engineer should additional strengthening be required. (C) The following specification is to be used for all concrete curbing inside and outside the property line unless a more stringent specification is specifically required by a municipality for curbing outside the property line. (D) The Civil Engineer shall include the following specifications on detail sheet: 1. All work is to be in conformance with ACI 330R-92, Guide for Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots and ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete Construction. 2. Concrete sidewalk is to be a minimum 4” concrete with 4” 2A Modified stone base, compacted with vibratory plate tamper. Building curbing and sidewalks are to be separate structures. 3. Concrete curbing can be either machine formed or poured in place in accordance with attached curbing detail. All curbing is to 8” x 18” with a chamfered finished face. 4. Concrete tank mat is to be minimum 8” concrete with 6” stone base outside perimeter of tank excavation. Stone base is to be tank backfill material. 5. Concrete canopy mat is to be 6” thick mat, with 6” 2B Modified stone base. 6. Control joints in curbing are to be spaced at a maximum of 15’. Control joints are to be hand tooled or saw cut, minimum depth: 25% of finished thickness, 2” for 8” thick mats, 1 ½” for 6” thick mats. Joints are to be sealed with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant Specification below. SECTION 02002 SITEWORK 02002-2 July, 2013 7. Control joints in tank and canopy mats shall be provided at equal distances of not more than 20’ and isolation joints are to be provide at all inlet and /structures. Isolation joints are to be full depth ½”, pre-molded asphalt impregnated joint material. Joint material is to be ¼” below finished surface with ½” maximum hand-tooled radius. 8. Control joints in sidewalks are to be hand-tooled, minimum 1” depth, (slab thickness/4), spaced every 8’, ½” maximum radius on hand-tooled joint. 9. Construction joints are to be keywayed with a minimum ½” x 1” trapezoidal metal keyway, or a leave in place metal keyway, hand-tool joint to match control joints, in accordance with ACI 330R-92, Section 2.7 and appendix C.3a. Leave in place metal keyways are to be minimum of ½” below finished surface. Seal joints with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant Specification below. 10. Isolation joints are to be used at: canopy columns, gas islands, inlet structures and at the meeting of any other structures. Isolation joint is to be full depth, ½” pre-molded asphalt impregnated or rubber joint material with ½” Sealtight Snap Cap. Use ½” x 6” “sill sealer”, with ½” tear away, to form isolation joint around curved surfaces. Seal all isolation joints in flat work with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to Sealant Specification below. Joint material is to be ¼” below finished surface with a ½” maximum hand-tooled radius to match control joints. 11. Sealant Specification: a. Sikaflex 1CSL – in 10 or 32 oz. cartridges b. Sikaflex 2CSL (Limestone base color) – two part, pourable sealant. 12. Material Specification: a. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595. b. Concrete for tank and canopy mats shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 PSI. Concrete for curbing and sidewalks shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3500 PSI. Concrete shall be manufactured and delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94. c. Minimum cement content is to be 560 lb. per cubic yard. d. Concrete is to be Fibermesh MD reinforced. (a.k.a. Fibermesh Enforce E3) Fibermesh MD is to be added at a rate of 1 ½ lbs/cu. yard. Contractor to submit to Wawa Construction Manager a Concrete Supplier Certificate stating approved Fibermesh material, at the minimum rate added to each batch of concrete delivered to the project site. Each certificate shall be accompanied by one copy of each batch delivery ticket indicating the trade name, manufacturer’s name and amount per cubic yard of reinforcement material added to each batch of concrete. e. Welded wire fabric may be substituted for use of Fibermesh only with prior approval by Wawa’s Construction manager. If approved, welded wire is to be 6x6 W2.9xW2.9, ASTM A-185. Welded wire is to be positioned in the slab below the finished surface at: h/4 +1”, h = thickness of slab. (3” for 8” slab 2 ½” for 6” slap). Welded wire is not be cut when saw cutting control joints. Welded wire is to be positioned on chairs or precast blocks and is to be physically checked and adjusted for depth during concrete placement. Overlap individual sections of welded wire 6” and securely fasten to prevent separation during concrete placement. f. Maximum allowable concrete slump shall be 4 inches. g. Minimum aggregate size is 3/8” with 7.5% air entrainment. h. Maximum aggregate size is 1” with 6% air entrainment. (Within 1% SECTION 02002 SITEWORK 02002-3 July, 2013 tolerance, % by volume, conforming to ASTM C260). 13. Use of membrane-curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated with membrane-curing compound, applied with a pressure sprayer, maximum coverage of 200 sq. ft. 14. Finish is to be steel troweled and then light broomed, to provide a uniform, non- slip surface finish. 15. Quality Assurance: a. Testing Agency: Wawa, Inc. shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. b. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by the Wawa Project Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner's approval. c. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement will include the following: d. MSampling fresh concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. e. Slump: ASTM C143; minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day’s pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed and whenever strength samples are taken. f. Air Content: AST C173, volumetric method for Lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. g. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Cylinders used for acceptance shall be cured in accordance with section 9 of ASTM C31. h. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day’s pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the first 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. i. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. j. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. k. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 PSI (3.4 MPa). l. Test results will be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Ready- mix Producer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, compressive strength and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests. m. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non- destructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. n. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place SECTION 02002 SITEWORK 02002-4 July, 2013 concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed. 02002-03 TOPSOIL 03.1 Refer to Drawing requirements for any special soil depths or treatment for Landscaping. 03.2 Where indicated, place 4" of topsoil, providing any additional soil as required to bring grades 1" above those shown to allow for settlement. 03.3 Clean up, hand rake, and remove any debris, gravel and stones greater than ½”, and leave in good clean condition for fine grading and seeding. 03.4 Contractor to provide and fine grade all areas ready to be accepted for all landscaping work by Wawa. 02002-04 ASPHALT 04.1 Policy (A) The following specification is to be used for all on-site paving. This paving specification is based on a paving study performed by R.J. Collins & Associates and on a pavement evaluation prepared by Whitestone Associates. For paving outside the property line, the paving specification required by the approving authority shall be used unless that specification is of less depth than the specification below. In that case, Wawa’s on-site paving specification is to be utilized. (B) A paving detail and specification is to be prepared by the civil engineer and included on all site plans, based on the specifications below. Paving Specification/Notes, Section D, are to be included verbatim in the paving details. (C) Paving Specification, 04.2(A) is to be the default specification for all projects with a CBR value of greater than 5.00. Civil engineer is to have a detailed discussion and get approval from Wawa’s Project Engineer for use of all other paving sections. 04.1 Paving Sections (A) Clay and silty sub-grades capable of achieving a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of 5 to 7: (SN number of 3.04): 1. 2.0” surface course 2. 4.0” base course 3. 6.0” sub-base course (B) Sandy and gravel sub-grades capable of achieving a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of 8 or greater: (SN number of 2.60). (use only with approval of Wawa’s Project Engineer): 1. 1.5” surface course 2. 2.5” base course 3. 6.0” sub-base course SECTION 02002 SITEWORK 02002-5 July, 2013 (C) Sub grades capable of achieving a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of less than 5 will require a site specific sub-base and paving section. The civil engineer is to refer to the geotech report and shall prepare a paving specification to attain a structural number (SN) of 3.30, based on the AASHTO Road Test Equation. SN of 3.30 should be achieved by strengthening the sub-grade, sub-base, base and surface course. Design may include use of geogrid reinforcement and stabilized aggregate base. 1. 1.5” to 2.0” surface course 2. 2.5” to 4.0” base course 3. 6.0 to __” dense graded aggregate or stabilized aggregate 04.3 AASHTO ROAD TEST EQUATION A. SN = A1D1 + A2D2 + A3D3 1. SN = Structural Number 2. A1, A2 & A3 are the structural coefficient or equivalency value for each layer of pavement. A1 = Asphalt wearing course: 0.44 A2 = Asphalt base course: 0.44 A3 = Dense graded aggregate: 0.14 A3 = Stabilized aggregate: 0.30 3. D1, D2 & D3 are the thickness of the respective course. 04.4 Materials Specification: Paving sections are to specify materials as shown on the following table for the respective state: Layer Delaware Maryland New Jersey Penn. Virginia Surface DELDOT Type C Surface MDOT – SC NJDOT I-4 Surface PENNDOT ID-2 Surface Course VDOT SM-2A Surface Course Base DELDOT Type B Base MDOT – BC NJDOT I-2 PENNDOT Base Course VDOT SM-2A Base course Sub-base DELDOT Type B Base Course Aggregate MDOT – DGA NJDOT DGA PENNDOT 2a Modified Stone VDOT 21A Crushed Aggregate Base 04.5 Paving Specification/Notes The following paving specification is to be included verbatim with all paving details: (A) Asphalt paving for driveways and parking areas shall consist of hot-laid plant-mix bituminous concrete paving material containing a blend of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler and asphalt cement binder. Although gradation requirements are provided for different types or courses of asphalt paving mixes, it is intended that applicable provisions from the specifications of the Department of Transportation (DOT) of the state where the project site is locate shall govern. (B) At least two (2) weeks prior to paving, the contractor shall submit to Wawa Inc. a copy of the state DOT approved job mix formula for each paving mix proposed for use on the project. Each job mix formula must indicate the sources and proportions of the mix components; the resultant mix gradation range and the Marshall stability, SECTION 02002 SITEWORK 02002-6 July, 2013 flow and air voids test results. Approval of each job mix formula must be obtained from Wawa Inc. before ordering materials. (C) Contractor to submit to Wawa Construction Manager, all delivery tickets for asphalt material, indicating formula mix approved as described above in Section 3.D. (D) For pavements containing a dense graded aggregate base or a stabilized aggregate base, asphalt-paving layers shall consist of a binder course and a wearing surface. For full-depth asphalt pavements, the paving layers shall consist of an asphalt base course, together with a binder course and wearing surface. The thickness and locations of the respective courses of asphalt paving shall be in accordance with the approved site plan for the project. (E). Placement of asphalt paving shall commence after all grading and utility work has been completed and approved. For full-depth asphalt paving, the asphalt base course shall be placed on the prepared sub grade, provided the sub-grade is not frozen, muddy, or overly wet. When full depth asphalt paving is not used, the asphalt binder course shall be placed on a properly compacted base, consisting of either dense graded aggregate or stabilized aggregate. (F) All utility fittings (inlet grates, manhole covers, valve boxes) shall be in place and at the correct elevation at the start of paving. During paving operations, adequate protection must be provided against all traffic by means of temporary barriers, flashing lights, etc. until the completion and approval of the finished pavement. Remove all barriers as soon as the paving work has been completed and approved. All paving work shall be performed in compliance with applicable State DOT specifications. (G) For full-depth asphalt pavements, the prepared sub-grade shall be treated with a bituminous prime coat applied at a rate of 0.3 to 0.5 gallons per square yard prior to placement of the base course. For asphalt pavements placed on a dense graded or stabilized aggregate base course, the surface of the base course shall be treated with a bituminous prime coat applied at a rate of 0.2 gallons per square yard. Prime coat shall be either hot liquid asphalt or rapid setting emulsified asphalt. The prime coat shall be uniformly applied by means of a pressure distributor with the temperature range specified by applicable State DOT specifications. (H) All layers of asphalt paving shall be placed by means of a self-propelled paving machine. Paving material shall be placed at sufficient loose thickness to assure the specified finished layer thickness after rolling. When the required finished thickness of the base course or binder course exceeds 3 inches, the paving material for that course must be placed and compacted in two separate and equal layers. Wawa Inc. requires the collection of all delivery slips of paving material and also reserves the right to take core specimens to verify the finished pavement thickness prior to making final pavement. (I) All asphalt paving materials shall be placed within a temperature range of 300° to 320° F, or not more than 15° F below the minimum temperature shown on the material supplier’s bill of lading. Do not place paving material during periods of precipitation, on wet surfaces or when the air temperature is less than 40° F. All paving material for each course of pavement shall be of uniform appearance and surface texture throughout. Correct any irregularities in the surface of the paving material, particularly the wearing surface, directly behind the paver and prior to compaction. Avoid broadcasting of the paving material. SECTION 02002 SITEWORK 02002-7 July, 2013 (J) Commence rolling as soon as the paving material can be compacted without displacement. Rolling must be done while the paving material is within 15° to 25° F of the temperature of the material when delivered. Compact all paving material to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum Marshall Density, as determined at the hot mix plant. Final compaction shall be accomplished using either a minimum 10 ton steel wheeled static roller or a steel, smooth drum vibratory roller with a minimum 10 ton vibratory rating. Final rolling shall remove all indentations or irregularities in the pavement surface. (K) All paving work shall be performed with utmost care and in accordance with all industry accepted standards of good practice. The contractor shall avoid any damage or staining to curbs, sidewalks, aprons, shrubbery or other work. All paving edges must be sealed using rubberized asphalt hot poured sealing material, applied by squeegee to a minimum 6-inch width. (L) Where asphalt pavement is being placed after November 1, the binder course shall be used as a surface until the following spring. At that time, any irregularities, potholes or other signs of distress in the binder course shall be repaired or replaced. The finished wearing surface shall then be applied at the direction of a Wawa representative. (M) Graduation Requirements: Asphalt paving mixtures for driveways and parking areas shall comply with the following particle size distribution requirements as applicable: Percent by Weight Passing Sieve Size Base Course Binder Course Wearing Surface 2” 100 - - 1 ½” 95 – 100 100 - 1” - 90 – 100 - ¾” 60 – 100 75 – 95 - ½” - 50 – 80 100 3/8” 40 – 70 45 – 75 80 – 100 #4 - 30 – 60 45 – 80 #8 15 – 40 15 – 45 30 – 60 #16 - 10 – 30 20 – 45 #30 8 – 24 8 – 24 10 – 35 #50 5 – 20 5 – 20 5 – 30 #100 4 – 10 4 – 10 4 – 14 #200 2 – 8 2 – 8 3 – 10 02002-05 TRAFFIC PAINTING 05.1 Provide for parking and drive areas as noted on Drawings. 05.2 Paint shall be Benjamin Moore. (See Section 09900-03.8.) 02002-06 FENCING 06.1 When required, shall be 6'-0" high cedar, stockade shadow box type. Unless otherwise noted. 02002-07 POLE SIGN AND SITE LIGHTING BASES 07.1 Provide base at a height of 6" above ground for Site Lighting and Pole Sign. Locate minimum of 3'-0" away from edge of curbs and at a depth of 1’-0” in ground for every 5’- 0” above ground. SECTION 02282 SOIL TREATMENT 02282-1 December 8, 2011 02282-1 SUMMARY 01.1 Work required for subterranean termite control treatment 02282-2 SUBMITTALS 02.1 Submit product technical data including Material Safety Data Sheets, copy of termiticide label and detailed application instructions. 02.2 Submit certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations 02.3 Submit sample of the form of guarantee 02282-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 03.1 Qualifications of Applicator: Materials shall be installed by bonded exterminator, licensed in the State of Florida for application of soil treatment solutions, and showing evidence of 5 years of continuous business operation under the current name 03.2 Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for preparation of substrates. 03.3 Application: Perform application in compliance with Florida Statutes, Chapter 482 and 100-55, and other state and federal laws. 02282-4 WARRANTY 04.1 Provide a written service agreement stating that soil treatment will prevent subterranean termites from attacking the building and its contents for a period of not less than five (5) years, from date of Substantial Completion. The soil treatment firm shall also inspect the structure(s) annually and retreat as necessary. The service agreement shall cover any damage during the warranted period and repairs to damaged surfaces up to 25,000 dollars 04.2 The Owner shall be offered an optional renewal contract of the services for the same terms. 02282-5 MATERIALS 05.1 Soil Treatment: The termiticide solution shall be currently registered by the EPA. Provide one of the following: 1. ProBuild TC 2. Premise 3. Dragnet 05.2 Label chemical container, indicating types and percentages of toxicants (chemicals) used, and precautions to be observed in their use, Deliver chemicals to site in sealed containers as supplied by manufacturer. Deliver additional copies of MSDS with the chemical containers. 05.3 Add a dye solution for visual measurement of the solution. SECTION 02282 SOIL TREATMENT 02282-2 December 8, 2011 02282-06 APPLICATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 06.1 Treatment shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications as currently applies to treatment of commercial buildings under construction/renovation. 06.2 Solution mix and application method shall be in accordance with the termiticide Specimen Label as required for subterranean termites. Solution shall be mixed on site. 02282-07 TIME OF APPLICATION 07.1 Begin soil poisoning after all foundation and slab preparations have been made and prior to the placement of any vapor barriers (or any other barriers). 07.2 Do not apply treatment when surface water is present or if inclement weather is expected which would disturb final placement 02282-08 APPLICATION RATES 08.1 Comply with manufacturer's concentration and application rates. 08.2 Treatment shall be performed in a manner that will not introduce termiticide into any existing or new drainage system. 02282-09 SIGNS 09.1 Post signs in areas of application indicating that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction. 02282-10 RE-TREATMENT 10.1 Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other activities following application. END SECTION 02282 SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE September 9, 2015 02530-01 POLICY 01.1 The following specifications are to insure that Wawa receives uniform sanitary designs, which minimize the potential for possible backups and line failures and provide for ease of maintenance. 01.2 These specifications are to be used as minimum design requirements and it this responsibility of the Civil Engineer preparing the plans to ensure that the plans address all municipal requirements and regulations. Should any local regulations require deviation from these specifications, the Wawa Project Engineer is to approve prior to submittal. 01.3 All sanitary designs are to be in compliance with Wawa Specifications Manual as well as the specifications in this document. 02530-02 GENERAL SANITARY SITE REQUIREMENTS 02.1 Exterior sanitary waste and grease waste piping shall be 4”. 02.2 Exterior sanitary waste and grease waste piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Where specifically required by the approving authority, standard or extra heavy cast iron shall be provided. 02.3 Exterior sanitary waste and grease waste piping shall be designed at ¼” per foot slope. A pipe slope of 1/8” per foot shall be an exception and require approval from the Wawa Project Engineer prior to the development of the Site Drawings. Pipe slopes that differ from the above shall be avoided. Where the slopes listed above cannot be met, provide a packaged sewage pump station. 02.4 Under no circumstance shall sanitary piping be designed with a slope greater than ½” per foot. 02.5 Changes in direction of waste piping using ¼” per foot slope shall be made using a standard cleanout configuration. Changes in direction of waste piping using 1/8” per foot slope shall be made using manholes. 02.6 Provide a “two-way” cleanout on the sanitary and grease waste piping within five feet of leaving the building. Cleanout cover plates shall be independently supported off of the piping system to allow for grade movement. 02.7 Exterior Grease Interceptor shall be a two (2) compartment concrete basin, with a liquid holding capacity of 1250 gallons. The grease interceptor shall be installed in the rear of the building to minimize parking lot obstructions during cleaning. Construction of the interceptor and manholes shall be rated for highway traffic loads. Cleanouts shall be provided on both the inlet and discharge piping. For alternate location, in particular Remodel projects, verify with Wawa Project Engineer. 02530-03 PACKAGED SEWAGE PUMP STATIONS 03.1 Where building sewage piping inverts, as listed above cannot be met, provide a packaged sewage pump system. 03.2 Provide a complete packaged sewage pump station including but not limited to: duplex grinder pumps, fiberglass sump basin, control devices, control wiring and alarms. The Contractor shall provide complete installation, including the hiring of an Electrical Sub- SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE September 9, 2015 contractor. 03.3 Sewage pump station and equipment shall be Environmental/One model number “GP2014” with model “MOD 206” duplex control panel. Manufacturer and equipment substitutions shall not be accepted. 03.4 Preferred location of the pump station shall be in a grassy, non-traffic area. When located in traffic areas the sump basin and covers shall be rated for highway loading. 03.5 The pump station control panel shall be located on the exterior wall of the store, rear or side walls only. Where the distance from the pump station to the building exceeds 75’, the control panel shall be located at the pump. The control panel shall include the following options: (A) High water alarm (B) Alarm light (C) Alarm bell with silencer (D) Auxiliary contact for audible alarm in Manager’s Office. 03.6 Sewage pump station model numbers and control panel options shall be listed on the Site Engineers Drawings. Upon completion of system installation, the contractor shall provide to the Wawa Project Manager three (3) complete operation manuals. 03.7 Pump manufacturers representative and installer shall provide a complete 2 year warranty to include all parts and labor. Service calls shall be answered within 4 hours, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. At the end of the two (2) year warranty period, a yearly maintenance agreement shall be offered. This shall not be added to the Site Drawings. 02530-04 REQUIRED NOTES ON PLANS/DETAILS 04.1 Wawa, Inc. shall employ an independent soils inspector for 100% continuous inspection of the bedding and backfill operation. Compaction tests shall be taken at the bottom of trench and at each lift of backfill. 04.2 General Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to record as-built top of pipe elevations taken when bedding operation is 75% complete. These elevations shall be taken at points of connection, changes in direction and at minimum 20’ intervals along the length of the pipe. These elevations shall be recorded as as-built dimensions on a site plan for review by the Project Civil Engineer. 04.3 All sanitary lines are to be flushed prior to Contractor turn-over of the facility. Written verification shall be supplied in closing documents. END SECTION 02530 SECTION 02531 PLUMBING SITEWORK September 9, 2015 02531-01 SCOPE 01.1 The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, appliances, and services necessary for and incidental to the proper completion of site utility services as related to the plumbing and drainage systems. Including work shown, implied or required by the Drawings and these specifications. (A) It is the intent of these specifications to supplement the specifications produced by the Site Engineers. These specifications do not include special requirements as set forth by the local authorities. Requirements of the local authorities shall be met with no exception. (B) Refer to Plumbing Specification Section 15001 for additional requirements. (C) Work includes, but is not limited to, all sanitary and grease waste services, domestic water services, storm water services, fire protection water services, and testing and adjusting of all systems. (D) Work not specifically covered or having minor details obviously omitted, but necessary to complete any part of the plumbing services installation, shall be provided by the Contractor without additional cost to Wawa. (E) As-Built Drawings: The Plumbing Contractor shall keep one set of the latest issue of Site Drawings which reflects the actual installed conditions and connections of all equipment, devices and any changes. These Drawings shall be included in the closing documents. 02531-02 REGULATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS 02.1 All Work under this section shall be provided in strict accordance with local municipality, state, and federal, codes and requirements. Where differences may exist, the code shall govern. Additional requirements shall be met at no extra cost to Wawa. 02.2 Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approvals and pay all related fees as required by the municipality. Contractor shall obtain a “Certificate of Inspection” from the local authority, as required, indicating satisfactory compliance with all governing codes. 02531-03 WATER DISTRIBUTION 03.1 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the utility company supplying water, including tapping of water mains, backflow preventors, piping materials, and testing and disinfection. 03.2 Verify disconnection and removal of existing services with the water utility. Where required, provide a temporary service at the beginning of the project. 03.3 Water service piping shall be one of the following materials: (A) PE (polyethylene) plastic piping, with insert fittings. (B) Type “K” copper tube with wrought copper fittings. Solder shall be lead free. (C) Ductile-Iron Pipe with push-on joints and fittings and rubber gaskets. SECTION 02531 PLUMBING SITEWORK September 9, 2015 03.4 Curb boxes, shut-off valves, tapping assemblies, and water meters shall be provided in strict accordance with water utility requirements. 03.5 Provide a complete packaged sewage pump station including but not limited to: duplex grinder pumps, fiberglass sump basin, control devices, control wiring and alarms. Sewage pump station and equipment shall be Environmental/One model number “GP2014” with model “MOD 206” duplex control panel. Manufacturer and equipment substitutions shall not be accepted. 03.6 The pump station control panel shall be located on the exterior wall of the store, rear or side walls only. Where the distance from the pump station to the building exceeds 75’, the control panel shall be located at the pump. The control panel shall include the following options: (A) High water alarm (B) Alarm light (C) Alarm bell with silencer (D) Auxiliary contact for future connection to the Johnson Controls “ACT-2” panel 03.7 Installation of packaged system shall be in strict accordance with written manufacturers requirements. 03.8 Adjust pump and accessory settings, controls and safety and alarm devices. Commissioning of system shall be provided by a manufacturers certified installer. 03.9 Clean dirt and debris from wet pits, pumps, and piping. 03.10 Train Wawa employee on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. 03.11 Review data in the operations and maintenance manual. 03.12 Schedule training with Wawa employee with at least seven (7) days notice 02531-04 SANITARY SEWERAGE AND GREASE WASTE 04.1 Sanitary sewer and grease waste piping shall be one of the following materials: (A) PVC sewer pipe and fittings for gasketed joints. (B) Hub-and-Spigot, cast iron soil pipe and fittings for gasketed joints. Where specifically required by the approving authority, standard or extra heavy cast iron shall be provided. 04.2 Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturers’ written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag line, and pull past each joint as it is completed. 04.3 Changes in direction of waste piping using ¼” per foot slope shall be made using a standard cleanout configuration. Changes in direction of waste piping using 1/8” per SECTION 02531 PLUMBING SITEWORK September 9, 2015 foot slope shall be made using manholes. 04.4 Provide a “two-way” cleanout on the sanitary and grease waste piping within five (5) feet of leaving the building. Cleanout cover plates shall be independently supported off of the piping system to allow for grade movement. 04.5 Exterior sanitary waste and grease waste piping shall be designed at ¼” per foot slope. A pipe slope of 1/8” per foot shall be an exception and require approval from the Wawa Project Engineer prior to the development of the Site Drawings. 04.6 Under no circumstance shall sanitary waste or grease waste piping be designed with a slope greater than ½” per foot. 02531-05 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 05.1 Comply with requirements of utility supplying natural gas and coordinate connection to main. 05.2 Comply with NFPA-54, “National Fuel Gas Code” for gas piping materials, components, installations, testing and purging. 05.3 Gas piping shall be schedule 40 black steel, with malleable iron screwed fittings. 05.4 Meters and devices shall be provided in accordance with utility requirements. 05.5 Install buried gas piping a minimum of 36” below finished grade. 05.6 Paint exposed pipe, fittings, valves, threads, and supports with a rust-proof paint. 02531-06 STORM DRAINAGE 06.1 Storm drainage piping shall be one of the following materials: (A) PVC sewer pipe and fittings for gasketed joints. (B) Hub-and-Spigot, cast iron soil pipe and fittings for gasketed joints. 06.2 Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturers written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag line, and pull past each joint as it is completed. 02531-07 PACKAGED SEWAGE PUMP STATIONS (moved to 02530-03) END SECTION 02531 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM September 9, 2015 02810-01 PROCEDURE 01.1 All land development and landscape plans for new sites are to include Rain Bird automatic irrigation system. Irrigation designer will prepare Irrigation Design Drawings that are to be included with land development construction plan sets. 01.2 Civil Engineer is forward via e-mail, copy of landscape plan to the irrigation designer, which will be used as base plan for preparation of irrigation plan. Forward landscape plan to: Michael Haener 88 Main Avenue Ocean Grove, NJ 07756 Phone: 732-988-8349 Email: Irrig8r@msn.com Lead-time for receiving completed irrigation plans is three weeks. The irrigation designer will e-mail irrigation plans back to Civil Engineer. It is the Civil Engineers responsibility to confirm that the designer has received copy of the landscape plan that they can work with and to track receipt of finished irrigation plan. 02810-02 SPECIFICATIONS 02.1 All irrigation supply, lateral water lines and sprinkler heads are to located a minimum of 3’ behind curb line on entrance and exit radius. 02.2 Minimum burial depth for all supply and laterals is 18”. 02.3 All landscape area adjacent to buildings and parking areas around buildings are to be irrigated by drip systems. 02.4 Lawn areas outside of perimeter sidewalks are to be design and controller programmed to irrigate at off-peak hours. 02.5 Sprinkler heads are to be the following: (A) Rain Bird 5000 series (B) Rain Bird 1804 (C) Rain Bird 1812 02.6 Drip systems are to be Netafin Dripline, 18”x 18” spacing w/.9GPH emitters. 02.7 Irrigation controller is to be Rain Bird, ESP-16LX, Automatic Controller, located in mechanical room of building. 02.8 No substitutions or deviation from Irrigation Plan will be allow. 02.9 Irrigation systems are to be warranted by installing Contractor for a period of one year from the date of Certificate of Occupancy. Irrigation Contractor is to provide all maintenance, adjustment, programming and winterization during the first year warranty. END SECTION 02810 SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING 3-7 July, 2012 02900-01 PROCEDURE 01.1 The objective of developing the landscaping plan is to produce an attractive, well- balanced landscape design, which is both aesthetic and functional. The primary focus should be placed on producing a design which compliments the building and its use, as well as the neighborhood, with strong emphasis placed on site visibility, maintenance, hardiness of plants selected, and future growth of the landscaping. Notwithstanding these goals, the landscape design should also address all municipal landscape requirements and regulations. 01.2 The plan should make use of riverbed stone, mulch areas, and a variety of shrubs, trees, and ground covers chosen from the list of Acceptable Plant Material. Plant selection should also concur with any municipal planting requirements. Plants should be carefully chosen taking into consideration local climate, sun conditions, soil conditions, proximity to walkways and parking areas. Turf shall be proposed over septic field areas. When practical and permissible, grass areas on the site should be kept to a minimum in order to reduce the maintenance required for the site. 01.3 Visibility of the building, signage, and entrance driveways is of critical importance in landscape design. As a result, plant selection in these areas should be limited to low growing shrubs (1’ - 3’ mature height) and groundcovers. When local ordinances require the planting of taller shrubs or trees along street frontages, they should be selected and placed to reduce negative impacts on site visibility. 01.4 The landscape plan should be designed under the supervision of a Landscape Architect licensed, or certified, to practice in the state where the property is located. 02900-02 SPECIFICATIONS (The following fourteen items are to be included verbatim on notes on all Landscape Plans) 02.1 All topsoil shall be a minimum 4” and shall be approved by Wawa Construction Representative prior to installation. 02.2 All landscape and grass areas are to be hand raked and left clear of all: stones, rock, construction debris and any unsuitable materials. 02.3 New Stores Only: All landscape and grass areas are to be irrigated by automatic sprinkler system. (See Irrigation Specification.) 02.4 Landscape Contractor will locate all underground utilities prior to any excavation and planting installation. 02.5 All areas to be landscaped or covered with stone must be treated with a pre-emergence herbicide (surflan, dactal or approved equal) in accordance with applicable federal, state regulations and the manufacturer’s instructions. 02.6 Landscape Contractor to supply and install a pervious weed barrier (Dewitt, DuPont or approved equal) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions within all landscapes, including stone and mulch beds. All weed barrier will be overlapped a minimum of 6 inches at all seams. At plant locations, barrier should be cut in an “X” pattern so to accommodate root ball and replaced after plant has been installed. 02.7 Weed barrier shall not be visible in areas designated for stone mulch. When stone is called for adjacent to curb or sidewalks, it shall be feathered down to curb level from a distance 24” from the curb. SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING 3-8 July, 2012 02.8 All proposed landscaping to be nursery grown, typical of their species or variety. They are to have normal vigorous root systems, free from defects and infections and in accordance with ANSI Z60.1. 02.9 All proposed plantings shall be installed per “standards of the American Association of Nurserymen” with regard to planting, pit size, backfill mixture, staking and guying. 02.10 All planting containers and baskets shall be removed during planting. All plants shall be set plumb and positioned so that the top of the root collar matches, or is no more than two (2”) inches above, finished grade. Replace amended backfill in 6 inch layers and compact backfill to eliminate voids. Contractor shall provide a four inch high earthen watering saucer along the perimeter of each planting pit. Contractor shall water newly planted vegetation prior to mulching planting pit. All voids shall be filled and settling mitigated as required. Aluminum edging shall be installed around all planting areas to delineate between different landscape materials. Aluminum edging shall be flush with freshly mowed lawn and mulch. 02.11 After initial watering and prior to mulching, Contractor shall apply herbicides and pre- emergent herbicides as required to eliminate any weed seeds or plants present on root ball. 02.12 All planting beds and pits shall be mulched with double ground hardwood mulch at a minimum depth of 3”. 02.13 Seedbed Preparation: (A) Apply limestone and fertilizer according to soil tests or fertilizer may be applied at the rate of 500 pounds per acre or 11 pounds per 1000 square feet using 10-20-10 or equivalent. In addition, 300 pounds 38-0-0 per acre or equivalent of slow release nitrogen may be used in lieu of topdressing. (B) Work lime and fertilizer into the soil as practical to a depth of 4 inches with a disc, springtooth harrow or other suitable equipment. The final harrowing or discing operation should parallel to the general contour. Continue tillage until a reasonable uniform, fine seedbed is prepared. All but clay or silty soils and coarse sands should be rolled to firm the seedbed wherever feasible. (C) Inspect seedbed just before seeding. If traffic has left the soil compacted, the area must be retilled and firmed as outlined below. (D) Grass seeding mixture and application rate: Percentage of Application Rate Minimum Germination total weight Seed Type Allowed 60% 5-7 lbs/1000 s.f. “REBEL” Tall Fescue 90 - 97 35% “YORKTOWN” Perennial Rye 90 - 98 5% “STREEKER” Redtop 90 - 92 (E) In areas designated as sod, fescue sod is to be installed on minimum 4” topsoil. Areas to be sodded are to be prepared as noted above for seeded areas. 02.14 Plant material shall be guaranteed for one year from the date of substantial SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING 3-9 July, 2012 completeness. Plants, dead, unhealthy, dying or damaged through loss of branches and/or foliage shall be replaced by the Contractor. Lawns that are not in good condition at the end of the guarantee period shall be repaired until a good lawn results. It is understood that Wawa Management shall assume responsibility for watering all plant material and lawn area beyond the guarantee period commencing with the date of substantial completeness. END SECTION 02900 SECTION 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING 03301-1 September 9, 2015 03301–01 GENERAL 01.1 Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following for each concrete mix according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: (A) Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Wawa Representative. (B) Shop Drawings detailing fabrication, bending, and placement. Submit one (1) electronic set of the Shop Drawings for review. Allow 10 business days for review of submittals for the first submission, 7 business days for review of the second submission, and 5 business days for any submission thereafter. (C) Material certificates signed by product manufacturers certifying that product complies with requirements. (D) Samples of materials as requested by Wawa Project Manager, including names, sources, descriptions for Color Finishes. (E) Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. Concrete mixes shall be proportioned per Section 3.9 of ACI-301. Certified historical test data shall serve as a basis for each mix design. Deviations shall be substantiated with additional certified trial mix testing and results. Submit mix design, historical test data or trial mix results for approval prior to proceeding with work. 01.2 Quality Assurance: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," and ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." (A) Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. (B) Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. (C) Concrete shall be reinforced, detailed and constructed in accordance with the ACI 301 “Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings” and ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (latest editions), and the Manual of Standard Practice. Placing of concrete shall not start until the placement of reinforcing has been approved by the independent testing agency. 03301-02 PRODUCTS 02.1 Steel Reinforcement: (A) Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. (B) Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, flat sheets. 02.2 Concrete Materials: As follows: (A) Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. SECTION 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING 03301-2 September 9, 2015 (B) Aggregate: ASTM C33, uniformly graded, from a single source. (C) Water: ASTM C94. (D) All admixtures shall contain less than 0.1 percent chloride ions. (E) Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260 for exterior exposed concrete and foundations exposed to freeze-thaw. (F) Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A for placement and workability (G) High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: Super Plasticizer: ASTM C494, Type F or G for placement and workability. (H) Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type for placement and workability. (I) Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D for placement and workability 02.3 Related Materials: As follows: (A) Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 07620 (B) Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery. (C) Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class A. (D) Water-Based Acrylic membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. (E) Evaporation Control Compound: Monomolecular film-forming compound. (F) Underlayment Compound: Free-flowing, self-leveling cement-based compound. (G) Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. (I) Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. (J) Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, of type, class, and grade to suit requirements. 02.4 Curing Materials: As follows: (A) Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. (B) Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9oz./sq. yd. dry. (C) Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap- polyethylene sheet. 02.5 Concrete Mixes: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, with the following properties: SECTION 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING 03301-3 September 9, 2015 (A) Compressive Strength (28 Days) as follows: Footings 4,000 psi Piers & Walls 4,000 psi Slabs 4,000 psi (B) Air Entrainment: 6%± 1 ½% in all exposed concrete. 02.6 Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. 03301-03 EXECUTION 03.1 Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. 03.2 Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 03.3 Leave formwork, for beam, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved 28-day design compressive strength. 03.4 Comply with ACI 318, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 03.5 Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E1643. 03.6 Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 03.7 Joints: Locate and install construction, isolation, and contraction joints as noted on the plans, maximum spacing in each direction 10 feet, maximum length to width dimension 2-1. 03.8 Concrete Placement: Deposit concrete continuously and avoid segregation. (A) Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. (B) Screed and initial-float concrete floors and slabs using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. (C) Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 306 when cold-weather conditions exist. (D) Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R when hot-weather conditions exist. 03.9 Finish formed surfaces as follows: SECTION 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING 03301-4 September 9, 2015 (A) Apply rough-formed finish, defined in ACI 301, to concrete surfaces indicated or not exposed to public view. (B) Apply smooth-formed finish, defined in ACI 301, to concrete surfaces indicated and exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 03.10 Finishing Floors and Slabs: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. (A) Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish, defined in ACI 301, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. (B) Float Finish: Apply float finish, defined in ACI 301, to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. (C) Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. (D) Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. (E) Broom Finish: Apply a non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete, brooming with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route, to platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 03.11 Floor Flatness and Levelness Tolerances (A) Subfloors Under Materials Such as Concrete Toppings, Ceramic Tile and Sand Bed Terrazzo: ACI 302.1R and ASTM E 1155, overall floor flatness (Ff) of 18, floor levelness (FI) of 15, with minimum local values of floor flatness (Ff) of 13, and floor levelness (Fl) of 10. (B) Subfloors Under Materials Such as Vinyl Tile, Epoxy Toppings, and Paint: ACI 302.1R and ASTM E 1155, overall floor flatness (Ff) of 30, floor levelness (Fl) of 20, with minimum local values of floor flatness (Ff) of 24, and floor levelness (Fl) of 15. (C) Tolerance test shall be performed prior to terrazzo pour. PM shall verify levelness within 1%; flat within +- 1/4” as measured in 10’-0”. 03.12 Concrete Protection and Curing: Protect concrete from excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. (A) Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause excessive moisture loss. (B) Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. SECTION 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - BUILDING 03301-5 September 9, 2015 (C) Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by moisture curing or moisture-retaining-cover curing. No cure compound for any slab receiving terrazzo. 03301-04 QUALITY CONTROL 04.1 Testing Agency: Wawa, Inc. shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. 04.1 Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by the Wawa Project Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner's approval. 04.3 Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement will include the following: (A) Sampling fresh concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. (B) Slump: ASTM C143; minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day’s pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed and whenever strength samples are taken. (D) Air Content: AST C173, volumetric method for Lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. (E) Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Cylinders used for acceptance shall be cured in accordance with section 9 of ASTM C31. (F) Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day’s pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the first 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. (G) Requires certification of proper curing of concrete in footings, piers, etc. For steel columns as per OSHA Steel Erection Standards. 04.4 When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 04.5 When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. 04.6 Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 04.7 Test results will be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready-mix Producer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive SECTION 03302 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITE 03302-1 March 2019 03302-01 GENERAL 01.1 Policy: (A) The following specification is to be used for all exterior concrete work; excluding footers and foundations. (Refer to building plans and specifications for all footers and foundations.) A control joint detail for sidewalks and parking areas is to be provided by Civil Engineer on all site plans. A control joint detail for the canopy and tank mat is to be provided on the Wawa fuel system plans and architectural drawings. (B) Testing Agency is to review geotechnical report provided by Wawa or Developer, per land lease agreement, and shall provide direction for strengthening the sub- base should conditions warrant, LBR values below 10. Refer to ACI330R-08, minimum acceptable M value is 600 PSI. Notify Wawa Project Engineer should additional strengthening be required. 01.2 All work is to be in conformance with ACI330R-08, Guide for Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots and ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete Construction. 01.3 Concrete is to be used for the parking area adjacent to the building sidewalk (Parking Mat), the Loading Zone and Refrigerated Delivery, Trash Compound, Air Machine, Parking Spaces, Clean Out Tops, and all other areas as detailed on the civil engineering site plans. (See Wawa Site Specifications, Section 20, Miscellaneous Details). 01.4 Concrete sidewalk including joints, sealant, and material specifications see 03302-03. 01.5 Concrete curbing including joints, sealant, and material specifications see 03302-02. 01.6 Concrete tank mat including joints, sealant, and material specifications see 03302-04. 01.7 Concrete canopy mat including joints, sealant, and material specifications see 03302-04. 01.8 Control joints are to be spaced at a maximum of 15’. Control joints are to saw cut using an early entry “Soff-Cut” type saw, minimum depth: 25% of finished thickness, 2” for 8” thick pads, 1 ½” for 6” thick pads. Control joints shall be installed within 2 hours minimum and 12 hours maximum after mat placement, without raveling, and bef ore random cracking occurs. Joints are to be sealed with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to 01.14 Sealant Specification. 01.9 Construction joints are to be formed with PNA Construction Technologies Diamond Dowel System plate dowels or approved equal spaced per manufacturer’s current recommendations. Hand-tool joint to match control joints, in accordance with ACI330R- 08, Section 2.7 and appendix C.3a. Seal joints with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to 01.14 Sealant Specification. 01.10 Use concrete up to asphalt transition detail (see Wawa Site Specifications, Section 20, Miscellaneous Details) at all concrete to asphalt joints with the exception of the tank mat. 01.11 Isolation joints are to be used at: canopy columns, gas islands, bollards, inlet structures and at the meeting of any other structures. Isolation joint is to be full depth, ½” pre - molded asphalt impregnated joint material with ½” Sealtight Snap Cap. Use ½” x 6” “sill sealer”, with ½” tear away, to form isolation joint around curved surfaces. Seal all isolation joints in flat work with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to 01.14 Sealant Specification. Joint material is to be ¼” below finished surface with a ½” maximum hand-tooled radius to match control joints. SECTION 03302 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITE 03302-2 March 2019 01.12 Sealant Specification: A. Sikaflex 1CSL – in 10 or 32 oz. cartridges B. Sikaflex 2CSL (Limestone base color) – two part, pourable sealant. 01.13 Material Specification: A. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595. Provide performance based concrete for concrete pads meeting the following requirements. B. Concrete shall be normal weight with an aggregate size of nominal 1” and have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 PSI. Concrete for curbing and sidewalks shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3500 PSI. Concrete shall be manufactured and delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94. C. Fly Ash replacement 20%. Slag replacement up to 50%. D. Slump range to be 3” to 5” at mixer discharge. Higher slump or pumped concrete allowable with ASTM C-494, Type F/G High Range Water Reducer. E. Air content: 1.5% to 4.5%. Do not use an air entraining admixture for hard troweled finished concrete. 01.14 Use of white pigmented membrane-curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated with membrane- curing compound, applied with a pressure sprayer, coverage at manufacturers recommended dosage or at a rate of 150 to 200 sq. ft per gallon. 01.15 Finish is to be steel troweled and then light broomed, to provide a uniform, non-slip surface finish. 01.16 Quality Assurance: A. Testing Agency: General Contractor is required to schedule testing and inspections with the qualified independent testing and inspecting agency approved and paid for by Wawa, Inc. to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. B. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by the Wawa Project Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner's approval. C. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement will include the following: D. Sampling fresh concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. E. Slump: ASTM C143; minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day’s pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed and whenever strength samples are taken. SECTION 03302 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITE 03302-3 March 2019 F. Air Content: AST C173, volumetric method for Lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. G. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Cylinders used for acceptance shall be cured in accordance with section 9 of ASTM C31. H. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day’s pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the first 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. I. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. J. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. K. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 PSI (3.4 MPa). L. Test results will be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Ready-mix Producer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, compressive strength and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests. M. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non -destructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. N. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed. 03302-02 CONCRETE CURBING 02.1 Policy: The following specification is to be used for all concrete curbing inside and outside the property line unless a more stringent specification is specifically required by a municipality for curbing outside the property line. 02.2 Concrete curbing can be either machine formed or poured in place in accordance with curbing detail shown on civil engineering drawings. 02.3 Control joints in formed and poured curbing shall be provided at equal distances of not more than 20’ following the isolation joint specification 03302-01.13. SECTION 03302 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITE 03302-4 March 2019 02.4 Control joints in machine formed curbing shall be provided at equal distances of not more than 20’ and are to be created by saw cutting within 24 hours of forming; minimum 2” deep, maximum 4” deep or follow the isolation joint specification 03302-01.13. 02.5 Isolation joints are to be provided at all inlets and structures. Isolation joints are to be per Section 10 Concrete. 02.6 Curbing shall be temporarily backfilled to finished grade with soil behind and stone on the site side as soon as concrete has attained sufficient supporting strength - maximum of 24 hours. 02.7 Material Specification: A. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595. Provide performance based concrete for concrete curbing meeting the following requirements. B. Concrete shall be normal weight with an aggregate size of nominal 1” and have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3500 PSI. Concrete shall be manufactured and delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94. C. Fly Ash replacement 20%. Slag replacement up to 50%. D. Slump range to be 3” to 5” at mixer discharge. Higher slump or pumped concrete allowable with ASTM C-494, Type F/G High Range Water Reducer. E. Air content: 1.5% to 4.5%. Do not use an air entraining admixture for hard troweled finished concrete. 02.8 Use of white pigmented membrane-curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated with membrane- curing compound, applied with a pressure sprayer, coverage at manufacturers recommended dosage or at a rate of 150 to 200 sq. ft. per gallon. 02.9 Finish is to be steel troweled and then light broomed to provide a uniform, non-slip surface finish. 02.10 Quality Assurance to be per 03302-01.18. SECTION 03302 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITE 03302-5 March 2019 03302-03 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 03.1 Policy: The following specification is to be used for all building and site sidewalks. Building sidewalks and curbing are to be separate structures – See Section 03302-02 Curbing Specification. 03.2 Concrete sidewalk is to be a minimum 4” concrete with 12” of LBR 40 FDOT type B stabilized subgrade (conforming to FDOT 160-2), compacted with vibratory plate tamper. 03.3 Control (Contraction) joints: A. Site Sidewalk: Are to be hand-tooled, minimum 1.5” depth, spaced at width of walkway or a maximum of 10’, ½” maximum radius on hand-tooled joint. Control joints shall be installed within 2 hours minimum and 12 hours maximum after concrete placement, without raveling, and before random cracking occurs . B. Building Sidewalk: Are to be saw cut using an early entry “Soff-Cut” type saw, minimum depth 1.5”, spaced at a maximum of 15’. Control joints shall be installed within 2 hours minimum and 12 hours maximum after mat placement, without raveling, and before random cracking occurs. 03.4 Isolation (Expansion) joints are to be used at the meeting of all structures, where sidewalk abuts building and between sidewalk and curb. Isolation joint is to be full depth; ½” pre-molded asphalt impregnated joint material with ½” Sealtight Snap Cap, sealed with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to 03302-01.14 Sealant Specification. Joint material is to be ¼” below finished surface with a ½” maximum hand-tooled radius to match control joints. Expansion joints are to be spaced at a maximum of 30’-0”. 03.5 Sealant Specification A. Sikaflex 1CSL – in 10 or 32 oz. cartridges B. Sikaflex 2CSL (Limestone base color) – two part, pourable sealant. 03.6 Material Specification: A. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595. . Provide performance based concrete for concrete sidewalks meeting the following requirements. B. Concrete shall be normal weight with an aggregate size of nominal 1” and have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3500 PSI. Concrete shall be manufactured and delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94. C. Fly Ash replacement 20%. Slag replacement up to 50%. D. Concrete is to be Fibermesh MD reinforced. (a.k.a. Fibermesh Enforce E3) Fibermesh MD is to be added at a rate of 1 ½ lbs/cu. yard. Contractor to submit to Wawa Construction Manager a Concrete Supplier Certificate stating approved Fibermesh material, at the minimum rate added to each batch of concrete delivered to the project site. Each certificate shall be accompanied by one copy of each batch delivery ticket indicating the trade name, manufacturer’s name and amount per cubic yard of reinforcement material added to each batch of concrete. SECTION 03302 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITE 03302-6 March 2019 C. Slump range to be 3” to 5” at mixer discharge. Higher slump or pumped concrete allowable with ASTM C-494, Type F/G High Range Water Reducer. F. Air content: 1.5% to 4.5%. Do not use an air entraining admixture for hard troweled finished concrete. 03.7 Use of white pigmented membrane-curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated with membrane - curing compound, applied with a pressure sprayer, coverage at manufacturers recommended dosage or at a rate of 150 to 200 sq. ft per gallon. 03.8 Finish is to be steel troweled and then light broomed to provide a uniform, non -slip surface finish. 03.09 Quality Assurance to be per 03302-01.18. 03302-04 TANK AND CANOPY MATS 04.1 The following specification is to be used for both the canopy and tank mat. A control joint detail for, the canopy and tank mat is to be provided on the Wawa fuel system plans and architectural drawings. Any deviations from the approved joint layout must be approved by the Wawa construction project manager. General contractor, petroleum contractor, and Wawa construction project manager shall have an on-site pre-pour meeting prior to placement of canopy or tank mat concrete. Pre-pour meeting shall include review of paving plan, joint layout plan, location of construction joints, location of tie bars, curing compound specification including spray equipment to be utilized, and proper saw cut equipment. Testing is to review geotechnical report provided by Wawa or Developer, per land lease agreement, and shall provide direction for strengthening the sub-base should conditions warrant, LBR values below 10. Refer to ACI330R-08, minimum acceptable M value is 600 PSI. Notify Wawa Project Engineer should additional strengthening be required. 04.2 All work is to be in conformance with ACI330R-08, Guide for Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots and ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete Construction. 04.3 Concrete tank mat is to be minimum 8” thick with 6” stone base outside perimeter of tank excavation. Stone base is to be tank backfill material. Concrete canopy mat is to be 6” minimum 8” thick mat with 12” of LBR 40 FDOT Type B stabilized subgrade (conforming to FDOT 160-2). Provide minimum 6 mil plastic to be placed over pea gravel trenches and product lines. 04.4 Control joints are to be spaced at a maximum of 15’ for both canopy and tank mat, and are to match the control joint detail shown on the Wawa fuel system plans. Control joints in adjacent curbing are to be spaced at a maximum of 15’ and shall match the canopy and tank mat joint spacing. Control joints are to be saw cut using an early entry “Soff -Cut” type saw, minimum depth: 25% of finished thickness, 2” for 8” thick mats, Control joints shall be installed within 2 hours minimum and 12 hours maximum after mat placement, without raveling, and before random cracking occurs, Joints are to be sealed with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to 04.7 Sealant Specification. 04.5 Construction joints are to be formed with PNA Construction Technologies Diamond Dowel System plate dowels or approved equal spaced per manufacturer’s current recommendations Hand-tool joint to match control joints, in accordance with ACI330R-08 Section 2.7 and appendix C.3a. Seal joint with petroleum resistant sealant after c uring - Refer to 04.7 Sealant Specification. SECTION 03302 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITE 03302-7 March 2019 04.6 Isolation joints are to be used at: canopy columns, gas islands, bollards, and at the meeting of any other structures. Isolation joint is to be full depth, ½” pre -molded asphalt impregnated joint material with ½” Sealtight Snap Cap, sealed with petroleum resistant sealant after curing - Refer to 04.7 Sealant Specification. Joint material is to be ¼” below finished surface with a ½” maximum hand-tooled radius to match control joints. 04.1 Sealant Specification: A. Sikaflex 1CSL – in 10 or 32 oz. cartridges B. Sikaflex 2CSL (Limestone base color) – two part, pourable sealant. 04.2 Material Specification: A. Cement shall conform to the latest revised Standard Specification for Portland cement, ASTM C150 or ASTM C595. Provide performance based concrete for both the canopy and tank mat meeting the following requirements. B. Concrete shall be normal weight with an aggregate size of nominal 1” and have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 PSI. Concrete shall be manufactured and delivered in accordance with the latest revised Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete, ASTM C94. C. Fly Ash replacement 20%. Slag replacement up to 50%. D. Slump range to be 3” to 5” at mixer discharge. Higher slump or pumped concrete allowable with ASTM C-494, Type F/G High Range Water Reducer. E. Air content: 1.5% to 4.5%. Do not use an air entraining admixture for hard troweled finished concrete. F. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Macro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, 1.5 to 2.25 inches long. Addition rate of 3.0 to 5.0 lb/cu. yd. Where shown on plans, surrounding the fuel pump and bollards between construction joints, concrete is to be reinforced with macro fibers. 04.9 Use of white pigmented membrane-curing compounds conforming to ASTM C309 is required. After finishing and texturing operations have been completed and immediately after free water has evaporated, the surface is to be uniformly coated w ith membrane- curing compound, applied with a pressure sprayer, coverage at manufacturers recommended dosage or at a rate of 150 to 200 sq. ft. per gallon. 04.10 Finish is to be steel troweled and then light broomed, to provide a uniform, non -slip surface finish. 04.11 Quality Assurance: A. Testing Agency: General Contractor is required to schedule testing and inspections with the qualified independent testing and inspecting agency approved and paid for by Wawa, Inc. to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. B. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by the Wawa Project Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner's approval. SECTION 03302 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SITE 03302-8 March 2019 C. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement will include the following: D. Sampling fresh concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. E. Slump: ASTM C143; minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day’s pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed and whenever strength samples are taken. F. Air Content: AST C173, volumetric method for Lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. G. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. C ylinders used for acceptance shall be cured in accordance with section 9 of ASTM C31. H. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each day’s pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the fir st 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. I. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. J. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. K. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 PSI (3.4 MPa). L. Test results will be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Ready-mix Producer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch i n structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, compressive strength and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests. M. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. N. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed. END OF SECTION 03302 SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04200-1 August 2, 2012 04200-01 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 01.1 Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: (A) Shop Drawings: For masonry reinforcing bars detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars; comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. (B) Samples showing the full range of colors and textures available for exposed masonry units and colored mortars as requested by the Wawa Project Managers. (C) Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, for each type of masonry unit required, as follows: 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 140 2. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, per ASTM C 1314. 3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270. 4. Grout Test: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. (D) Material Certificates: For each type of masonry unit required. 01.2 Sample Panels: If requested by the Wawa Project Manager, build sample panels, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects, for each type of exposed unit masonry assembly in sizes approximately 48 incheslong by 48incheshigh by full thickness. 01.3 Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 01.4 Hot-Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90deg with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inchesahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. 04200-02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 02.1 Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f’m) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. For Concrete Unit Masonry: f’m = 1500 psi (10.3 MPa) 04200-03 PRODUCTS 03.1 Manufactured Stone RE: 04720 03.2 Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: (A) Weight Classification: Normal weight. (B) Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. (C) Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. (Sections 03.3 & 03.4 removed) SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04200-2 August 2, 2012 03.5 Mortar and Grout Materials: As follows: (A) Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction. (B) Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. (C) For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement or cement-lime formulation as required to produce the color indicated. (D) Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inchthick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16sieve. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. (E) Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.(F)Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. (F) Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. (G) Water: Potable. 03.6 Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615; orGrade 60. 03.7 Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951; mill galvanized, carbon-steel wire for interior walls and hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls. (A) Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. (B) Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inchdiameter. (C) For single-wythe masonry, provide ladder type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 incheso.c. (D) For multi-wythe masonry, provide ladder type with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 incheso.c. and one (1) side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inchesin width, plus one (1) side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width. 03.8 Ties and Anchors, General: Provide ties and anchors, specified as follows - Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for exterior walls and Class 1 coating for interior walls. 03.9 Bent Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide, made from 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized steel wire. 03.10 Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Steel Frame: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall. (A) Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, galvanized steel wire anchor section for welding to steel. (B) Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.1875-inch-diameter, galvanized steel wire. SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04200-3 August 2, 2012 03.11 Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall. Anchor Section: Dovetail anchor section formed from 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet. 03.12 Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and that are capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a triangular wire tie and a rib-stiffened, sheet metal anchor section with screw holes top and bottom; with raised rib-stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot for connection of wire tie. 03.13 Embedded Flashing Materials: As follows: (A) Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal: Stainless Steel: 0.0156inch (0.4 mm) thick. (B) Fabricate metal drip edges from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3 inchesinto wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with a hemmed outer edge bent down 30 degrees. (C) Fabricate metal flashing terminations from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and then down into joint 3/8inchto form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. (D) For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise indicated: EDPM Flashing - Manufacturer’s standard flashing product formed from a terpolymer of ethylene-propylene diene, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. Coordinate with wicking and flashing details. 03.14 Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories: As follows: (A) Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene. (B) Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. (C) Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). (D) Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch (9-mm) OD by 4 inches (100 mm) long. (E) Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm). (F) Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity between wythes. (G) Cavity Drainage Material: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands. 03.15 Masonry Cleaners SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04200-4 August 2, 2012 (A) Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. (B) Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 03.16 Mortar and Grout Mixes: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. (A) Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Use Type S. (B) Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight: For Portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent. (C) Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 03.17 Source Quality Control: Wawa, Inc. will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following source quality-control testing if the manufacturer does not provide quality control documentation. (A) Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140. (B) Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C67. 04200-04 EXECUTION 04.1 Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 04.2 Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 04.3 Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds30 g/30 sq.in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying. 04.4 Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: (A) For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inchmaximum. (B) For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inchmaximum. SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04200-5 August 2, 2012 04.5 Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. 04.6 Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in a running bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 04.7 Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 04.8 Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inchesunder bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 04.9 Lay hollow masonry units as follows: (A) With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. (B) Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities are to be filled with grout. 04.10 Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 04.11 Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. 04.12 Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8 inchon exterior side of walls, ½ inchelsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. 04.13 Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: (A) Provide an open space not less than 1 inchin width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. (B) Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 04.14 Anchor masonry veneers to wall framingwith masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: (A) Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing with two metal fasteners of type indicated. (B) Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 incheso.c. vertically and 24 incheso.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inchesof openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04200-6 August 2, 2012 04.15 Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. 04.16 Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. (A) Extend flashing 4 inchesat ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inchesto form a pan. (B) Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing ½ inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge. (C) Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing ½ inchback from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 04.17 Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. (A) Use round plastic tubing to form weep holes. (B) Space weep holes 16 incheso.c. (C) Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. 04.18 Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 04.19 Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 04200-05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 05.1 Wawa, Inc. will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following testing if manufacturer of the products cannot provide quality control documentation. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor’s expense. (A) Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m.) of wall area or portion thereof (B) Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780. (C) Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. (D) Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each typed of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140 if prism test fails. (E) Prism-Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will be tested per ASTM C 1314, and as follows: Prepare 1 set of prisms for testing at 7 days and 1 set for testing at 28 days. 05.2 Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as follows: SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04200-7 August 2, 2012 (A) By dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as work progresses. (B) After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 05.3 Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inchesof finished grade. Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. Masonry waste shall not be located beneath any landscaped areas. END SECTION 04200 04720-1 November 12, 2014 SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast stone masonry. 1. Owens Corning Pro-Fit Ledgestone manufactured by Boral Stone Products LLC Contact: Ashley Joyce @ 770-645-4531, Mobile 404-797-6706. Email: Ashley.Joyce@boral.com 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C 39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 3. ASTM C 91 - Specification for Masonry Cement. 4. ASTM C 144 -Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 5. ASTM C 150 -Specification for Portland Cement. 6. ASTM C 207 -Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide suitable wash on exterior sills, copings, projecting courses, and pieces with exposed top su r- faces. B. Projecting Pieces: Provide drips under outer edge. C. Compressive strength of cast stone to comply with ASTM C192, C39 - 1800 psi min. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate bonding, details of anchors; inserts; joints; connections to adjacent construc- tion and materials; and methods of installation and anchoring. B. Samples: Furnish two of sufficient size to depict finish and texture. Pro-Fit Ledgestone, Southwest Blend PF-8019. (No substitutions) 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Exterior and Interior applications: 1. Press each stone into the mortar setting bed firmly enough to squeeze some mortar out around stone edges. 2. Incorporate good building practices. Verify local code requirements specific to the area and check with authorities local requirements. Refer to plans for details and current product approvals and NOA testing respectively. 3. Complete installation instructions and recommendations are available from the manufacturer. 4. Maintain materials and ambient temperature at minimum of 40 degress (F) prior to, during and 48 hours following installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect from damage and staining. B. Store clear of the ground on non-staining planking. Cover with non-staining waterproof material. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 04720-2 November 12, 2014 A. Carefully read all installation instructions before proceeding with Cultural Stone veneer applications B. Observe applicable job site safety practices. NIOSH approved N95 dust respirator should be used when mechanically altering this product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Mortar: ASTM C 150, T ype I/II Portland . ASTM C 207 Hydrated lime type “N”. Iron Oxide Pigments. B. Watertable/Sill –Stone texture, color Taupe CSV 1375. C. Simpson A-21 angle, galvanized finish. 30 lbs per ft. minimum holding capacity…16” O.C. spacing. Two (2) per section minimum. D. Dupont Tyvek Stuccowrap…Apply Stuccowrap. Follow manufactures recommendations for installation. 2.2 JOINT WIDTH A. In order to obtain the most natural look, joints should be as narrow as possible. ½” max…dry stack - fit stones as tightly together as possible. 2.3 FINISH A. Pro-Fit Drystack Ledgestone-Southwest Blend PF-8019. B. Exposed Surfaces Planes: Straight or flat, as appropriate to sectional shape, 1/32 inch in one foot, maximum. 2.4 WARRANTY A. Cultured Stone products are covered for a period of 50 years from date of purchase when used on a structure which conforms to local building codes and when installed in accordance with building codes and manufacturer’s instructions. B. The warranty is limited to the original purchaser and may not be transferred to any subsequent owner. C. This warranty only covers manufacturing defects in the Cultured Stone brand produc ts manufactured by Boral Stone. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set each stone in full bed of mortar; vertical joints flushed full B. When setting with mortar, drench stones with potable water just prior to setting. C. Sponge clean each stone to remove splashed mortar or mortar smears. D. Water table and other Areas Partially or Totally Horizontal: After setting, insert properly sized backing material or backer rod to proper depth.. Gun in sealant. Refer to plans and details. E. Protect set stones from splashed mortar or adjacent construction activities. 3.2 INSPECTION 04720-3 November 12, 2014 A. Color and Texture Acceptance: Equal to approved sample when viewed in daylight at 10 feet. B. Repair and Imperfection Acceptance: Not discernible when viewed in daylight at 20 feet. SECTION 05001 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05001-1 March 2019 05001-01 GENERAL 01.1 Shop Drawings or Cuts: Submit for review to Architect on all items specified herein and do not order or fabricate until approved Shop Drawings have been received. (See Section 01002-14.) 01.2 Painting: All ferrous metal shall be shop primed with a Red Oxide or Zinc Chromate primer. 05001-02 PIPE RAILINGS 02.1 Exterior: (Also refer to Site Engineering Drawings.) if required, exterior railings shall be 2 ½" diameter standard weight galvanized steel pipe with flush welded joints and set into concrete. Top of rail gripping surface shall be mounted between 34” and 38” above ramp or stair nosings. Verify Drawings for details. 05001-03 CHAIN LINK ENCLOSURE 03.1 Provide a 6’-0” high chain link fence and gate around concrete pad where shown on Site Plan with a 4’-0” access gate. 05001-04 POWDER COAT FINISHED MATERIALS 04.1 Gas Canopy Decorative Column Shrouds (exposed top portion only). Color as indicated in drawings. 04.2 Structural and non-structural Building Overhang support rods, knife plates and other related components. Color as indicated in drawings. 04.3 Powder Coat Finish materials/process: A. Powder Coat finish material to be Polyester TGIC Exterior Grade. B. 2.0 mills thick minimum C. Powder Coat application process consists of Five Stage Pretreatment: (Wash, Rinse, Phosphate etching, Rinse, Chrome seal), with Powder Coat to be applied electrostatically and infrared cured. Powder Coat Quality checks to include; millage thickness measurement, pencil hardness test, MEK rub test, adhesion peel test, and salt spray accelerated life test. 05001-05 BOLLARDS 04.1 Steel pipe bollards, 6” for gas canopy and building. Steel bollards and plastic bollard covers to be furnished by Wawa, Inc. Bollards to be set in PVC sleeves furnished by G.C. Manufacturer Ideal Shield Contact: Dennis Knittel 2525 Clark Street Detroit, MI 48209 Phone: 313-551-2275 05001-06 INTERIOR METAL STUDS (See Section 05400.) 05001-07 LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING 07.1 All stud and/or joist framing members shall be of the type, size and gage as shown on the plans and shall be manufactured by Unimast Inc. or equal. Provide X -bracing for fire-rated walls where required by code. SECTION 05001 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05001-2 March 2019 07.2 All galvanized studs in exterior walls to be 8"-16 gage (UNO Refer to plans) for all stores and shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A446, Grade D, with a minimum yield of 50,000 psi. 07.3 Axially loaded studs shall be installed in a manner which will assure that ends of the studs are positioned against the inside track web, prior to stud and track attachment. 07.4 Provision for structure vertical movement shall be provided using the Unimast Vertical Slide Clip or other means. 07.5 Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is complete and all attached adjacent framing is complete. 07.6 All exterior studs shall be laterally braced with mechanical bracing at 48” o.c. END SECTION 05001 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 March 2019 05120-01 GENERAL 01.1 Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated. 01.2 Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for structural steel connections. 01.3 Submittals: In addition to Product Data and mill test reports on structural steel and bolts, submit Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components, including connections, splices, holes, welds, and bolts. (A) Include Shop Drawings prepared under the direction of a professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing structural steel engineering services. (B) Submit 1 reproducible set and 1 copy of the Shop Drawings for review. Allow 10 business days for review of subm ittals for the first submission, 7 business days for review of the second submission, and 5 business days for any submission thereafter. 01.4 Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: (A) AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." (B) ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." (C) Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 01.5 Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel." Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification. 01.6 Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3 March 2019 05120-02 PRODUCTS 02.1 Performance Requirements 02.1.1 Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 02.1.1.1 Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 02.2 Structural Steel Materials 02.2.1 Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A 992, ASTM A Grade 50 Wide Flange Beams. 02.2.2 Structural Steel Channel Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36, carbon steel. 02.2.3 Rectangular Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade C. 02.2.4 Round Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 Grade C. 02.2.5 Anchor Rod, Nuts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55-S1 hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts. 02.2.6 High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) or ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers, uncoated. 02.2.7 Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 02.2.7.1 Finish: Plain 02.2.8 Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11. 02.2.9 Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M 02.2.10 Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 02.2.11 Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, ASTM F 1554, Grade 105, ASTM A 354, ASTM A 449, straight. As indicated on Structural Drawings. 02.2.12 Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 02.2.13 Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 02.2.14 Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 02.2.15 Finish: Plain SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 March 2019 05120-03 PAINT & PROCEDURE FOR EXTERIOR STEEL 03.1 Exceptions: POWDER COATED ITEMS IN SECTION 05001-04 shall include: (A) Gas Canopy Decorative Column Shrouds (exposed top portion only). (B) Structural and non-structural Building Overhang support rods, knife plates and other related components. 03.2 Materials (A) Primer - Carboline CarboGuard 635 VOC C705 Gray (B) Finish: Carboline Carbothane 133LV, color: Wawa White #1803, applied at a rate of 2-3 mils Dry Film Thickness. Direct to Metal: Sherwin Williams Envirolastic 940 LV, Color Wawa White, applied at a rate of 6-9 mils Dry Film Thickness. (C) ABSOLUTELY NO SUBSTITUTIONS FOR THE SPECIFIED PROCEDURE, PRIMER, OR FINISH PAINT WILL BE ALLOWED. 03.3 Manufacturer Carboline 350 Hanley Industrial Court St. Louis, MO 63144-1599 Contact: Brian McHale Phone: 610-420-0323 Sherwin Williams Protective Coatings Contact: Eric Wiseman Phone: 816-651-8590 Email: eric.m.wiseman@sherwin.com 03.4 Shop Application (A) Location: Galvanized metal decking (where applicable) and exterior steel. (B) Surface Preparation: Steam clean all surfaces to be coated using Carboline Surface Cleaner # 3. Allow to air dry. Follow with SSPC SP-7 SP16 Bush-Off Blast Cleaning. Clean per SSPC-SP1. Abrasive blast per SSPC-SP16. Minimum 1.5 mil surface profile. (C) Primer: Carboline Carboguard 825 Epoxy applied at a rate of 4-6 mils Dry Film Thickness. (D) Finish: Carboline Carbothane 135 Semigloss applied at a rate of 2-3 mils Dry Film Thickness. Direct to Metal: Sherwin Williams Envirolastic 940 LV, Color Wawa White, applied at a rate of 6-9 mils Dry Film Thickness. 03.5 Field Onsite Touchup (A) Touchup all welds and road damaged areas using Carboguard 825 Epoxy applied at 4-6 mils dry film thickness. Allow recommended dry time. Apply Finish coat of Carbothane 135 Semigloss Acrylic Urethane applied at a rate of 2-3 mils dry film thickness. Carbon Steel / Galvanized Exposed Surface Prep – All areas where SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 March 2019 galvanized/carbon steel has been exposed shall be Hand Tool or Power Tool Cleaned in accordance with SSPC- SP2/3 to remove all loose coating, loose corrosion, debris, etc. The tightly adhering, cured coating in the adjacent areas where repair coating will overlap shall be effectively abraded to create a roughened surface. This overlap area shall be at least 3-4 inches back from leading edges of tightly adhering coating. The leading edges of tightly adhering coating shall be feather transitioned. If the entire surface area of tightly adhering existing coatings will be over coated then prepare the entire surface as outlined above. Remove all dust and debris by cleaning per SSPC-SP1. (B) The surface preparation being recommended matches the Department of Transportation for the States of Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, Maryland, and Virginia’s specification for treatment of galvanized metal prior to coatings application. Exposed Touch Up Paint System - Touchup all exposed galvanizing/carbon steel areas using Macropoxy 646-100 applied at 4 -6 mils dry film thickness in accordance with product data. Allow recommended dry time. Apply Finish Sherwin – Williams Envirolastic 940 LV at 6-9 mils Dry Film Thickness, Color: Wawa White. 03.6 Warranty: Carboline will issue a 7 year material warranty for the above galvanized metal coatings specification. 05120-04 EXECUTION 04.1 Erect structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. 04.2 Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates and set on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of base or bearing plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates. 04.3 Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AICS’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel buildings and Bridges.” 04.4 Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.” Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. 04.5 Weld Connection: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 04.6 Fabrication: Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. (A) Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. (B) Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. Connection Type: Slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections, as indicated. SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6 March 2019 (C) Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 05120-05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 05.1 Inspection Agency: Wawa, Inc. shall engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to perform field inspections and to prepare reports. Inspection reports will be transmitted in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Architect, Structural Engineer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after inspections. (A) Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. (B) Additional testing, at contractor’s expense, will be performed ot determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. (C) High-strength bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.” (D) In addition to visual inspection, welded connections will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 procedures, when recommended by testing agency. 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709, performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality “2-2T.” 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. END SECTION 05120 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS 05210-1 July, 2011 05210-01 GENERAL 01.1 Summary: This Section includes long-span steel joists and joist accessories. 01.2 Submittals: (A) Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. (B) Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. (C) Welding certificates. (D) Manufacturer certificates. (E) Mill Certificates: For bolts. (F) Field quality-control test and inspection reports (G) Research/Evaluation reports 01.3 Quality Assurance (A) Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. (B) SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, SJI's "Specifications") that are applicable to types of joists indicated. (C) Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 01.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." 05210-02 PRODUCTS 02.1 Materials (A) Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members (B) Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. Finish: Plain, uncoated. (C) High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. Finish: Plain. (D) Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS 05210-2 July, 2011 02.2 Long-span Steel Joists: Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type as follows and end and top-chord arrangements indicated. Joist Type – LH-series steel joists. 02.3 Joist Accessories (A) Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal and diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for t ype of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. (B) Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. (C) Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom -chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. (D) Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. 02.4 Cleaning and Shop Painting: Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories. Apply 1 coat of shop primer. 05210-03 EXECUTION 03.1 Installation (A) Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. (B) Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. (C) Field weld joists to supporting steel framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. (D) Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connections' "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. (E) Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS 05210-3 July, 2011 03.2 Field Quality Control: Testing Agency-Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. END SECTION 05210 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 05310-1 July, 2011 05310-01 GENERAL 01.1 Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each type of deck and accessory, submit the following. (A) Shop Drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. (B) Product certificates signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. (C) Submit one (1) reproducible set and two (2) copies of the Shop Drawings for review. Allow 10 business days for review of submittals for the first submission, 7 business days for review of the second submission, and 5 business days for any submissio n thereafter. 01.2 Quality Assurance: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of steel deck. (A) Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." (B) Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. (C) FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM and listed in FM's "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. 05310-02 PRODUCTS 02.1 Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29, and the following: (A) Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 (Z275) zinc coating. (B) Deck Profile: Type B, wide rib. (C) Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 02.2 Accessories: Steel deck manufacturer's standard accessory materials, including mechanical fasteners, closure strips, pour stops, and closures for deck. 02.3 Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 05310-2 July, 2011 05310-03 EXECUTION 03.1 Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. (A) Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. (B) Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. (C) Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. (D) Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as require d for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. 03.2 Roof Deck Accessories: Install sump pans and sump plates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. W eld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 03.3 Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 05310-04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 04.1 Testing Agency: Wawa, Inc. shall engage in a qualified independent inspecting agency to perform field quality control inspection and submit inspection reports. 04.2 Field welds and mechanical fasteners will be subject to inspection . 04.3 Lap distances and end bearing and span lengths will be subject to inspection. 04.4 Inspection reports will be reported in writing to the Wawa Project Manager, Architect, Structural Engineer, and General Contractor within 24 hours after inspection. 04.5 Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. 04.6 Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of correct work with special requirements. END SECTION 05310 SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1 July, 2011 05400-01 GENERAL 01.1 Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads without deflections greater than the following: (A) Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height for Stucco Stores, and 1/600 of the wall height for Brick Stores. (B) Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height. (C) Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Curtain-Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of the wall height is 1/360 for Stucco Stores and 1/600 for Brick Stores. 01.2 Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: (A) Shop Drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold- formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. (B) Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of cold-formed metal framing's compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 01.3 Quality Assurance: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of cold -formed metal framing. (A) Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." (B) Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire - resistance-rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 05400-02 PRODUCTS 02.1 Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, G60 zinc coating, Grade 33 (230) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and less; Grade 50 (340) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and greater. 02.2 Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel studs, of web depths and gauges indicated, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows. Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, manufacturer's standard flange width, and minimum uncoated-steel thickness matching steel studs. 02.3 Joist Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths and gauges indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows. Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-2 July, 2011 unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel joists. 02.4 Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for fram ing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated. 02.5 Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. 02.6 Anchor Rod, Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade C hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; flat oversized, hardened-steel washers. 02.7 Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load. 02.8 Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load. 02.9 Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 02.10 Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. 05400-03 EXECUTION 03.1 Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to ASTM C 1007, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. (A) Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. (B) Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. (C) Install framing members in one-piece lengths. (D) Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. (A) Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. (F) Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. 03.2 Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 03.3 Load-Bearing Wall Installation: Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends. Squarely seat SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-3 July, 2011 studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated, set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. (A) Align studs vertically where wall-framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. (B) Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. (C) Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure. (D) Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. (E) Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame. (F) Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. (G) Install horizontal bridging in stud system, minimum 4’-0” o.c. vertically. Fasten at each stud intersection. (H) Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, blocking, bracing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 03.4 Non-Load-Bearing Curtain-Wall Installation: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. Space studs as indicated; set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to track, unless otherwise indicated. (A) Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. (B) Install horizontal bridging in curtain-wall studs, not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. (C) Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system. 03.5 Joist Installation: Install, align, and securely anchor perimeter joist track sized to match joists as indicated on Shop Drawings. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten to both flanges of joist track. (A) Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists. (B) Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at spacings indicated. (C) Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated. SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-4 July, 2011 (D) Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. (E) Install bridging at each end of joists and at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection. (F) Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. (G) Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly. 03.6 Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END SECTION 05400 SECTION 05720 DECORATIVE METAL 05720-1 September 12, 2012 05720-01 MATERIALS & FABRICATION 01.1 (A) Fabrication Fence panel components shall be manufactured using the electro- forged welding process for complete penetration of cross-members. (B) Configuration Fence panels and support components shall be fabricated to the configurations shown on the contract drawings and as recommended by the fabricating shop. Provide shop drawings for all components to Architect. (A) Steel Bar Stock: ASTM A36 (B) Steel Tubing: ASTM A%)), Grade B 05720-02 INSTALLATION 02.1 Install ornamental gates in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. 02.2 Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference. Anchor ground-set items in concrete. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. 05720-03 HARDWARE 03.1 Hardware 1 pr. Ea. 6” SCH 80 sleeve Hinges with Zerk Grease fittings per drawings. 1 ea. JMC CB-24 MF S.S. 24” L w/ 2 stainless steel guides and 1 stainless steel hanger, mill finish. 1 ea. Stanley 1009 Safety Hasp and Staple (for padlock) galvanized finished, field paint to match gate 1 ea. Schlage PL3000 padlock (keyed alike) END SECTION 05720 SECTION 06001 CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06001-1 September 9, 2015 06001-01 RELATED WORK 01.1 Millwork items such as Cabinets and Countertops will be provided and installed by Wawa, under a separate contract. 06001-02 MATERIALS 02.1 PVC Trimboards: For all exterior PVC trim and louvers for New Stores and Remodels where required on Drawings. Install 'smooth' side for exterior facing. Thickness as required on Drawings. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installation, sealants, and caulking; and Wawa’s instructions below. (A) Exterior running Trim and fabrications to be supplied by PVC Trimboard mfr. 1. Celluar PVC Trim with a density of .55 grams per cubic centimeter. 2. Supplied without painted finish, white. Painting not necessary. 3. Free Foam Cellular, ICC code EX1074 compliant. 4. Manufacturers a. Azek Trimboards, 801 Corey St. Moosic, PA 18507. Phone 866- 549-6900. Website: www.azek.com b. Palight Trimboard by Palram Americas Inc. 9735 Commerce Circle, Kutztown, PA 19530. Phone: 610-285-9918. Website: www.palighttrimboard.com (B) Installation instructions: 1. Storage and Handling: Store PVC trim Products on a flat level surface. a) Since PVC products are more flexible than wood, they may conform to uneven surfaces. b) PVC trim products have a density comparable to pine and should be handled in the same fashion as pine would be handled to avoid damage. c) Units of PVC trim are shipped from the manufacturer in a protective covering. If covering has been removed, take care to keep product free of dirt and debris at jobsite. If product gets dirty, clean after installation. 2. Cutting: a) PVC products can be cut using the same tools to cut lumber. b) Carbide tipped blades designed to cut wood work well. Avoid using fine tooth cutting blades. c) Rough edges from cutting may be caused by excessive friction, poor board support, or worn or improper tooling. 3. Drilling: a) PVC products can be cut using the same tools as used to drill lumber. b) Drilling PVC products is similar to drilling a hardwood. Care should be taken to avoid frictional heat build up. c) Use standard woodworking tools. Do not use drills made for normal rigid PVC. d) Periodic removal of PVC shavings from the drill hole may be necessary. 4. Routing: a) PVC products may be routed using standard routing bits and the same tools used to rout lumber. b) Carbide tipped routing bits are recommended. c) Routing PVC products provides a crisp, clean edge. SECTION 06001 CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06001-2 September 9, 2015 5. Fastening: a) For best results, use fasteners designed for wood trim and wood siding (thinner shank, blunt point, full round head). b) To take advantage of the performance of PVC trim, use a highly durable fastener such as stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized. c) Staples, small brads, and wire nails must not be used. d) The fasteners should be long enough to penetrate the solid wood substrate a minimum of 1 ½”. e) Standard nail guns work well with PVC products. f) Like wood, use 2 fasteners per every framing member for trimboard applications. Trimboards 12” or wider , as well as sheets, will require additional fasteners. g) Fasteners must be installed no more than 2” from the end of each board. h) PVC should be fastened into a flat, solid substrate. Fastening PVC into hollow or uneven areas must be avoided. i) Pre-drilling is typically not required unless a large fastener is used or product is installed in low temperatures. j) 3/8” and ½” sheet product is not intended to be ripped into trim pieces. These profiles must be glued to a substrate AND mechanically fastened. 6. Painting: a) PVC products do not require paint for protection, but may be painted to achieve a custom color. b) Use a 100% acrylic latex paint with a Light Reflective Value of 55 or higher. c) For paint colors equivalent to an LRV of 54 or lower, paints specifically designed for such applications must be used, such as Sherwin-Williams VinysafeTM coatings. d) Follow the paint manufacturer’s recommendations to apply. e) No special surface preparations are required prior to painting -just ensure the PVC surface is clean and dry. 7. Gluing: a) For best results, glue all PVC to PVC joints such as window surrounds, long fascia runs, etc with PVC adhesive to prevent joint separation. b) The glue joint should be secured with a fastener on either side of the 45 degree scarf joint. This provides the largest surface area to bond PVC to PVC. c) PVC adhesive has a working time of 10 minutes and is fully cured in 24 hours. To bond PVC to other substrates, other adhesives may be used. Consult adhesive manufacturer to determine suitability. 8. Spanning: a) PVC products may not be used in load bearing applications, but may be used in spanned applications such as soffits and ceilings. b) For soffit installations: For spans of 16”-24” use a 1x PVC product. When using PVC beadboard, fasten every 12” or less. Install PVC beadboard perpendicular to structure. c) For ceiling installations: For spans of 16”-24” use a 1x PVC product. When using PVC beadboard, fasten every 16” or less. If temperature at the time of installation is 40 degrees or below, spans need to be decreased to 12”. d) Never span PVC products more than 24”. SECTION 06001 CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06001-3 September 9, 2015 e) Nail Hole Filling: To fill nail holes and cover nail heads in PVC products, use Trimbonder by Devcon. It is a 2 part adhesive, installed with a traditional caulk gun. Trimbonder is available at all lumberyards and pro- dealers where PVC is sold. This product can also be used to bond PVC to virtually any substrate, wood, metal, masonry,etc. 02.2 Interior Wood Trim shall be #1 grade. 02.3 Optional Wood Framing (Only when approved by the Wawa Project Manager) (A) Structural Framing and Walls to be #2 or better, Hem/Spruce/Fir, kiln dry. (B) Stud Walls Space 3 ½" studs 16" oc (metal optional) for partitions and 24" oc for wall furring. Lumber and Stud grade, WWPA or WSPFA. (C) Light Framing: Standard Grade. (D) Blocking, Stripping, Grounds: Utility Grade WWPA or WSPFA. 02.4 Sheathing: Shall be C-C Ext–APA Exterior Grade, 5/8" thick minimum. Provide ply-clips between sheets of roof sheathing, space as per APA requirements. 02.5 Sheathing at Electrical Panel Location: Provide plywood panels or wall surfaces as required by Electrical Contractor. Plywood to be painted gray, 2 coats, prior to installation of electrical equipment. 02.6 Rough Hardware: Nails, spikes, nuts, bolts, ramset stud hangers, anchors, etc. as required, galvanized cadmium-plated where exposed to the weather. 02.7 D-BLAZE Fire-Retardant Treated (FRT) Plywood: Use only where approved by local building officials. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation. Manufacturer Chemical Specialities, Inc. (CSI) One Woodlawn Green 200 East Woodlawn Road, Suite 250 Charlotte, NC28217 Phone: 800-421-8661 Fax: 704-527-8232 02.8 Roof Pocket Fence – PVC Trimboards Manufacturer AzekTrimboards 801 Corey Street Moosic, PA 18507 Phone: 866-549-6900 Website: www.azek.com Palram Americas Inc. 9735 Commerce Circle, Kutztown, PA 19530 Phone: 610-285-9918 Website: www.palighttrimboard.com SECTION 06001 CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06001-2 September 9, 2015 02.9 For Remodels Only – SBX Pressure Treated Lumber (A) Provide for mounting HVACR equipment as required on Drawings (B) Provide on all sill plates for bearing and partition walls. 06001-03 WORKMANSHIP 03.1 Provide for a minimum number of joints in running trim; bevel and join where these occur. Miter external corners and cope interior angles. All miter joints; no butt joints. 03.2 Miter all soffit trim corners; no butt joints. 03.3 All finish work shall be sanded smooth to receive paint or stain. Set all nail heads for putty. 03.4 All glue to be waterproof type. 03.5 Interior finish millwork shall not be brought into building until building is thoroughly dry. Finishing work, if stored at the site, shall be in watertight sheds or placed in building. END SECTION 06001 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 10-22-2012 06100-01 PRODUCTS 01.1 Lumber, General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. (A) For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency. (B) Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominalthickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. (C) Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominalthickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 01.2 Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: (A) Wood cants, nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. (B) Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. (C) Ext-CDX Exterior Grade Plywood. Use P.T. plywood for first 48” above grade. (D) Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 01.3 Dimensional Lumber: Provide #1 grade dimensional lumber. For Framing Other than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Provide Construction or #2 grade and any of the following species: (A) Species: Hem-fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. (B) Species: Pine-Fir:NLGA. 01.4 Remodel Stores Only: Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber of any species for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, and similar members. 01.5 Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that evidence compliance with building code in effect for Project. Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 10-22-2012 engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. (A) Parallel-Strand Lumber: Lumber manufactured by laying up wood strands using an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559, and cured under pressure to produce members with grain of strands parallel to their lengths and complying with the following requirements: 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending: 2900 psi (20 Maa) for 12-inch nominal-(286- mm actual-) depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity: 2,000,000 psi (13 800 Mpa). (B) Prefabricated Wood I-Joists: Units manufactured by bonding stress-graded lumber flanges to wood-based structural-use panel webs with exterior-type adhesives complying with ASTM D 2559, to produce I-shaped joists complying with the following requirements: Structural Capacities- Establish and monitor structural capacities according to ASTM D 5055. 01.6 Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels: Provide either all-veneer, mat-formed, or composite panels complying with DOC PS 2, "Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural- Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood," where plywood is indicated. (A) Trademark: Factory mark structural-use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. (B) Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to suit support spacing indicated. (C) Subflooring: APA-rated sheathing, Exposure 1. (D) Wall Sheathing: APA-rated sheathing, Exposure 1. (E) Roof Sheathing: APA-rated sheathing, Exterior. (F) Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick. 01.7 Gypsum Sheathing Board Re: Section 09250.Water-resistant-core gypsum sheathing board complying with ASTM C 79 with long edges surfaced with water-repellent paper, thickness indicated, and as follows: (A) Type: Regular. (B) Type: X. (C) Edge Configuration: V-shaped tongue-and-groove long edges, for horizontal application. (D) Edge Configuration: Square, for vertical application. 01.8 Air-Infiltration Barrier: DupontTyvek Commercial Wrap complying with ASTM E-1677 Type 1. Fasteners: Staples with 1 inch crown, cap nails or wrap cap fasteners shall be used to secure Tyvek Commercial Wrap. SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 10-22-2012 01.9 Fasteners: Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. (A) Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. (B) Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 01.10 Metal Framing Anchors: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and as follows. Galvanized Steel Sheet - Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 01.11 Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8mm); selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. 01.12 Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APAAFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. 06100-02 EXECUTION 02.1 Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. 02.2 Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. 02.3 Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening, complying with the following as applicable for jurisdiction. (A) CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners. (B) Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. (C) “Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction." (D) “Table 2304.9.1 – Fastening Schedule” of ICC’s International Building Code U.N.O. 02.4 Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity. 02.5 Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. 02.6 Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 10-22-2012 02.7 Installation of Structural-Use Panels: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. (A) Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing throughout. 2. Sheathing: Nail to framing. 3. Sheathing: Nail or staple to framing. 02.8 Air-Infiltration Barrier: Cover sheathing with air-infiltration barrier to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Apply air-infiltration barrier to cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch (100-mm) overlap. END SECTION 06100 SECTION 07001 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07001-1 August 29, 2014 07001-01 GENERAL 01.1 Samples: Submit metal roof sample to the Wawa Project Manager for approval before ordering. 01.2 See Architectural Drawings and Metal Roof Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings for recommended installation procedures. 07001-02 INSULATION MATERIALS 02.1 Flat Roof Insulation: As per Section 07530. 02.2 Refer to section 07210 concerning all building insulation, properties and applicable thermal resistance. 07001-03 ROOFING AND FLASHING MATERIALS 03.1 Flashing: Provide 0.020" aluminum. Install at door and window heads, window sills, cap and base flashings. Edge strip angle at roof perimeters and at all roof projections 03.2 Plumbing Vents: Provide 0.020" prefabricated aluminum with flashing ring or 4 lb. lead bent down into pipe ½". All plumbing vents to be offset to appear through rear gable only. No vents at front gable. At metal roof refer to ManufacturerStandards. 03.3 Gutters (A) See section 07620. 03.4 Roof and Gutter Drains (A) Porch Overhangs: Jay R. Smith,Roof Drain: 1. Model: No. 1340T. 2. Description: Cast iron body with combined flashing clamp and gravel stop, 8-1/2 inch diameter flange, low profile, and polyethylene dome. (B) Gas Canopy: Smith, High Dome #1630T, Duco Cast Iron Body with Bronze Flashing Clamp and Bronze Top Secured with Brass Screws. Manufacturer J.R. Smith Mfg., Co. 2781 Gunter Park Drive East Montgomery, Alabama36109 Phone: 334-277-8520 Fax: 334-272-7396 03.5 Downspouts: (A) See section 07620 03.6 Boots: (A) Provide cast iron boots by J.R. Smith, Wade or equal, or Schedule 80 PVC boots at all exposed connections to below grade drainage. Verify with site plan and coordinate transitions. 03.7 Finish: All exposed aluminum shall be white factory finish, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. SECTION 07001 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07001-1 August 29, 2014 07001-01 GENERAL 01.1 Samples: Submit metal roof sample to the Wawa Project Manager for approval before ordering. 01.2 See Architectural Drawings and Metal Roof Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings for recommended installation procedures. 07001-02 INSULATION MATERIALS 02.1 Flat Roof Insulation: As per Section 07530. 02.2 Refer to section 07210 concerning all building insulation, properties and applicable thermal resistance. 07001-03 ROOFING AND FLASHING MATERIALS 03.1 Flashing: Provide 0.020" aluminum. Install at door and window heads, window sills, cap and base flashings. Edge strip angle at roof perimeters and at all roof projections 03.2 Plumbing Vents: Provide 0.020" prefabricated aluminum with flashing ring or 4 lb. lead bent down into pipe ½". All plumbing vents to be offset to appear through rear gable only. No vents at front gable. At metal roof refer to Manufacturer Standards. 03.3 Gutters (A) See section 07620. 03.4 Roof and Gutter Drains (A) Porch Overhangs: Jay R. Smith,Roof Drain: 1. Model: No. 1340T. 2. Description: Cast iron body with combined flashing clamp and gravel stop, 8-1/2 inch diameter flange, low profile, and polyethylene dome. (B) Gas Canopy: Smith, High Dome #1630T, Duco Cast Iron Body with Bronze Flashing Clamp and Bronze Top Secured with Brass Screws. Manufacturer J.R. Smith Mfg., Co. 2781 Gunter Park Drive East Montgomery, Alabama36109 Phone: 334-277-8520 Fax: 334-272-7396 03.5 Downspouts: (A) See section 07620 03.6 Boots: (A) Provide cast iron boots by J.R. Smith, Wade or equal, or Schedule 80 PVC boots at all exposed connections to below grade drainage. Verify with site plan and coordinate transitions. 03.7 Finish: All exposed aluminum shall be white factory finish, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. SECTION 07001 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07001-2 August 29, 2014 03.8 Building Metal Roof: See section 07410. 03.10 Roof Ridge Vent: Supplied by Metal Roof Manufacturer. See section 07410. 03.11 Soffit-Louver Strips: AV Continuous Soffit Vent, white painted aluminum, or equal. Manufacturer Air Vent, Inc 4801 North Prospect Road Peoria Heights, IL61614 03.12 Underside of porch roof and gable overhang: See section 07410. 03.13 Gas Canopy Metal Roof: Pre-engineered metal decking. See gas canopy documents and architectural drawings for color; top face shall match building metal roof. Architect shall approve color sample. 03.14 Gas canopy roofing submittals to be signed and sealed enginee ring documents by EOR licensed in the state of Florida. Roof deck system to meet or exceed wind load requirements as specified in the structural drawings. All clips and accessories to be furnished by canopy roof manufacturer. Manufacturer Steeltec Contact: Steve Binns 813-541-9781 07001-04 SEALANT MATERIALS 04.1 Sealant: Non-sagging polyurethane or polysulfide, #101 by Standard Products Co., PPG, Dynatrol I or GC-9 Synthacalk by Pecora, to match adjacent surfaces. 04.2 Building Joint Locations: All joints in exterior walls at doors and storefront, thresholds, windows, control joints, expansion joints openings where ducts, pipes or conduits penetrate walls or partitions, at perimeter of wall mounted fixtures, interior door frames, corners of ceramic tiles, and wherever else specifically noted on Drawings. 04.3 Canopy Joint Locations: Dow Corning 790 Building Sealant (silicon). See Section 05120-06. 07001-05 SILL PLATE GASKET 05.1 Exterior Stud Sills: Install Sill Plate Gasket directly beneath all exterior studs (7 -1/2” as required to match stud size) 05.2 Acceptable Manufacturers/Products (A) Owens Corning ‘FoamSealR’ Sill Plate Gasket. (800) 438-7465 (B) Dow Chemical ‘Styrofoam Sill Seal’ Foam Gasket (866) 583-2583 END OF SECTION 07001 March 2019 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Batt Insulation.Exterior walls (Owens Corning Eco-Touch R-30) Cathedral Kraft-faced 8.25 X 15.5 X 48" 2. Board Insulation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07840 - Firestopping: 2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced . Publications are refer- enced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM C 578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM C 665 - Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 4. ASTM C 1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 5. ASTM E 136 - Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube furnace at 750 C.. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requiremen ts of Section 01600 and manu- facturer's recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers as specified in the Materials paragraph below: 1. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge, PA (800) 523-7844. 2. Dow Chemical Company, Midland, MI (800) 232-2436. 3. Johns Manville Insulations, Denver, CO (877) 766-3295. 4. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH (800) 438-7465. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response charac- teristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics and other methods specified. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665 mineral fiber blanket insulation. 1. Unfaced Glass Fiber: Type I (blankets without membrane facing); with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2. Faced, Glass-Fiber: Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced sur- face with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced withvapor- retarder membrane on 1 face. March 2019 3. Sound Attenuation Insulation (Sound Batts): Unfaced glass fiber batt insulation as specified above. 4. Provide batt insulation by one of the following manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville. c. Owens Corning. B. Polyisocyanurate: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, foil facing both sides; square edges, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches. Provide one of the following: 1. Super Tuff-R by Dow Chemical Company. 2. E’NRG’Y 3 by Johns Manville. 3. As required by roofing manufacturer to achieve maximum performance and thermal resistance. C. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01003-01.3 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Polyethylene or polyester self-adhering type; two inches wide. B. Adhesive: Waterproof type, acceptable to manufacturer of insulation board. Adhesive VOC shall be within the limits of not greater than 70 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Batt Insulation: 1. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. 2. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 3. Vapor Barrier performance-Wrap kraft-faced tabs over metal studs and tape per 2.4-A. B. Board Insulation: 1. Verify substrate and adjacent materials and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and adhesive. 2. Verify insulation boards are unbroken, free of damage. 3.2 INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, without gaps or voids. B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. C. Attach insulation in place to framing; tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Provide insulation types as scheduled below and as indicated on Drawings. CONDITION TYPE OF INSULATION THICKNESS Exterior Walls Faced Owens Corning R-30 Eco-Touch 8-1/4 inches (R-30) as shown; . Interior Partitions UnfacedBatt Insulation (as noted on plans) 3-1/2 inches or 5-1/2 inches as Shown. Sound Attenuation UnfacedBatt Insulation (as noted on plans) 3-1/2 inches or 5-1/2 inches as Shown. SECTION 07250 WEATHER BARRIER 07250-1 January 10, 2012 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet applied weather barrier and related accessories for wall air/moisture barrier system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Light Gage Metal Framing: Wall framing and bracing. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and bracing. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing. D. Section 07210 - Insulation: Exterior wall insulation. E. Section 07460 - Siding: Wall finish and primary weather barrier. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D1117 - Standard Guide for Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3330 - Standard Test Method for Peel Adhesion of Pressure-Sensitive Tape1. E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D3759 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength and Elongation of Pressure-Sensitive Tapes. F. PSTC-1 - Peel Adhesion of Single Coated Pressure-Sensitive Tapes at 180 Degree Angle. G. TAPPI T-460 - Porosity - Gurley. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The airtight components and secondary moisture protection of the building enclosure and the joints, junctures and transitions between materials, products, and assemblies forming the air-tightness and moisture barrier of the building enclosure are called "the air/moisture barrier system". Services include coordination between the trades, the proper scheduling and sequencing of the work, preconstruction meetings, inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. B. Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air/moisture barrier and paths of air infiltration / exfiltration through the air/moisture barrier system shall be made air-tight. SECTION 07250 WEATHER BARRIER 07250-2 January 10, 2012 C. Moisture Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air/moisture barrier and paths of water migration through the air/moisture barrier system shall be made water shedding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar products. B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation and sealing techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 3. Repair mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Do not store in direct sunlight. Weather barrier shall be stored in a covered area. Do not expose to building site chemicals. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Anticipate environmental conditions and schedule installation when conditions are within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing defects. 1.HardieWrap Weather Barrier and related products for 10 years. 2.Protecto Wrap standard 10 year limited warranty 3.WeatherTex-(2)-two years * eligible for 10 years when used in conjunction with other Fortifiber products. 4.Tyvek-10 year limited warranty PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Protecto Wrap PW 100/40 Air Vapor barrier and flashing. Protecto Wrap Company 1955 S. Cherokee St. Denver, Co. 80223. Tel. 1 (800) 759-9727. www.Protecto wrap.com SECTION 07250 WEATHER BARRIER 07250-3 January 10, 2012 B.Dupont-Tyvek-Stucco Wrap-single ply.Tel.1 (800)-44-Tyvek. Email www.Construction.Tyvek.com 2.2 WEATHER BARRIER SYSTEM A. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet: 1. Tyvek Stucco Wrap 2. Protecto Wrap PW 100/40 (used on all exterior wall surfaces). B. Self-adhering Flashing: Designed for peel and stick application. 1. Product Protecto Wrap 2. Composition: Butyl rubber hybrid adhesive. Protecto Wrap 100/40 C. Flexible Flashing: 1.) Product Tyvek Flashing 2.) Protecto 100/40 thru wall flashing D. Seam Tape: 1.) Tyvek Seam tape 2.) Protecto Wrap Stucco super stick building tape PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Weather barrier shall be installed before window and door installation. Do not install on saturated sheathing. Weather barrier can become slippery and should not be used in any application where it may be walked on. D. Weather barrier shall be installed on vertical wall applications only. E. Manufacturer warrants weather barrier sheet only when covered within 180 days of its installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet: SECTION 07250 WEATHER BARRIER 07250-4 January 10, 2012 1. Weather barrier shall be installed before window and door installation. Do not install on saturated sheathing. Weather barrier can become slippery and should not be used in any application where it may be walked on. 2. Begin by affixing weather barrier extending at least 6 inches (152 mm) around a building corner. Unroll horizontally (with print side facing out) around the building covering rough window and door openings. 3. Fasten to studs or nailable sheathing material with galvanized construction grade staples a maximum of 18 inches (457 mm) in the vertical and horizontal direction. 4. Attach weather barrier so that it is taut and flat. The vertical overlap shall have a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) and the vertical seam shall be taped. 5. Assure that the bottom edge of the weather barrier extends over the sill plate and foundation interface by at least 1 inch (25 mm). 6. Overlap upper layers of weather barrier (in shingle lap fashion) by a minimum of 6 inches below the horizontal edge, and tape the horizontal seam line. 7. At roof to wall intersection (or wall to deck), affix wrap to the wall such that it overlaps any step flashing already in place on the wall by at least 2 inches (51 mm). B. Flexible Flashing: 1. Windows and Doors: Weather barrier is not designed nor guaranteed as a flashing material to prevent moisture or air from intruding behind weather barrier. Verify that flashing has previously been installed around all windows and door openings. Install flexible flashing per manufacturer's instructions. a. Use the inverted "Y" cut method at rough window and door openings. Do not place fasteners within 9 inches (229 mm) of the rough opening, door or window heads. This area shall not be fastened to allow for proper head flashing installation. At the top corners of the rough opening, cut the weather barrier at 45 degree to extend 9 inches (229 mm) past the joint. b. Fold the top flap up and out of the way and fasten temporarily. c. Fold the remaining three flaps in through the opening fastening them inside the opening with staples. 2. Rough Electrical and Plumbing Penetrations: Seal with a double layer of flashing. Install the top flashing piece over the bottom flashing piece overlapping flashing layers to cover flashing cut-out necessary for placement around penetration. C. Repairs: For minor punctures or tears, less than 3 inches (76 mm), cover and completely seal with seam tape. For larger holes, greater than 3 inches (76 mm), use slit flashing technique. a. Slit flashing requires making a horizontal slit above the damaged area and placing a cut piece of weather barrier into the slit, covering the damaged area. Tape the perimeter of the patched area. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END SECTION 07250 SECTION 0 7260 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER 07260-1 September 9, 2015 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY PRODUCTS SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION: 1. Vapor barrier and installation accessories for installation under concrete slabs. RELATED SECTIONS: 1. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 07 26 00 Vapor Retarders 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E1745- 11Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM E1643- 11Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B. Technical Reference - American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality control/assurance: 1. Summary of test results per paragraph 9.3 of ASTM E1745. 2. Manufacturer’s samples and literature. 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming, penetration repair, and perimeter seal per ASTM E1643. 4. All mandatory ASTM E1745 testing must be performed on a single production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Vapor barrier shall have all of the following qualities: 1. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft 2 · hr · inHg)] as tested in accordance with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 Section 7.1 (7.1.1-7.1.5). 2. Other performance criteria: a. Strength: ASTM E1745 Class A. b. Thickness: 15 mils minimum 3. Provide third party documentation that all testing was performed on a single production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1 B. Vapor barrier products: SECTION 0 7260 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER 07260-2 September 9, 2015 1. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC., (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 2. No substitutions. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Seams : 1. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. B. Penetrations of Vapor barrier: 1. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 2. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. C. Perimeter/edge seal: 1. Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries LLC, (887) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 2. Stego Term Bar by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 3. StegoTack Tape (double sided) by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure that subsoil is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Level and compact base material. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barrier in accordance ASTM E1643. 1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the placement whenever possible. 2. Extend vapor barrier to the perimeter of the slab. If practicable, terminate it at the top of the slab, otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to the structural engineer or (b) where obstructed by impediments, such as dowels, waterstops, or any other site condition requiring early termination of the vapor barrier. At the point of termination, seal vapor barrier to the foundation wall, grade beam or slab itself. a. Seal vapor barrier to the entire slab perimeter using Stego Crete Claw, per manufacturer's instructions. b. Seal vapor barrier to the entire perimeter wall or footing/grade beam with double sided StegoTack Tape, or both Stego Term Bar and StegoTack Tape, per manufacturer’s instructions. Ensure the concrete is clean and dry prior to adhering tape. 3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s seam tape. 4. Apply seam tape/Crete Claw to a clean and dry vapor barrier. SECTION 0 7260 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER 07260-3 September 9, 2015 5. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instruct ions. 6. Avoid the use of non-permanent stakes driven through vapor barrier. 7. If non-permanent stakes are driven through vapor barrier, repair as recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer. 8. Repair damaged areas with vapor barrier material of similar (or better) permeance, puncture and tensile. END OF SECTION END OF SECTION 07260 SECTION 07410 METAL ROOF PANELS 07410-1 January 30, 2017 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standing seam metal roofing and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood roof sheathing. 2. Section 7620 – Sheet metal flashing and trim: Roof edges, copings, fascia, and rainwear. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc -Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 792 - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 653 – Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy coated by the hot dip method 3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 4. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and plate. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01003-05. B. Florida Product Approvals: For products, components and assemblies for which Florida product approval is specified, submit Miami-Dade County NOA or Florida Building Control product approval showing compliance with the requirements of the Florida Building Code. C. Shop drawings as required for weathertight warranty. D. Closeout Submittals: Comply with the requirements of Section 01002-10. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience certified by sheet metal roofing manufacturer as an "Approved Installer." B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, in business a minimum of 35 years. C. Panels shall be factory-produced only. No portable, installer-owned or installer rented machines will be permitted. D. Florida Building Code (FBC) Requirements: SECTION 07410 METAL ROOF PANELS 07410-2 January 30, 2017 1. Provide roof systems that have Miami-Dade County Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA) or Florida Building Code (FBC) Product Approval. 2. Provide roof systems approved for design pressures calculated in accordance with the Florida Building Code bearing FBC Product Approval numbers or Miami-Dade NOA. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job site storage, handling, and protection. C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining. D. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage or traffic on completed roof surfaces. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s 20 year standard warranty against failure due to corrosion, rupture, or perforation. B. Provide manufacturer’s 30 year standard warranty against chipping, cracking, and fading of the paint system. C. Provide manufacturer’s 20 Year Weathertightness Limited Warranty. 1. Warranty shall cover material and installation of all roofing materials and related flashing and guttering. 2. Minimum two inspections are required; one before installation of metal roofing system starts and one after substantial completion of metal roofing system, 3. Provide inspector’s final report to owner prior to contract close out. D. Applicator shall furnish written warranty for a two (2) year period from date of substantial completion of building, covering repairs required to maintain roof and flashings in watertight condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to requirements, provide products by the following manufacturers: 1. ATAS International, Inc., Allentown, PA 800-468-1441. 2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation, Acworth GA. 800-272-4482. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panel: Minimum 18” wide standing seam roofing panel with integral locking seam and stiffening ribs, factory fabricated out of 0.032” aluminum. 1. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard 2-coat PVDF paint system; equal to ATAS’ Coppertone or as indicated on drawings. 2. Factory fabricated out of 0.032” aluminum. 3. Approved products: SECTION 07410 METAL ROOF PANELS 07410-3 January 30, 2017 a. ATAS International, Inc., MRD194 panel. b. Petersen Aluminum Corporation, Snap Clad 18” wide panel. B. Soffit – solid and vented panels, 12” wide with a v-groove in the middle of the panel, factory fabricated out of 0.032” aluminum. 1. Approved Products: a. Approved product: ATAS International, Inc., MPS120, solid and vented. b. Approved product: Petersen Aluminum Products, Pac-850, solid and vented. 2. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard 2-coat PVDF paint system; Equal to ATAS’ Bone White, or as indicated on drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other special items required for sheet metal roof system installation. Provide accessories with same finish and color as sheet metal roofing. 1. Trim Items: Minimum 12’ long to minimize joints; same material and finish as roofing panels. 2. Fasteners: Recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended purpose. 3. Panel clips: stainless steel, provided by panel manufacturer. 4. Panel accessories: provided by panel manufacturer, same material and trim as panels where appropriate. 5. Mastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Sealants: Color coordinated primerless silicone, or high grade, non -drying butyl recommended by panel manufacturer. B. Underlayment: 1. Polyethylene/Rubberized Asphalt: Polyethylene sheet with rubberized asphalt self- adhering underlayment. Grace Ice & Water Shield manufactured by W.R. Grace, Cambridge, MA. 2. Tamko TW Tile and Metal Underlayment 3. Carlisle CCW WIP 300HT 4. Interwrap Titanium PSU 5. High temperature polyethylene sheet with rubberized asphalt self-adhering underlayment, 40-mil minimum thickness, as recommended by the metal roofing panel manufacturer. C. Use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction. Exposed fasteners in panels not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent ar eas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Broom clean substrate surfaces immediately before starting installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION SECTION 07410 METAL ROOF PANELS 07410-4 January 30, 2017 A. Install sheet metal roofing and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Dissimilar Metals: Back paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. C. Underlayment: . 1. Polyethylene/ Rubberized Asphalt (Ice and Water Shield): or previously listed approved products. Apply below all roof panelsunless otherwise shown. Install ice and water shield over entire sheathing surface beneath roof panels. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Metal Roof System: 1. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations and as defined under this Section. 2. Install panels so that they run continuously from eave to ridge. Horizontal panel joints are not permitted. 3. Anchor securely in place using stainless steel clips and fasteners spaced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for design wind load criteria. Fasteners driven into metal deck shall be of the length required to penetrate deck a minimum of 3/4 inch. Fasteners used to attach metal roof panels directly to purlins shall be of length recommended by manufacturer. a. Install per FPA, NOA and project specific structural calculations and design pressure requirements 4. Fully seat adjacent panel to achieve continuous engagement of standing seam joint. 5. Align panel seams at ridge locations. 6. At perimeters and high velocity wind zones: a. ATAS panels: Use the same panels used for the field of the roof. Decrease clip spacing as noted on shop drawings. b. Petersen panels: Use 16” wide panels factory fabricated out of 0.040”aluminum. Clip spacing as noted on shop drawings. E. Soffit Panels: 1. Install according to manufacturer’s standard directions. 2. Install one solid panel and then one vented panel, repeating the pattern over the entire installation area. 3.4 CLEANING A. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. C. Clean exposed surfaces of Work 24 hours prior to date of Substantial Completion. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide protection and maintain manufacturer's recommended conditions to prevent damage of deterioration of sheet metal roofing system until date of Substantial Completion. SECTION 07410 METAL ROOF PANELS 07410-5 January 30, 2017 END SECTION 07410 SECTION 07461 SIDING 07461-1 September 9, 2015 SECTION 07461 SIDING (James Hardie HZ10 Engineered for Climate Siding) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiber cement lap siding, panels, single, trim, fascia, moulding and accessories, James Hardie HZ10 Engineered for Climate Siding. B. Factory-finished fiber cement lap siding, panels, single, trim, fascia, moulding and accessories, James Hardie HZ10 Engineered for Climate Siding. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Light Gage Metal Framing: Wall framing and bracing. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and bracing. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing. D. Section 07210 - Insulation: Exterior wall insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber-Cement Sheets B. ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Tool and Tape. C. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01003-05. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of atypical non-standard applications of cementitious siding materials which are outside the scope of the standard details and specifications provided by the manufacturer. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 by 6 inches (100 by 150 mm), representing actual product, color, and patterns. SECTION 07461 SIDING 07461-2 September 9, 2015 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar products. B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store siding on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent- based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: Limited, non-pro-rated product warranty. 1. HardiePlank HZ10 lap siding for 30 years. 2. HardiPanel HZ10 vertical siding for 30 years. 3. HardieSoffit HZ10 panels for 30 years. 4. HardieShingle HZ10 siding for 30 years. 5. Artisan HZ10 lap siding for 30 years. B. Product Warranty: Limited, product warranty. 1. HardieTrim HZ10 boards for 15 years. C. Finish Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing finish defects. 1. When used for its intended purpose, properly installed and maintained according to James Hardie's published installation instructions, James Hardie's ColorPlus finish with ColorPlus Technology, for a period of 15 years from the date of purchase: will not peel; will not crack; and will not chip. Finish warranty includes the coverage for labor and material. D. Workmanship Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 07461 SIDING 07461-3 September 9, 2015 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: James Hardie Building Products, Inc., which is located at: 26300 La Alameda Suite 400 ; Mission Viejo, CA 92691; Toll Free Tel: 866-274- 3464; Tel: 949-367-4980; Email: request info (info@jameshardie.com); Web: www.jameshardiecommercial.com B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Requests for approval of equal substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01003. 2.2 SIDING A. Artisan HZ10 lap siding requirement for Materials: 1. Fiber-cement Siding - complies with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II. 2. Fiber-cement Siding - complies with ASTM E 136 as a noncombustible material. 3. Fiber-cement Siding - complies with ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index = 0, Smoke Developed Index = 5. 4. Warnock Hersey Product Listing. 5. CAL-FIRE, Fire Engineering Division Building Materials Listing - Wildland Urban Interface (WUI) Listed Product. 6. Florida State Product Approval FL10477. 7. Miami Dade County, Florida Notice of Acceptance 12-0517.05. 8. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation EC-55. 9. Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet. B. Lap Siding: Artisan HZ10 Lap Siding as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 1. Type: Smooth 8-1/4 inches (210 mm) with 7 inches (178 mm) exposure. C. Trim: 1. Artisan HZ10 Accent trim as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. SECTION 07461 SIDING 07461-4 September 9, 2015 2.3 FASTENERS A. Wood Framing Fasteners: 1) NOT USED B. Metal Framing: 1. Metal Framing: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) No. 8-18 by 0.323 inch (8.2 mm) head self-drilling, corrosion resistant S-12 ribbed buglehead screws. C. Masonry Walls (CMU): 1. Masonry Walls: Aerico Stud Nail, ET&F ASM No.-144-125, 0.14 inch (3.6 mm) shank by 0.30 inch (7.6 mm) head by 2 inches (51 mm) long corrosion resistant nails. 2.4 FINISHES A. Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer. 1. Primer: Factory primed by James Hardie. 2. Topcoat: Refer to Section 09900 and Exterior Finish Schedule. B. Factory Finish: Refer to Exterior Finish Schedule. 1. Product: ColorPlus Technology by James Hardie. 2. Definition: Factory applied finish; defined as a finish applied in the same facility and company that manufactures the siding substrate. 3. Process: a. Factory applied finish by fiber cement manufacturer in a controlled environment within the fiber cement manufacturer's own facility utilizing a multi-coat, heat cured finish within one manufacturing process. b. Each finish color must have documented color match to delta E of 0.5 or better between product lines, manufacturing lots or production runs as measured by photospectrometer and verified by third party. 4. Protection: Factory applied finish protection such as plastic laminate that is removed once siding is installed 5. Accessories: Complete finishing system includes pre-packaged touch-up kit provided by fiber cement manufacturer. Provide quantities as recommended by manufacturer. C. Factory Finish Color for Trim, Soffit and Siding Colors: 1. Arctic White JH10-20.: Trim 2. Harris Cream JH80-10. : Siding PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Nominal 2 inch by 4 inch (51 m by 102 mm) wood framing selected for minimal SECTION 07461 SIDING 07461-5 September 9, 2015 shrinkage and complying with local building codes, including the use of water- resistive barriers or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned. 1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding. 3. Protect siding from other trades. D. Minimum 20 gauge 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) C-Stud 16 inches maximum on center or 16 gauge 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) C-Stud 24 inches (610 mm) maximum on center metal framing complying with local building codes, including the use of water-resistive barriers and/or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned. 1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding. 3. Protect siding from other trades. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Install a water-resistive barrier is required in accordance with local building code requirements. D. The water-resistive barrier must be appropriately installed with penetration and junction flashing in accordance with local building code requirements. E. Protecto Wrap PW 100/40 Air Vapor barrier and flashing. Protecto Wrap Company 1955 S. Cherokee St. Denver, Co. 80223. Tel. 1 (800) 759-9727. www.Protecto wrap.com F. Use Seam Tape and joint and laps G. Install Flex Flashing H. Dupont-Tyvek-Stucco Wrap-single ply. Tel.1 (800)-44-Tyvek. Email www.Construction.Tyvek.com 3.3 INSTALLATION - HARDIEPLANK HZ10 LAP SIDING AND ARTISAN HZ10 LAP SIDING A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Starting: Install a minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick lath starter strip at the bottom course of the wall. Apply planks horizontally with minimum 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide laps at the top. The bottom edge of the first plank overlaps the starter strip. C. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Align vertical joints of the planks over framing members. E. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade. SECTION 07461 SIDING 07461-6 September 9, 2015 F. Locate splices at least one stud cavity away from window and door openings. G. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required Hardieplank lap siding is installed to framing members and secured with fasteners described in Table No. 2 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405. H. Locate splices at least 12 inches (305 mm) away from window and door openings. 3.4 FINISHING A. Finish unprimed siding with a minimum one coat high quality, alkali resistant primer and one coat of either, 100 percent acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade topcoats or two coats high quality alkali resistant 100 percent acrylic or latex, exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. B. Finish factory primed siding with a minimum of one coat of high quality 100 percent acrylic or latex or oil based exterior grade paint within 180 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END SECTION 07461 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-1 January 30, 2017 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. EPDM Membrane Roofing Systems. 2. TPO Membrane Roofing Systems. 3. Flashing Membrane. 4. Waterproofing Membrane. 5. Roof insulation: Poly Isocyanurate board. 6. Repair and maintenance of the roof after roof installation until store gr and opening. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal fascia and edge trim, cou nter flashings, and other sheet metal. 3. Section 07001 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 4. Section 07720 – Roof Accessories 5. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 2. ASTM D 4637 - EPDM Sheet Used In Single-Ply Roof Membrane. 3. ASTM D 4434 - Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing. 4. ASTM D 6878 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing. C. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM): 1. FM Approvals Building Materials Approval Guide, Chapter 3 - Approved Combinations and Assemblies 2. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 - Design Wind Loads. 3. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 -Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Components. 4. FM Approval Standard 4450 - Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs. 5. FM Approval Standard 4470 - Class 1 Roof Covers. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory. 2. UL 790 - Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials. 3. UL 1256 - Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single Ply Membrane Roofing System: Single ply membrane roofing system consisting of insulation on metal deck with 60 mil reinforced membrane mechanically fastened. B. Flashing and Waterproofing Membranes: 60 mil reinforced membrane, fully adhered, as defined herein and indicated on the drawings. 1.4 RECORD SUBMITTALS SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-2 January 30, 2017 A. Submit under provisions of Section 01002-4 B. Product Data: Provide characteristics on membrane materials, flashing materials, and insulation. C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required for seaming the membrane. D. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: E. Reports: Indicate procedures followed; ambient temperatures, humidity, and wind velocity during application. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS 1. System Experience: a. Contractor shall be authorized installer or licensed contractor for the roofing system manufacturer, as defined by the roof system manufacturer, for one year prior to the bid date. b. Contractor shall have installed a minimum of three projects using the specified roofing system within the past three years. B. Qualifications of Applicator: 1. Logistical Experience: Contractor shall have installed a minimum of ten roofing projects of the same or similar scope with a minimum of 5,000 SF in size within the last three years. 2. System Experience: a. Contractor shall have been trained by and shall be an authorized installer or licensed contractor for the roofing system manufacturer, as defined by the roof system manufacturer, for one year prior to the bid date. b. Contractor shall have installed a minimum of three projects using the specified roofing system within the past year. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. 2. Factory Mutual Engineering & Research Corporation (FM): Roof Assembly classification, of Class 1 Construction, wind uplift requirement minimum of I 90, in accordance with FM Construction Bulletin 1-28 or local jurisdiction, whichever is greater. D. Pre-installation Conference: 1. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 2. Review installation procedures and coordination required roof openings with relating Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Follow industry standards for environment requirements including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. 2. Do not apply finished roofing system to wet, damp or frozen deck surface or when precipit ation is occurring. 3. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-3 January 30, 2017 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Contractor shall coordinate the Work with installation of associated metal counter flashings spec ified under other sections as the Work of this Section proceeds. B. Contractor shall complete installation of base flashing at roof curbs prior to setting roof top equipment. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide Twenty year (20) Full System warranty under provisions of Section 01002-10 B. Warranty: Cover damage resulting from failure to prevent penetration of water. C. Date of warranty to commence at date of building Substantial Completion. No “Early Release of Warranty” will be accepted by building owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the physical properties listed below, the following Manufacturers are considered acceptable to provide the specified Roofing System: 1. Versico Roofing Systems (800) 992-7663 2. Johns Manville Roofing Systems (800) 654-3103 3. Durolast Roofing, Inc. (800) 248-0280 4. Carlisle SynTec (800) 479-6832 5. Firestone (800) 428-4442 6. GAF Inc. (973-628-3000 B. ROOFING SYSTEMS 1. Single Ply EPDM Membrane Roofing a. Versigard, by Versico 1) Outside HVHZ Only: FBC Product Control Number: FL1616.1 dated 05 March 2015 b. Sure-Seal Mechanically-Fastened Roofing System, by Carlisle. 1) Florida (FBC) Product Control Number: FL1601.1 dated 20 March 2008. c. EPDM, by Firestone 1) Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL10284.1 dated 08 April 2015 2) Miami-Dade County Product Control Notice of Acceptance: 08-0324.06 (Expires 07/27/13) 2. Single Ply TPO Membrane Roofing a. TPO Roofing System, by Johns-Manville. 1) Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL11475.1 dated 30 April 2015. 2) Inside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number FL16758.1 dated 29 April 2015 b. Versiweld, by Versico. 1) Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number FL14207.1 dated 20 March 2008 2) Inside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number FL16443.1 dated 20 April 2015 c. Ultraply TPO by Firestone 1) Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL10264.1 dated 09 April 2015 2) Inside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL15894.1 dated 02 July 2015 d. Everguard TPO by GAF 1) Outside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL5293.1 dated 14 April 2015 2) Inside HVHZ: FBC Product Control Number: FL16730.1 dated 15 April 2015 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-4 January 30, 2017 2.2 MEMBRANE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES A. EPDM: Cured, synthetic single-ply membrane composed of Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) and reinforced with a polyester scrim conforming to ASTM D 4637 1. Membrane Type: Type II, reinforced, 60 mil thickness, white. B. TPO: Thermoplastic single ply membrane composed of thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) sheet as specified for the specific product hereinbefore and reinforced with polyester scrim conforming to ASTM D 6878. 1. Membrane Type: Reinforced, 60 mil thickness, white. 2.3 FLASHING MEMBRANE A. Flashing Membrane: Reinforced and non-reinforced membrane and pressure-sensitive flashing by Roofing System manufacturer, minimum 60 mils, specifically designed for use in flashing at perimeters and wall, and around projections through roofing system. 2.4 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Waterproofing Membrane: Membrane waterproofing formed into uniform, flexible sheets by Roofing System manufacturer. Reinforced, 60 mils nominal thickness. B. Waterproofing Flashing: Reinforced and non-reinforced membrane and pressure-sensitive flashing by Roofing System manufacturer, minimum 60 mils specifically designed for use in flashing at perimeters and wall, and around projections through roofing system. 2.5 ROOF INSULATION - MANUFACTURERS A. E’nrg’y 3 roof insulation (R=40) as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Super Tuff-R roof insulation (R-40) as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company C. As required by roofing manufacturer to achieve maximum performance and thermal resistance 2.6 ANCHORAGE MATERIALS A. Seam Plates: As recommended by membrane manufacturer for roofing system. 2.7 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Surface Conditioner: Compatible with membrane. B. Membrane Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet membrane. 2.8 FLASHINGS A. Flexible Flashings: Same material as membrane; manufactured by membrane supplier. B. Roof Accessories: As specified in Section 07800-FL. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Plates: As recommended by membrane manufacturer for roofing system. SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-5 January 30, 2017 B. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit application. C. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by Factory Mutual and system manufacturer; length required for thickness of material with washers. D. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. E. Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized steel; maximum possible lengths per location, with attachment flanges. F. Traffic Surfacing: Flexible walkway pads as compatible with roofing system as indicated on plans. Pads shall be the heaviest weight available from the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and tightly secured. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains, valleys, and eaves. Verify flutes of steel deck are evenly spaced at intersections. Defects in the substrate surface shall be reported and documented. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of water, snow, and ice. E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide covers and other means of protection as necessary to protect building surfaces against damage during roofing work. B. Where Work shall continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces from damage. 3.3 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Place long edge of boards parallel to deck flutes, forming joint over solid bearing. Lay insulation units with long edge joints continuous and end joints staggered. Mechanically fasten insulation for N.O.A./F.P.C. wind uplift resistance to deck with FM approved fasteners and plates in accordance with requirements of FM. 1. Install fasteners using drill with torque clutch; other types of drills will not be permitted. 2. In no case shall the number of fasteners be less than indicated in approved submittals. B. Lay insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit neatly around protrusions through roof. At parapet walls, cope insulation around protrusions and embed plates; butt tight to wall, sealing conditioned building. 1. Fill gaps over 1/4 inch wide with Foam Filler Insulation. After foam sets and before i nstallation of membrane, trim foam flush with insulation surfac e. C. Place roof crickets and tapered insulation to required slope pattern in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions. D. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-6 January 30, 2017 E. Adhere a single layer of insulation to manufactured metal curbs with bonding cement. 3.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Mechanically Fastened Membrane: 1. Starting at low point of roof surface, run membrane perpendicular to roof slope. Unroll membrane over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Mechanically fasten membrane using manufacturer's fastening system. Install fasteners in accordance with submitted engineered layout pattern to resist specified wind uplift. 3. Install fasteners using drill depth sensing or torque limiting screw guns to limit under / over drive of fasteners. a. Drill motors and other non-limiting drivers shall not be used. 4. Seam Sealing a. EPDM: Seal seams where fasteners and seam plates are used with EPDM 6 -inch seam tape. Seal seams without seam plates with EPDM 3-inch in-seam tape as approved by the system manufacturer. b. TPO Heat-weld seams according to the system manufacturer’s recommendations, and with a minimum weld width of 1-1/2 inches. B. Cold Weather Application Procedures: When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, follow Cold Weather Application Procedures as follows: 1. Store materials in heated storage units prior to installation. Rotate adhesive, cement, and sealant containers to maintain their temperature above 40 degrees F. 2. Allow membrane to relax until no wrinkles are visible and restrict work to sunny days. 3. Allow adequate time for solvents in cements to flash off. Check dryness of applied c ements before sealing joints. 4. Verify that frost, dew, and other forms of moisture have evaporated prior to covering insulation with membrane to prevent entrapment of moisture within finished roof system. 3.5 WATER CUTOFFS AND WEATHER PROTECTION A. Install water cut-offs at end of day's operation to seal insulation and edge of roof membrane fr om moisture entry. If inclement weather appears imminent during roofing application, cease operations and protect deck, insulation, flashings, penetrations and membrane from moisture i nfiltration with water cutoffs. Insulation and roofing materials not so protected prior to inclement weather will be considered damaged and will be cause for rejection. B. Remove water cut-offs and other temporary weather protections prior to continuing roofing work. Remove materials that have been subject to moisture damage and return deck to a clean, dry condition before proceeding with roofing operations. Remove damaged materials from job site. C. The water cut-offs and weather protection shall not be considered a part of the final roof system specified. 3.6 MEMBRANE FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A. Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements using manufacturer's standard peel and stick flashing. 1. Reinforced Flashing Membrane: Where conditions permit, flash penetrations and walls with reinforced flashing membrane. 2. Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle changes, to flash inside and outside corners, scuppers, and other penetrations or unusually shaped walls as approved by the manufacturer. B. Roof Penetrations: 1. Molded Pipe Flashing: Install where configuration of penetration will permit. SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-7 January 30, 2017 2. Urethane Rubber Seal System: Install where molded pipe flashing cannot be installed due to configuration of penetration. Install at locations shown including electrical penetrations, came ra mount conduits, gas line penetrations, flues, and satellite dish location. a. Install per manufacturers application instructions. C. Secure to nailing strips and reglets at 4 inches o.c. D. Fasten termination bars at 12 inches on center or less to maintain cons tant compression. E. Coordinate installation of rooftop equipment and related flashings. F. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane. G. Install walkway pads minimum of 60” wide, not more than 2 inches from curbs and not more than 3/8 inches between pads. See plan for location. Adhere pads to roofing system to prevent displacement in maximum anticipated design wind velocity and to allow drainage of moisture from beneath pads. Install pads to allow roof surface drainage without ponding water. Install pads after adjacent equipment installation. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of the applied warranty. B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. 3.8 CLEANING A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by Work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof installation, protect roof surfaces as recommended by roofing system manufacturer to protect manufacturer's warranty. 3.10 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall maintain the entire roofing system and related work from the time of roofing completion until issuance of Certificate of Occupancy. Maintenance shall consist of repair of material or installation defects or damage resulting from any subsequent work on the roof or from any weather related damage. Maintenance shall be to maintain the roof system in a watertight condition including repair of conditions that show signs of inferior workmanship that may result in potential leaks. Leaks occurring during the maintenance shall be repaired i n accordance with good roofing practice and the requirements specified herein. The Contractor shall remove and replace all wet i nsulation caused by water leaks and repair the Roofing System. END OF SECTION 07530 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-1 March 2019 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Formed roof drainage system. 2. Formed wall flashing and trim. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim. C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim upon request of the Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. a. ATAS International, Inc., Allentown, PA. 1-800-468-1441. b. Petersen Aluminum Corp. Acworth GA. 800-272-4482. i. Identify as a Wawa project and state where you are located for pricing. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. Mill Finish: Standard one-side bright. 2. Factory Prime Coating: Factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 March 2019 3. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. a. Color: Match Architect's samples 4. Clear Anodic Finish: Class II, AA-M12C22A31, complying with AAMA 611. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, No. 2D finish. C. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume Plus): ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating both sides. D. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality. 2. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating: a. Factory Prime Coating: Factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat. b. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified for below: 1) Humidity and Salt Spray Resistance: 1000 hours. 2) Color: Match Architect's samples E. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, non- perforated. C. Fasteners: Provide stainless steel wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) minimum and not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non- staining tape. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3 March 2019 E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recomm endations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat - lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. C. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, no t less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured. 2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. 1. Material and finish: 0.032” aluminum, bright clear anodized. 2. Size and style: 6” K 3. Length: Fabricate in min. 25’-0” sections. 4. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. 5. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4 March 2019 B. Downspouts (Building Perimeter): Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with mitered elbows. 1. Material: 22 gauge stainless steel 2. Size and style: 4” diameter round. 3. Length: Fabricate in 10’ sections. 4. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. C. Downspouts (Tower Roof Only): Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with mitered elbows. 5. Material: .032 aluminum 6. Size and style: 4” diameter round. 7. Length: Fabricate in 10’ sections. 8. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. D. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 2-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 1. Material: 24 gauge stainless steel. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. E. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in overflows. 1. Material: 24 gauge stainless steel. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. 2.6 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing Assembly: 1. Fascia: Basis of Design: Rapid-Lok Fascia, by ATAS International, Inc. custom Edge- Lok fascia. a. Alternate acceptable product: Pac-Tite WT Fascia with custom extender, by Petersen Aluminum. b. Material: 0.050” aluminum. c. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard 3-coat PVDF paint system, color #17 Brite Red. d. Length: Minimum 12’ for fewer lap joints. e. Joint covers: 6” wide, same material as fascia. f. Fascia extensions: 0.050” aluminum, same finish as fascia, length as called for on plans. g. FM Rated 1-645 h. Miami-Dade NOA required. i. Lifetime 215 mph wind warranty j. 30 year kynar finish warranty 2. Parapet Coping a. Factory or shop fabricated. b. Length: Minimum 10’ c. Material: 0.040” aluminum, same color as fascia. d. Provide cleats and accessories for a complete system. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-5 March 2019 B. Base Flashing: 1. Factory or shop fabricated. 2. Length: Minimum 10’ 3. Material: 0.040” aluminum. C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Factory or shop fabricated. 2. Length: Minimum 10’ 3. Material: 0.032” aluminum. D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: 1. Material: Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered. E. Roof-Drain Flashing: 1. Material: Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: 1. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 2. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 3. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealan t. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or b ayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6 March 2019 would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. i. Stainless steel: use stainless steel fasteners with stainless steel sheet metal. H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. 2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches on center in between. D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants o r tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper discharge. 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-7 March 2019 B. Roof Edge Flashing and Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 and the authority having jurisdiction. C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant. D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. END SECTION 07620 SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-1 10-25-2012 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Roof hatches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each exposed finish upon request of architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M with Class AZ-50 coating, structural quality, Grade 40 (Grade 275), or as required for strength. B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated. C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of e xposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating. SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-2 10-25-2012 G. Mastic Sealant: Poly-isobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, nondrying, non-migrating sealant. H. Elastomeric Sealant: Recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non-asbestos, fib-rated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.2 ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Metallic Products Corporation. 3. Vent Products Co., Inc. C. General: Units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Coordinate dimensions with equipment to be supported. 1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of units and formed flange at perimeter bottom for mounting to roof. 2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 3. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot, fabricate support units with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. D. Roof Curbs: 1. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.0747-inch-thick, structural-quality, hot-dip galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy- coated steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. 2. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.063-inch-thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints. 3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid insulation where indicated. 4. Cants: Formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness. II. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-3 10-25-2012 1-203-934-6363, Fax: 1-203-933-8478, Web: www.bilco.com, or product of equal quality and warranty III. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that roof hatch installation will not disrupt other trades. Verify that the substrate is dry, clean, and free of foreign matter. Report and correct defects prior to any installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Submit product design drawings for review and approval to the architect or specifier before fabrication. B. The installer shall check as-built conditions and verify the manufacturer’s roof hatch details for accuracy to fit the application prior to fabrication. The installer shall comply with the roof hatch Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. The installer shall furnish mechanical fasteners consis tent with the roof requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations, equipment, and other construction to ensure that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details in NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated, C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent separation. D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a th ick bed of roofing cement to form seal. E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant. F. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION 07720 June, 2012 SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Firestopping in rated assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2. ASTM E814 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 2. UL 2079 – Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 3. UL Fire Resistance Directory: 4. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgements 1.3 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY A. Installation of firestopping shall be in accordance with FM 4991. General contractor is responsible for all sub-contractors respective installation of firestop work to be preformed in strict compliance with appropriate UL listed designs. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During application of caulk and putty, keep away from heat, open flame, sparks, or other sources of ignition until product cures. Use only with adequate ventilation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide firestopping products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Nelson Firestop Products, (800) 331-7325. 2. Hilti, Inc, (800) 879-8000. 3. The RectorSeal Corporation, (800) 231-3345. 4. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI), (800) 992-1180. 5. 3M Fire Protection Products, (800) 328-1687. 6. Tremco Firestop System, (800) 852-8173. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Firestop materials shall have been tested and shall be in compliance with the minimum requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479, and UL 2079 as applicable. Products used shall be as listed below as suitable for the intended application and as required to produce the fire rating as shown on the drawings and to conform to the Firestopping Schedule of UL assemblies included at the end of this Section. B. Intumescent Latex or Acrylic Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex or acrylic formulation. 1. LBS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. FS ONE or CP 606, by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk 950 or 1000, by RectorSeal. June, 2012 4. SpecSeal SSS100, by STI. 5. CP 25WB+, by 3M. 6. TREMstop WBM, by Tremco. C. Intumescent Solvent-Release-Curing Sealant: Single component, intumescent, synthetic-polymer based, non-sag grade. 1. CP 25N/S, by 3M. 2. TREMstop WBM, by Tremco. D. Intumescent Wrap/Strip: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one face. 1. WRS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 645 Wrap Strip, by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk Wrap Strip, by RectorSeal. 4. SpecSeal SSWRED Wrapstrip, by STI. 5. FS-195+ Wrap/Strip, by 3M. 6. TREMstop WS, by Tremco. E. Intumescent Putty: Single-component, non-hardening, dielectric, intumescent putty. 1. FSP, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 618 Putty Stick or CP 617/617L Putty Pad, by Hilti. 3. CP 645 Wrap Strip, by Hilti. 4. CP 658 Firestop Plug, by Hilti. 5. Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty, by RectorSeal. 6. SpecSeal Putty, by STI. 7. Moldable Putty+, by 3M. F. Silicone Sealant: Single-component, moisture-curing, silicone-based elastomeric, non-sag grade. 1. CLK N/S, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 601S, by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk 835, by RectorSeal. 4. SpecSeal PEN 300, by STI. 5. 2000+ Silicone, by 3M. 6. FYRE SIL, by Tremco. G. Silicone or Polyurethane Foam: Two-Component, liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 1. SpecSeal PEN 200, by STI. 2. 2001 Silicone RTV Foam, by 3M. 3. CP 620 Fire Foam, by Hilti. H. Intumescent Collar: Factory-fabricated, intumescent collar. 1. PCS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 642 or CP 643, by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk Pipe Collar, by RectorSeal. 4. SpecSeal SSC Collars, by STI. 5. Plastic Pipe Device, by 3M. 6. TREMstop D, by Tremco. I. Intumescent Composite Sheet, Pillows and Mortar, or Blocks: Products used to firestop large openings. 1. CPS, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. FS 657 Fireblocks, by Hilti. 3. CP 637 Firestop Mortar, by Hilti. 4. CP 675T Firestop Board, by Hilti. 5. SpecSeal SSB Pillows and SpecSeal SSM Firestop Compound, by STI. 6. CS-195+ Composite Sheet, by 3M. 7. TREMstop PS, by Tremco. J. Sprayable Fire-Rated Mastic: Products used to firestop construction joints. 1. CP672 Speed Spray, by Hilti. 2. Specseal Elastomeric Spray, by STI. 3. Firedam Spray, by 3M. June, 2012 K. Packing Material: Manufacturer's standard mastic, putty, ceramic fiber blanket, or mineral wool to be used as fill or backing material for firestopping. 1. FSB or Mineral Wool, by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. Mineral Wool, by Hilti. 3. Fire Safing or Backer Rod, by RectorSeal. 4. Mineral Wool, by STI. 5. FireMaster Mastic, FireMaster Putty, or FireMaster Bulk, by 3M. 6. Cerablanket, by Tremco. 7. CP 777 Speed Plugs, by Hilti. (preformed mineral wool designed for top of wall fluted metal deck packing material) L. Substitutions: Not Permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove loose dirt and oil from penetration surfaces. B. Place hangers or damming materials in penetration to hold firestopping materials, if necessary. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer charts for appropriate material to achieve required fire rating in various locations. B. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire rated wall materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. C. Install firestopping at penetrations and construction joints of fire rated walls and floors in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Inspection: Upon completion of installation, inspection of installed firestopping shall be made by a qualified representitive to verify work complies with the manufacturers requirements. Submit written certification to the Architect that Manufacturer has visited the site and the work is in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and published instructions. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Provide firestopping complying with UL assemblies specified below. Penetration Assembly Nelson Hilti RectorSeal STI 3M Tremco Metal Pipe CMU Wall 8" Thick or Less CAJ1224 or CAJ1203 CAJ 1149 or CAJ1155 or CAJ1226 CAJ1114 or CAJ1115 CAJ1079 or CAJ1217 CAJ1001 or CAJ1009 CAJ1179 or CAJ1187 Gypsum Board Partition WL1083 or WL1030 WL1054 or WL1058 WL1026 or WL1034 WL1049 or WL1079 WL1003 or WL1009 WL1020 or WL1051 Non- Metallic Pipe CMU Wall 8" Thick or Less CAJ2086 CAJ2110 or CAJ2109 CAJ2021 or WJ2025 CAJ2064 or CAJ2045 CAJ2005 CAJ2082 or FA2024 Non- Metallic Pipe Gypsum Board Partition WL2071 WL2098 or WL2078 WL2015 or WL2104 WL2093 or WL2029 WL2002 or WL2005 WL2083 or WL2082 June, 2012 Penetration Assembly Nelson Hilti RectorSeal STI 3M Tremco Cable Tray CMU Wall 8" Thick or Less CAJ8049 or CAJ4033 CAJ4035 or CAJ4017 CAJ8043 CAJ4020 or CAJ4029 CAJ4003 or CBJ4020 CAJ4007 or WJA4005 Gypsum Board Partition WL4003 WL4011 or WL4019 - - - - WL4005 or WL4008 WL4004 WL3043 or WL3044 Insulated Metal Pipe CMU Wall 8" thick or Less CAJ5008 or CAJ5059 CAJ5090 or CAJ5091 WJ5016 or CAJ5070 CAJ5021 or CAJ5029 CAJ5001 or CAJ5002 CAJ5052 or CBT5005 Gypsum Board Partition WL5036 WL5028 or WL5029 WL5057 WL5014 or WL5051 WL5001 WL5034 Constructio n Gaps - Head CMU Wall to Metal Deck - - - - HWD0098 TRC/PV120-14 - - - - HWD0013 - - - - of Wall to Roof Deck Gyp Bd Parti'n to Metal Deck - - - - HWD0042 or HWD0049 HWD0014 - - - - HWS0003 WHPV60.01 Constructio n Gaps - Wall to Wall CMU Wall to CMU Wall - - - - WWD1011 or WWD1012 or WWD1017 - - - - - - - - WWS1001 - - - - Gyp Bd Parti'n to Gyp Bd Parti'n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WWS0004 - - - - END OF SECTION SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-1 July, 2011 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 5. Firestop system through fire resistance - rated walls. 6. Exterior joints in sheet metal flashing and trim. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Firestop System Submittals: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance with requirements for each condition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates using test method indicated in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. C. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 119 under conditions where positive furnaces pressures of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistive Rating of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another testing inspecting agency. D. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2 July, 2011 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not meet requirements specified in this Section or fail in adhesion within specified warranty period two years from date of Final Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated on drawings. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealant: (Gutters & Coping Sealant) 1. Products: a. Dow Corning; 795. b. GE Silicone, SilPruf. c. Tremco Spectrem 2 B. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. For vertical masonry control joints, provide the following: a. Products: 1) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. 2) Tremco; Vulkem 116. 3) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - 1a. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 25. 2. Exposure: Use T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 3. Substrates: Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. Urethane Sealant: 1. Concrete paving joints, horizontal traffic surfaces. a. Products: 1) Bostik, “Chem-Calk 950”. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3 July, 2011 2) Sonneborn, “SL-1”. 3) Tremco, Vulkem 45 b. Type and Grade S (singe component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class 25 d. Exposure: T (traffic). e. Substrate: O 2.3 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop system under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and comply with "Performance Requirements" article. Use only components specified through penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, include the following: a. Slat-/rock-wood-fiber insulation. b. Sealants in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of full materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 6. Products: a. 3M Fire Prevention Products. b. Hilti Firestop Systems c. International Protective Coatings Corporation (IPC, a Division of W.R. Grace). d. Tremco Inc. 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 July, 2011 1. Type: C (closed-cell material with a surface skin). C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor performing work must be one the Sealant Manufacturer’s Approved Applicators. B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues could interfere with adhesion of joint sealants. 5. All surfaces to be caulked shall be clean and dry. C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-5 July, 2011 D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. E. Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. F. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and at position required to produce optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. G. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. H. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 1. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 2. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3. All deep cracks shall be filled to within 1/2 inch of the surface with an appropriate back-up material and caulked with a caulking gun. Caulking beads shall be smooth and straight. 4. Caulk around all door and storefront openings and where noted on the drawings. I. Masonry control joints shall be caulked with a high-quality paintable urethane caulk. Control depth of caulk at 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch with a continuous closed-cell rod. J. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Joint Configuration: Concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6 July, 2011 K. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. L. Through-Penetration Firestop Installation: 1. General: Installation through-penetration systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" of the firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for the applications indicated. END OF SECTION 07920 SECTION 08001 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08001-1 June 26, 2014 08001-01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 02.1 Acceptable Manufacturers Subject to compliance with the following specifications provide hollow metal from only one of the following: Note: All exterior doors shall be furnished and installed per an approved N.O.A.or Florida Product approval that meets or exceeds the project wind requirements. All such doors and frames shall bear Windstorm Resistance Labels. (A) Ceco Door Products (B) Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. (C) Curries Co. 02.2 Material – Insulated Exterior Doors Face sheets are to be made of commercial quality 16 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A525 A60. Vertical edges shall join the face sheets by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface. Hinge reinforcements shall be not less than 7 gage (3/16) plate 1-1/4" x 9" height to receive heavy weight (.180) hinges. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gage, extending the fu ll width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel welded in place so the channel is flush with the top of the face sheets of the door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable. Door cores shall have 22 gage vertical steel stiffeners spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. Stiffeners shall be spaced not more than 5" on centers. Spaces between stiffeners shall be filled with fiberglass insulation (minimum density 0.8#/cubic ft.). 02.3 Material - Interior Doors Face sheets are to be made of commercial quality 18 gauge cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366 or 620. Vertical edges shall be mechanically interlocked with a hairline edge seam. Hinge r einforcements shall be not less than 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" height to receive standard weight (.134) hinges. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gage, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Top and bottom channels shall be flush with top and bottom of door. Door cores shall be a one-piece resin-impregnated honeycomb securely bonded to both face sheets. 02.4 Material - Exterior Frames Shall be 14 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A526 A60. Pressure treated wood blocking shall be provided at head and jambs. All frames are to be assembled so that the face miter seam is "closed and tight". Weld the face seam and the full web of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress the weld area smooth. Apply a zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with matching prime paint. Run a continuous fine bead of white silicone caulk around frame after installation. 02.5 Material - Interior Frames Shall be 16 gauge that complies with ASTM A366 or A569. All frames shall be welded HM. Wood blocking shall be provided at head and jambs. Furnish cased openings frames where indicated on the Drawings. Run a continuous fine bead of white silicone caulk around frame after installation. 02.6 Labeled Doors and Frames Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard Number 80, as herein specified. SECTION 08001 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08001-2 June 26, 2014 Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection ratings as determined and scheduled. Doors and/or frames for labeled openings shall bear either a stamped or applied label from Warnock Hersey of Underwriters Laboratory. Labeled doors and frames shall comply with procedures of labeling agencies and codes of authority having jurisdiction. 02.7 Prime Finish Doors and frames are to be thoroughly cleaned and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of t he door and frame exposed to view shall receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting primer. The finish shall meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces". The prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of oil base paints shall be provided in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. Refer also to section 09900-03. END OF SECTION 08001 DECEMBER 28, 2011 (Revised 10-22-2012, 4-30-2013, 12-09-13, 06-26-2014, 09-09-2015, 01-30-2017) 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 1 EC 97909-29 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs kawneer.com Kawneer reserves the right to change configuration without prior notice when deemed necessary for product improvement. © Kawneer Company, Inc., 2011 Laws and building and safety codes governing the design and use of glazed entrance, window, and curtain wall products vary widely. Kawneer does not control the selection of product configurations, operating hardware, or glazing materials, and assumes no responsibility therefor. SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Kawneer Aluminum Entrances, Kawneer Storefronts, glass and glazing, and door hardware and components. 1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Entrances and Kawneer Storefronts include: a. 500 Swing Door; Wide stile, 5" vertical face dimension, 1-3/4" depth, high traffic applications. b. Trifab 451 Storefront System, 2” x 4 ½”, non thermal, screw spline, center glazed at the exterior. c. Trifab 450 Storefront System 1 ¾” x 4 ½” screw spline, center glazed at the interior. d. IR-501 Flush, Wet or Dry Glazed, Aluminum Storefront System-L.M.I. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07920 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum sliding door system 2. Division 08700 "Hardware" 3. Division 084126 "Glazing" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufactures Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG). 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed (MPH): Refer to plans b. Importance Factor (I, II, III): Refer to plans c. Exposure Category (A, B, C, D): Refer to plans B. Aluminum Framed Entrance Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures specified on plans inward and outward. The design pressures are based on the (FBC) Building Code; (2014) Edition. 2. Air Infiltration: For single acting offset pivot or butt hung entrances in the closed and locked position, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa) for single doors and 1.567 psf for pairs of doors. A single 3'0" x 7'0" (915 mm x 2134 mm) entrance door and frame shall not exceed 0.50 cfm per square foot. A pair of 6'0" x 7'0" (1830 mm x 2134mm) entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm per square foot. DECEMBER 28, 2011 (Revised 10-22-2012, 4-30-2013, 12-09-13, 06-26-2014, 09-09-2015, 01-30-2017) 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 2 EC 97909-29 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs kawneer.com Kawneer reserves the right to change configuration without prior notice when deemed necessary for product improvement. © Kawneer Company, Inc., 2011 Laws and building and safety codes governing the design and use of glazed entrance, window, and curtain wall products vary widely. Kawneer does not control the selection of product configurations, operating hardware, or glazing materials, and assumes no responsibility therefor. 3 Structural Performance: Corner strength shall be tested per the Kawneer dual moment load test procedure and certified by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld compliance and corner integrity [Testing procedure and certified test results available upon request]. 4. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf (383 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum- framed entrance door indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum-framed entrance doors. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum-framed entrance doors and storefronts that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain entrance doors, hardware, and storefront through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum-framed glass entrance doors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of sliding aluminum-framed glass door openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Kawneer Wide Stile Series 500 Entrance Door, Kawneer Trifab 451 Storefront System (exterior), and Kawneer Trifab 450 Storefront System B. Substitutions: Not allowed DECEMBER 28, 2011 (Revised 10-22-2012, 4-30-2013, 12-09-13, 06-26-2014, 09-09-2015, 01-30-2017) 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 3 EC 97909-29 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs kawneer.com Kawneer reserves the right to change configuration without prior notice when deemed necessary for product improvement. © Kawneer Company, Inc., 2011 Laws and building and safety codes governing the design and use of glazed entrance, window, and curtain wall products vary widely. Kawneer does not control the selection of product configurations, operating hardware, or glazing materials, and assumes no responsibility therefor. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by sliding aluminum-framed glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.090” wall thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with sliding aluminum-framed glass door members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. 1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702. 2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM A. Storefront Entrance Framing Trifab® VG 450 (interior) and Trifab VG 451(exterior): B. Non-Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel. D. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. E. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. F. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glazing: Wet or Dry glazing, as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. 2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely aluminum-framed entrance doors. B. Standard Hardware: 1. Weather stripping: a. Meeting stiles on pairs of doors shall be equipped with an adjustable astragal utilizing wool pile with polymeric fin. b. The door weathering on a single acting offset pivot or butt hung door and frame (single or pairs) shall be Kawneer Sealair® weathering. This is comprised of a thermoplastic elastomer weathering on a tubular shape with a semi-rigid polymeric backing. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in an aluminum extrusion applied to the interior exposed surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners (Necessary to meet specified performance tests). DECEMBER 28, 2011 (Revised 10-22-2012, 4-30-2013, 12-09-13, 06-26-2014, 09-09-2015, 01-30-2017) 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 4 EC 97909-29 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs kawneer.com Kawneer reserves the right to change configuration without prior notice when deemed necessary for product improvement. © Kawneer Company, Inc., 2011 Laws and building and safety codes governing the design and use of glazed entrance, window, and curtain wall products vary widely. Kawneer does not control the selection of product configurations, operating hardware, or glazing materials, and assumes no responsibility therefor. 3. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, with ribbed surface. National Guard products, Inc. Half Saddle Threshold #327 (1/2” High x 4” Wide). No substitutions. 4. Offset Pivots: top and bottom 5. Push/Pull: Style CP II / CO-9 6. Closer: LCN 4040 with matching cover 105 degree opening, no hold open function. 7. Security Lock/Dead Lock: No manual flush bolts allowed. Active Leaf MS1850 three (3) point lock. Inactive Leaf: Adams Rite 2180 two (2) point lock. 8. Cylinder: Provide thumbturns finished to match door with MS1850. 9. Floor mounted door stop (451 next to wall only, 2 required). Model: 242F Dome Stop Universal by Hagerco. See drawings for locations. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors. B. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling perimeter framing. 1. Door corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and 1-1/8" (29 mm) long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord. 2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance. 3. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. C. Weather Stripping: Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as indicated on manufactures drawings and details. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with AAMA-AFPA "Anodic Finishes/Painted Aluminum" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M10C22A41, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating (Color #14 Clear) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight sliding door installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening. DECEMBER 28, 2011 (Revised 10-22-2012, 4-30-2013, 12-09-13, 06-26-2014, 09-09-2015, 01-30-2017) 190/350/500 ENTRANCES 5 EC 97909-29 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Guide Specs kawneer.com Kawneer reserves the right to change configuration without prior notice when deemed necessary for product improvement. © Kawneer Company, Inc., 2011 Laws and building and safety codes governing the design and use of glazed entrance, window, and curtain wall products vary widely. Kawneer does not control the selection of product configurations, operating hardware, or glazing materials, and assumes no responsibility therefor. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum swing entrance doors, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install aluminum swing entrance doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill threshold in bed of sealant, as indicated, for weather tight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 084113 SECTION 084126 STOREFRONT GLAZING 084126-1 February 2020 084126 STOREFRONT GLAZING 03.1 Manufacturer Vitro Architectural Glass Cheswick, PA (412) 820-8073 03.2 Wet Glazing, if used, shall exhibit such craftsmanship as to make it virtually non- distinguishable from Dry Glazing. Wawa reserves the right to reject wet glazing installations it deems to have poor quality workmanship. 03.3 Exterior Glazing in Non-Wind-Borne Debris Regions (A) Exterior storefront shall have wet or dry glazed, 1” tempered insulated low “E” clear glass as required on Drawings and per the following assembly. a. Outdoor Lite: Starphire ultra-clear glass with a second-surface Solarban 60 solar control, low-e coating; Indoor Lite: Starphire ultra-clear glass, to achieve the following performance: b. Glazing shall deliver visible light transmittance of 74%, a solar heat gain coefficient of 0.41, a light to solar gain ratio of 1.80 and a U-Value of .27. c. Wet Glazing, if used, shall exhibit such craftsmanship so as to make it virtually non-distinguishable from Dry Glazing. Wawa reserves the right to reject wet glazing installations it deems to have poor quality workmanship. (B) Exterior storefront Clerestory glazing (above 9’-0”) shall have 1” tempered insulated low “E” tinted glass as required on Drawings and per the following assembly. a. Outdoor Lite: Graylite II; Indoor Lite: Solarban 70 (3) clear glass, to achieve the following performance: b. Glazing shall deliver visible light transmittance of 6%, a solar heat gain coefficient of 0.11, a light to solar gain ratio of .55 and a U-Value of .26. 03.4 Exterior Glazing in Wind-Borne Debris Regions (140 mph or greater, or areas within 1 mile of the coast that are 130 mph or greater) (A) Exterior storefront shall have wet or dry glazed, 1-1/4” tempered insulated low “E” clear glazing as required on Drawings and per the following assembly. a. Outdoor Lite: Starphire ultra-clear glass with a second-surface Solarban 60 solar control, low-e coating; Indoor Lite: Starphire ultra-clear glass, to achieve the following performance: b. Glazing shall deliver visible light transmittance of 74%, a solar heat gain coefficient of 0.41, a light to solar gain ratio of 1.80 and a U-Value of .27 (summer). c. Indoor Lite Laminate shall be 6mmStarphire_090PVB_6mmStarphire Interlayer. (B) Exterior storefront Clerestory glazing (above 9’-0”) shall have 1-1/4” tempered insulated low “E” tinted glazing as required on Drawings and per the following assembly. a. Outdoor Lite: Graylite II; Indoor Lite: Solarban 70 (3) clear glass, to achieve the following performance: b. Glazing shall deliver visible light transmittance of 6%, a solar heat gain coefficient of 0.11, a light to solar gain ratio of .55 and a U -Value of .26 (summer). c. Indoor Lite Laminate shall be 6mmStarphire_090PVB_6mmStarphire Interlayer. SECTION 084126 STOREFRONT GLAZING 084126-2 February 2020 03.5 Interior Glazing (A) Interior storefront (between Store and Vestibule) shall have ¼” safety glazing quality labeled tempered glass. All frames to be clear anodized. 03.6 Exterior Insulated Panels: Overall thickness 1". Verify with Drawings the type of filler panel to be used. (A) Remodels: Thermolite insulated panel with corregated PolyAllomer stabilizers. Manufacturer Laminators Incorporated 3255 Souderton Pike Hatfield, PA 19440-1731 Phone: 800-523-2347 Website: http://www.omegapanels.com (B) New Stores: Spandrel Glass at building exterior: a. Outdoor Lite: ¼” clear HS glass; Indoor lite: ¼” clear HS glass with V905 “subdued bronze” ceramic frit on the #4 surface, and ½” air space to make 1” panel for Non-Wind-Borne Debris Regions and 1-1/4” panel for Wind-Borne Debris Regions. U-Value (summer) = 0.49. b. Indoor Lite Laminate shall be .090PVB Interlayer. Manufacturer Viracon, Inc. Owatonna, MN Phone: 800-533-2080 Alternate Manufacturer Oldcastle Glass 1-866-653-2278 Color: Lava END OF SECTION 084126 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-1 February 2020 08700-01 HARDWARE 01.1 Hardware schedules are to be submitted in the format provided by the Door & Hardware Institute. 01.2 General: Provide aluminum handicap accessible thresholds for all exterior hollow metal doors, except exterior Cold Delivery, Meter Room and Exterior Storage. Hardware to conform to all state and local handicap code specifications. Interior hinged door s shall have a maximum opening force of five (5) pounds. Fire doors and exterior hinged d oors shall have a minimum opening force allowable by fire and panic. All doors required to be accessible will not require light grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. All hardware for Kawneer aluminum doors shall be supplied by the door manufacturer including aluminum handicap accessible thresholds. Add door stops at exterior Vestibule `doors that open against storefront. 01.3 All required hardware to be furnished by GC. The intent of this specification is to be used as a guideline estimating and establishing a standard of quality. It does not relieve the Contractor from furnishing all materials that may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work. 01.4 Hardware numbers specified herein are taken from the cat alogs of the following manufacturers: Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes Continuous Hinges Hager Hinge Co. (HA) Stanley, Pemko, McKinney Hinges Hager Hinge Co.(HA) Stanley, McKinney Electric Strikes Von Duprin (VO) HES Locks/Latches Schlage Lock Co.(SC) No Substitution Push Button Locks Simplex (SI) No Substitution Cylinders Schlage Lock Co. (SC) No Substitution Exit Devices (not D1) Von Duprin (VO) No Substitution Exit Device (D1) Corbin Russwin (CR) No Substitution Closers LCN (LC) No Substitution Push/Pulls Hager Hinge Co. (HA) Ives, Rockwood, Burns Kick/Armor Plates Hager Hinge Co. (HA) Ives, Rockwood, Burns Overhead Stops Rixson (RX) Glynn Johnson Stops/Silencers Hager Hinge Co. (HA) Ives, Rockwood, Burns Thresholds National Guard (NA) Pemko Weatherstripping National Guard (NA) Pemko 01.5 Butt hinges shall be as specified with ball or oilite bearings. For out swinging doors with locks, furnish N.R.P. (non-removable pin) hinges. 01.6 Closers with "CUSH" type arms shall have backcheck set to slow the door opening cycle from 75 degrees to full open/stop position. Closers on exterior doors shall be installed with thru-bolts. 01.7 Thresholds shall be neatly coped around frame and caulked. All exterior doors shall be furnished with weatherstripping type NGP120NA. 01.8 Keying: All locks and cylinders will be Full Size Interchangeable Core type and will be furnished with temporary construction cores during the construction period. All permanent cores will be furnished keyed alike. The construction cores will be removed using a construction control key when the store is to be turned over to Facilities and replaced with the permanent cores using a permanent core control key. SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-2 February 2020 01.9 Hardware Supplier William B. McAuliffe III, AHC McAuliffe & Sons, Inc. 225 W. Germantown Pike Plymouth Meeting, PA 19462 Phone: 610-825-3001 08700-02 SCHEDULE 02.1 The following schedule lists door opening numbers by identifying their location. As there are several different store layouts, you may find all opening descriptions do not apply to every store. 02.2 Aluminum Entrance & Vestibule Doors: All hardware supplied with the doors by the manufacturer except the lock cylinders (See "Vestibule and Storefront Glazing"). Provide floor mounted door stops for doors opening against storefront glazing. 02.3 Hardware Schedule HW3 1 SGL DOOR “W” RETAIL AREA TO DELIVERY VESTIBULE TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” WD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** ¼” CLEAR WIRE GLASS *** *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 CONTINOUS HINGE 780-112HD X 79” CLR HA H3 1 PUSH PLATE 30S 8 x 16 US32D HA F1 1 DOOR PULL 33E 4 x 16 US32D HA F2 1 CLOSER 1461 H/PA AL LC C2 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 36” x 34” US32D HA F14 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 36” x 35” US32D HA F15 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 HW3.1 1 SGL DOOR “W1.1” FOOD SERVICE TO/FROM DELIVERY/STAGING 1 SGL DOOR “W1.2” COFFEE AREA TO/FROM WASH ROOM 1 SGL DOOR “W1” COFFEE AREA TO/FROM WASH ROOM TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” WD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** DOUBLE ACTING DOOR *** *** WIRELITE NT DIAMOND CLEAR FACTORY INSTALLED GLASS *** *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 PIVOT SET 7255 SP28 IV P1 2 PUSH PLATES 30S 8 x 16 US32D HA F1 1 DOOR PULL 7N US26D HA F3 1 CLOSER 6033 BUMP AL LC C7 2 PROTECTION PLATES 190S 39” X 34” US32D HA F17 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-3 February 2020 HW3.2 1 SGL DOOR “W2” RESTROOM HALLWAY TO DELIVERY/STAGING TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” WD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** MICROPANE T.M. FACTORY INSTALLED GLASS *** *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD X 79” ½ WS CLR HA H3 1 DEADBOLT B680 626 SC L4 1 PUSH PLATE 30S 8 x 16 US32D HA F1 1 DOOR PULL 33E 4 x 16 US32D HA F2 1 CLOSER 1461 H/PA AL LC C2 1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 39” x 34” US32D HA F17 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 39” X 35” US32D HA F18 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 HW3.5 1 SGL DOOR “W5” RETAIL AREA FROM ASSOCIATE TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” WD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** JAMB EXTENSION ON RETAIL SIDE FOR STONE *** *** MICROPANE T.M. FACTORY INSTALLED GLASS *** *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD X 79” ½ WS CLR HA H3 1 PUSH PLATE 30S 8 x 16 US32D HA F1 1 DOOR PULL 33E 4 x 16 US32D HA F2 1 CLOSER 1461 H/PA AL LC C2 1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” x 34” US32D HA F10 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” x 35” US32D HA F11 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 HW3.6 1 SGL DOOR “W3” RETAIL AREA TO DELIVERY VESTIBULE 1 SGL DOOR “W6” RETAIL AREA FROM FOOD SERVICE TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” WD W/4” X 25” VISIN PANEL X HMF *** WIRELITE NT DIAMOND CLEAR FACTORY INSTALLED GLASS *** *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD X 79” ½ WS CLR HA H3 1 COMBINATION LOCK LR1021-S-26D-41 (W3) 626 SI L5 1 COMBINATION LOCK LL1021-S-26D-41 (W6) 626 SI L6 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 ICX 626 SC A12 1 CLOSER 1461 H/PA AL LC C2 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 36” x 34” US32D HA F14 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 36” X 35” US32D HA F15 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-4 February 2020 HW3.7 1 SGL DOOR “W7” RETAIL TO DELIVERY VESTIBULE 1 SGL DOOR “W8” RETAIL TO BACKROOM TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” WD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** MICROPANE T.M. FACTORY INSTALLED GLASS *** *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 79” ½ WS CLR HA H3 1 PUSH PLATE 30S 8 x 16 US32D HA F1 1 DOOR PULL 30S 4 x 16 US32D HA F2 1 CLOSER 1461 H/PA AL LC C2 1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 39” x 34” US32D HA F17 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 39” x 35” US32D HA F18 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 HW5.2 1 SGL DOOR “T4” TRASH COMPOUND FROM DELIVERY/STAGING TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” HMD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF 3/4 HOUR “C” LABEL *** LOPRO COMPLETE FIRE RATED VISION PANEL *** *** FIRELITE NT GLASS & GLAZING *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 83” CLR HA H1 1 LOCKSET AL80TD SAT ICX 626 SC L10 1 CLOSER 1461 CUSH TBSRT AL LC C1 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 36” x 34” US32D HA F14 1 DOOR SWEEP 102 VA x 36” NA W1 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 36” + 2 x 84” NA W3 1 SADDLE THERESHOLD 410 x 36” AL NA T4 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW5.3 1 SGL DOOR “T5” EXTERIOR FROM STAGING TYPE “C” 3’-6” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” HMD X HMF W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL *** STORMPRO-HR HURRICANE RATED VISION LITE *** *** 1/2" CLEAR LAMAINATED GLAZING INCLUDED *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 83” CLR HA H1 1 ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 24VDC FSE US32D VO G2 1 LOCKSET AL80TD SAT ICX 626 SC L10 1 CLOSER 1461 HCUSH TBSRT AL LC C3 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 36” X 40” US32D HA F19 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 42” + 2 x 84” NA W8 1 DOOR SWEEP 102 VA x 42” NA W9 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 410 x 42” AL NA T8 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-5 February 2020 HW5.5 1 SGL DOOR “T2” EXTERIOR FROM STAGING TYPE “C” 4’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” HMD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** STORMPRO-HR HURRICANE RATED VISION LITE *** *** 1/2" CLEAR LAMINATED GLAZING INCLUDED *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 84” CLR HA H1 1 ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 24VDC FSE US32D VO G2 1 LOCKSET AL80TD SAT ICX 626 SC L10 1 CLOSER 1461 HCUSH TBSRT AL LC C3 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 35” x 46” US32D HA F13 1 DOOR SWEEP 102 VA x 48” NA W2 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 48” + 2 x 84” NA W4 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 410 x 48” AL NA T2 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW5.6 1 SGL DOOR “T6” RECYCLE AREA FROM BACKROOM TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” HMD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF 3/4" HOUR “C” LABEL *** LOPRO COMPLETE FIRE RATED VISION PANEL *** *** FIRELITE NT GLASS & GLAZING *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 83” CLR HA H1 1 LOCKSET AL80TD SAT ICX 626 SC L10 1 CLOSER 1461 CUSH TBSRT AL LC C1 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 36” x 34” US32D HA F14 1 DOOR SWEEP 102 VA x 36” NA W1 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 36” + 2 x 84” NA W3 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 410 x 36” AL NA T4 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW7 1 SGL DOOR “PT” RESTROOM HALLWAY/VESTIBULE TO MEN/WOMEN TYPE “B” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” FLUSH WD X HMF *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112 HD x 79” ½ WS CLR HA H3 1 DOOR PULL 33E 4 x 16 US32D HA F2 1 PROTECTION PLATE 194S 24” x 24” CSK US32D HA F5 1 CLOSER 4011 REG AL LC C6 1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” x 34” US32D HA F10 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” x 35” US32D HA F11 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-6 February 2020 HW8 1 PAIR DOORS “H” EXTERIOR FROM WATER SERVICE ROOM TYPE “B/F” 2@3’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” FLUSH HMD X HMF *** OVERLAPPING ASTRAGAL ON ACTIVE LEAF *** *** 18” X 12” PLSL SECURITY LOUVER W/INSECT SCREEN *** *** LOCATE IN INACTIVE ONLY *** 2 CONTINUOUS HINGES 780-112 HD x 83” CLR HA H1 2 FLUSH BOLTS 282D MS 12” US26D HA FB1 1 DEADLOCK B660T ICX 626 SC L11 1 DOOR PULL 7N US26D HA F3 2 OVERHEAD HOLDERS 8-326 630 RX S10 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 72” + 2 x 84” NA W6 1 HALF SADDLE 355 x 322 x 76” AL NA T7 1 STOP STRIP 4 N x 72” NA T7.1 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW9 1 SGL DOOR “CO” EXTERIOR FROM WATER SERVICE ROOM TYPE “B” 3’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” FLUSH HMD X HMF 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112 HD x 83” CLR HA H1 1 DEADLOCK B660T ICX 626 SC L11 1 OVERHEAD HOLDER 8-326 630 RX S10 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 36” + 2 x 84” NA W3 1 HALF SADDLE 355 X 322 X 40” AL NA T5 1 STOP STRIP 4 N x 36” 626 NA T5.1 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW10 1 SGL DOOR “D1” EXTERIOR FROM DELIVERY VESTIBULE TYPE “C” 4’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” HMD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** STORMPRO-HR HURRICANE RATED VISION LITE *** *** 1/2" CLEAR LAMINATED GLAZING INCLUDED *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 83” ETW-4 CLR HA H6 1 RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX 626 SC A10 1 MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061 626 SC A13 1 EXIT DEVICE ED5200S x N9905 M61 630 CR E1 M107 W048 6P L4 1 CLOSER 1461 HCUSH TBSRT AL LC C3 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 35” x 46” US32D HA F13 1 DOOR SWEEP 102 VA x 48” NA W2 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 48” + 2 x 84” NA W4 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 410 x 48” AL NA T2 1 POWER SUPPLY BPS-12/24-1 SN M9 2 CYLINDER CORES 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-7 February 2020 HW10.1 1 SGL DOOR “D1” EXTERIOR FROM DELIVERY VESTIBULE TYPE “C” 4’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” HMD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF 3/4" HOUR “C” LABEL *** LOPRO COMPLETE FIRE RATED VISION PANEL *** *** FIRELITE NT GLASS & GLAZING *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 83” ETW-4 CLR HA H6 1 RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX 626 SC A10 1 MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061 ICX 626 SC A13 1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE ED5200SA x N9905 M61 630 CR E3 M107 W048 6P L4 1 CLOSER 1461 CUSH TBSRT AL LC C1 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 35” x 46” US32D HA F13 1 DOOR SWEEP 102 VA x 48” NA W2 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 48” + 2 x 84” NA W4 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 410 x 48” AL NA T2 1 POWER SUPPLY BPS-12/24-1 SN M9 2 CYLINDER CORES 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW11 1 SGL DOOR “TI” STAGING FROM DELIVERY/STAGING TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” HMD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** SAFE-WIRE DIAMOND CLEAR GLASS & GLAZING *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 79” CLR HA H2 1 DEADBOLT B680 626 SC L4 1 PASSAGE SET AL10S SAT 626 SC L7 1 CLOSER 1461 REG/PA DEL AL LC C5 1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” x 34” US32D HA F10 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” X 35” US32D HA F11 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 36” + 2 x 80” NA W7 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 410 X 36” AL NA T4 HW12 1 SGL DOOR “OF” RETAIL AREA TO OFFICE TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” WD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** JAMB EXTENSION ON RETAIL SIDE FOR STONE *** *** MICROPANE T.M. FACTORY INSTALLED GLASS *** *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 3 HINGES BB1279 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” USP HA H4 1 COMBINATION LOCK LR1021-S-26D-41 626 SI L5 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” X 34” US32D HA F10 3 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” X 35” US32D HA F11 1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 ICX 626 SC A12 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-8 February 2020 HW12.1 1 SGL DOOR “OF” ASSOCIATE TO OFFICE TYPE “C” 3’-0” X “6’-8” X 1-3/4” HMD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL *** MICROPANE T.M. ONE WAY VISION GLASS & GLAZING *** 3 HINGES BB1279 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” USP HA H4 1 COMBINATION LOCK LL1021-S-26D-41 626 SI L6 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” x 34” US32D HA F10 1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 ICX 626 SC A12 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW13 1 SGL DOOR “EL” WASH ROOM FROM ELECTRICAL ROOM TYPE “C” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” HMD W/4” X 25” VISION PANEL X HMF *** SAFE-WIRE DIAMOND CLEAR GLASS & GLAZING *** 3 HINGES BB1279 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” USP HA H4 1 EXIT DEVICE 22EO SP28 VO E2 1 EXIT TRIM LLP1020-S-26D-41 626 SI E2.1 LRP1020-S-26D-41 1 CLOSER 1461 REG/PA AL LC C4 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 327 x 36” AL NA T6 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 ICX 626 SC A12 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW15.2 1 SGL DOOR “AP3” BACKROOM TO ABOVE RETAIL WALK-IN/FS WALK-IN TYPE “17” 3’-0” X 2’-0” ACCESS PANEL *** LOCATED ABOVE FS WALK-IN & RETAIL WALK0IN *** 1 ACCESS PANEL BNT-C 36 x 24 PRIMED BD M8 HW17 1 PAIR DOORS “TC” EXTERIOR FROM TRASH COMPOUND TYPE “B” 2@ 3’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” FLUSH HMD X HMF W/4” HEAD *** OVERLAPPING STEEL ASTRAGAL *** 2 CONTINUOUS HINGES 780-112HD x 83” CLR HA H1 2 FLUSH BOLTS 282D MS 12” US26D HA FB1 1 DOOR PULL 7N US26D HA F3 1 COMBINATION LOCK LL1021-S-26D-41 626 SI L6 2 OVERHEAD HOLDER 8-326 630 RX S10 1 GASKETING 120 NA 1 x 72” + 2 x 84” NA T3 1 PANIC THRESHOLD 804 V x 76” AL NA T3 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 ICX 626 SC A12 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-9 February 2020 HW17.3 1 SGL DOOR “TC3” EXTERIOR FROM TRASH COMPOUND TYPE “B” 3’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” FLUSH WD X HMF *** ACROVYN NENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 83” ½ CLR HA H1 1 COMBINATION LOCK LL1021-S-26D-41 626 SI L6 1 OVERHEAD HOLDER 8-526 630 RX S13 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 ICX 626 SC A12 3 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW18.1 1 SGL DOOR “J1” RESTROOM HALLWAY TO JANITOR TYPE “B” 3’-0” X 6’-8” X 1-3/4” FLUSH WD X HMF *** ACROVYN VENEERED WOOD DOOR *** 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE 780-112HD x 79” ½ WS CLR HA H3 1 LOCKSET AL53TD SAT ICX 626 SC L12 1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1 1 OVERHEAD HOLDER 8-326 630 RX S10 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 16” X 34” US32D HA F10 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D GREY HA M10 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW19 1 SGL DOOR “AP5” ROOF FROM REAR OF TOWER TYPE “HAT” 36” X 48” EXTERIOR ACCESS DOOR *** LOCATED IN REAR OF TOWER *** *** LOCKING HANDLE FURNISHED WITH DOOR *** 1 ACCESS PANEL XTL3648 36 x 48 PRIMED BD M5 1 CRASH STOP CS115-25 US26D IV S2 1 DRIP CAP 16 A x 40” NA W5 HW20 PAIR (2) DOORS “V1” EXTERIOR FROM FRONT VESTIBULE PAIR (2) DOORS “V1” EXTERIOR FROM REAR VESTIBULE TYPE “A” 2@ 3’-0” X 7’-0” X 1-3/4” FULL GLASS ALD X ALF *** BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER *** 1 MORTISE CYLINDERS 20-062 ICX 626 SC A11 1 CYLINDER CORES 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 HW21 1 SGL DOOR “AP4” REAR ENTRY TO SOFFIT ABOVE TYPE “18” 30” X 24” EXTERIOR ACCESS DOOR *** LOCATED IN SOFFIT ABOVE REAR ENTRANCE *** 1 ACCESS PANEL BHS-M 30 X 24 PRIMED BD M7 1 MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061 ICX 626 SC A13 1 CYLINDER CORE 23-030 MK C145 KEYWAY 626 SC A14 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE 08700-10 February 2020 HW22 1 DOOR MISC 1 CUT CONTROL KEY 48-003 C145 KEYWAY SC M1 2 CONTROL KEY 48-056-ICX SC M2 3 CONSTRUCTION KEY 48-101-ICX SC M3 3 CUT KEY 48-009 C145 KEYWAY SC M4 02.4 Sizes: Verify all sizes of doors with Drawings. Report any discrepancies to Wawa's Project Manager. END OF SECTION 08700 SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING July, 2011 092216 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load- bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized] zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING July, 2011 092216 - 2 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [5] times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: [Postinstalled, expansion anchor]. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [10] times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, [in size indicated on Drawings] E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: [Asymmetrical or hat shaped]. G. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; [640-C] Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING July, 2011 092216 - 3 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The); [VertiTrack VTD] Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). C. Firestop Track: As specified in Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73- mm-) thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings 2. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: [Asymmetrical or hat shaped] H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING July, 2011 092216 - 4 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare- steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59- mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide[ one of] the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. 3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING July, 2011 092216 - 5 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within [performance limits established by referenced installation standards] 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems [with hangers used for support] E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING July, 2011 092216 - 6 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. C. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. D. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced [24 inches (610 mm)] o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 092216 09240-1 August 26, 2016 Section 09240 - Senergy Sentry Stucco System A. WIND LOAD 1. Maximum deflection not to exceed L/360 under positive or negative design loads. 2. Refer to structural plans for design wind loads in conformance with local code requirements. B. SUBSTRATE SYSTEMS 1. Acceptable substrates are cement-boards conforming with ASTM C1325 (Type A-exterior); gypsum sheathing (ASTM C79/C1396); Exposure I or exterior plywood (Grade C/D or better); RE: Section 09250 2. For remodels or remedial work concerning existing conditions. Painted and otherwise coated surfaces shall be inspected and prepared as approved by BASF Wall Systems before application. The applicator shall verify that the proposed substrate is acceptable prior to the Senergy Sentry Stucco System installation.. 3. Refer to Senergy’s Accepted Stucco Wall Systems Lath and Trim Accessories bulletin for more detailed information regarding trim requirements, etc. C. MOISTURE CONTROL 1. Prevent the accumulation of water behind the Senergy Sentry Stucco System, either by condensation or leakage through the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly. a. Provide flashing to direct water to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly, including above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills, at roof/wall intersections, decks, abutments of lower walls with higher walls, above projecting features, at the base of the wall and anywhere else required by local code or design at the time of installation. b. The water-resistive barrier must be installed over the substrate according to manufacturer’s specifications and applicable building code requirements. c. Openings must be flashed prior to window/door, etc. installation to provide moisture protection of the building frame and interior. Refer to Senergy’s Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall System bulletin. d. Air leakage prevention: provide continuity of air barrier system at foundation, roof, windows, doors and other penetrations through the system with connecting and compatible air barrier components to minimize condensation and leakage caused by air movement. D. COLOR SELECTION 1. Refer to plans for color application legend and respective locations a. #3085 Meringue, finish textured Sahara b. #354 Stark white, finish Fine E. GRADE CONDITION 1. Senergy Sentry Stucco System is not intended for use below grade or on surfaces subject to continuous or intermittent immersion in water or hydrostatic pressure. Ensure a minimum 4” (101.6 mm) clearance above grade or as required by code, a minimum 2” (50.8 mm) clearance above finished grade (sidewalk/concrete flatwork). F. TRIM, PROJECTING ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES 1. Minimum slope for all projections shall be 1:2 2. Senergy Wall Systems were designed and tested to be applied to vertical surfaces. As the slope of the wall system application decreases, the chance for premature deterioration of any wall system increases. 3. Low sloping conditions are subject to more extreme heat. Low sloped areas are known to produce an increase in wall surface temperature which can lead to accelerated weathering of the low sloped surface. G. SYSTEM JOINTS 1. Expansion joints in the system are required at building expansion joints, at prefabricated panel joints, floor lines of wood frame construction, where substrates change and where structural movement is anticipated. Detail specific locations in construction drawings. 2. Control joints are recommended at a minimum of every 13 m2 (144 ft2) of wall surface area and where specified by the design professional. The maximum uncontrolled length or width is 5.5 lineal meters (18 lineal feet) and a maximum uncontrolled length to width ratio of 2 1/2: 1. Detail specific locations in construction drawings. 3. Sealant joints are required at all penetrations through the Senergy Sentry Stucco System (windows, doors, lighting fixtures, electrical outlets, hose bibs, dryer vents, etc.) Refer to Senergy Sentry Stucco System typical details. 4. It is the sole responsibility of the project design team, including the architect, engineer, etc., to ultimately determine specific expansion and control joint placement, width and design. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Consult BASF Wall Systems’ Technical Services Department for specific recommendations concerning all other applications. Consult the Senergy website, www.senergy.basf.com, for additional information about products and systems and for updated literature. Also, for specifications that include metal plaster base, i.e. metal lath or wire lath, visit the Senergy website. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Refer to all project drawings and other sections of this specification to determine the type and extent of work therein affecting the work of this section, whether or not such work is specifically mentioned herein. B. System Description: Composite wall system consisting of Senergy STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX, and Senergy FINISH COAT. C. Senergy products are listed in this specification to establish a standard of quality. Any substitutions to this specification shall be submitted to and receive approval from the Architect at least 10 days before bidding. Proof of equality shall be borne by the submitter. D. The system type shall be Senergy Sentry Stucco System as manufactured by BASF Corporation – Wall Systems, Jacksonville, Florida, herein after referred to as “BASF Wall Systems”. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 Cold-formed metal framing B. Section 07270 Air barriers C. Section 07620 Sheet metal flashing and trim D. Section 07920 Joint protection E. Section 09220 Supports for plaster and gypsum board F. Section 092216 Non-structural metal framing G. Section 09250 Gypsum board 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement B. ASTM C926 Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster C. ASTM C1063 Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster D. ASTM C847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath E. ASTM C933 Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath F. ASTM C1032 Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base G. ASTM D226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing H. ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds I. ICC-ES AC11 Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings J. ESR-1064 ICC Evaluation Service, Inc., ES Report™(STUCCOBASE™/ STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01002 B. Product Data: Provide data on Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and durability. C. Code Compliance: Provide manufacturer’s applicable code compliance report. D. Samples: Submit 8” [ x ] 8” size samples of Senergy Sentry Stucco System illustrating Finish Coat color and texture range. E. Certificate: System manufacturer’s approval of applicator. F. Sealant: Sealant manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with ASTM C1382. G. System manufacturer’s typical details, system design guide and related product literature which indicate preparation required, storage, installation techniques, jointing requirements and finishing techniques. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: More than 10 years in the cement plaster stucco industry, with more than 1000 completed cement plaster stucco projects. B. Applicator: Approved by BASF Wall Systems in performing work of this section. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for cement plaster stucco. D. Field Samples (If required by WAWA Construction manager) 1. Construct one field sample panel for each color and texture, 24” x 24” in size of system materials illustrating method of attachment, surface Finish color and texture. 2. Prepare each sample panel using the same tools and techniques to be used for the actual application. 3. Locate sample panel where directed. 4. Accepted sample panel [may] remain as part of the work. RE: Construction manager/ final determination 5. Field samples shall be comprised of all wall assembly components including substrate, water-resistive barrier, plaster trim accessories, plaster base, STUCCOBASETM/STUCCOBASETM PREMIX, FINISH COAT, and typical sealant/flashing conditions 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials in original unopened packages with manufacturer’s labels intact. B. Protect Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage. C. Store Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials in cool, dry place protected from exposure to moisture and freezing. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not apply Senergy Sentry Stucco System in ambient temperatures below 4°C/40°F. B. Do not apply Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials to frozen surfaces. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate and schedule installation of Senergy Sentry Stucco System with related work of other sections. B. Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing, and joint sealers to prevent water infiltration behind the system. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide BASF Wall Systems five-year limited materials warranty for Senergy Sentry Stucco Wall System installations. B. Comply with BASF Wall Systems notification procedures to assure qualification for warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS All components of the Senergy Sentry Stucco System shall be obtained from the system manufacturer or through an authorized distributor. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Expanded metal lath (See also, Senergy Lath & Trim Accessories System Support Bulletin): The lath shall comply with ASTM C847. Furring and self-furring requirements shall be as set forth for wire-fabric lath. Minimum weight is 1.85 kg/m2 (3.4 lb/yd2). Other acceptable welded laths shall comply with ASTM C933 and other acceptable woven laths shall comply with ASTM C1032. B. Plaster Sand: Must be clean and free from deleterious amounts of loam, clay, silt, soluble salts and organic matter. Sampling and testing must comply with ASTM C897. Plaster sand must be graded within the following limits: Percent retained by weight Retained on ± 2 Percent U.S. Standard Sieve Min. Max. No. 4 - 0 No. 8 0 10 No. 16 10 40 No. 30 30 65 No. 50 70 90 No. 100 95 100] C. Water: clean and potable without foreign matter. D. STUCCOBASE™ 1. STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX: Factory-blended stucco mixture of Portland cement, reinforcing fibers, sand, and proprietary ingredients; supplied by BASF Wall Systems for scratch and brown coats. 2. SENERGY STUCCOBASE™: Factory-blended stucco mixture of Portland cement, reinforcing fibers, and proprietary ingredients; supplied by BASF Wall Systems for scratch and brown coats E. Senergy REINFORCING MESH: Balanced, open weave glass fiber reinforcing mesh; twisted multi-end strands treated for compatibility with Senergy System components. 1. INTERMEDIATE 6: standard/medium weight, 6 oz. F. Senergy FINISH COAT: [SENERFLEX] [SILCOAT] [SENERLASTIC] [SENERLASTIC PLUS] and [STUCCOPRIME] Finish, 100% acrylic polymer based finish; air cured, compatible with Base Coat; Finish color; #3085 Meringue, finish textured Sahara as scheduled on plans; #354 Stark white, finish texture Fine [used at trim] as scheduled; manufactured by BASF Wall Systems. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Water-Resistive Barrier: a. Protecto Wrap PW 100/40 Air Vapor barrier and flashing. Protecto Wrap Company 1955 S. Cherokee St. Denver, Co. 80223. Tel. 1 (800) 759-9727. www.Protecto wrap.com 1. Water-resistive barrier.(polymeric water-resistive barrier) - Tyvek StuccoWrap No Substitutions 2. In accordance with the 2006 IRC/IBC, wood based sheathings require a water-resistive vapor permeable barrier with a performance at least equivalent to 2 layers. B. Trim: Casing bead, corner bead, expansion joint and weep screed accessories shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1063. Accessories shall be: vinyl, meeting ASTM D1784; galvanized, meeting ASTM A525 and ASTM A526; or zinc, meeting ASTM B69. Vinyl or zinc accessories are recommended where highly humid or salt-laden service conditions exist. Refer to Senergy’s Stucco Wall Systems Lath and Trim Accessories bulletin for additional information. 1. Foundation weep screed: Beveled edge designed to terminate finish system and drain internal moisture. 2. Casing bead: Square edge style. 3. Corner bead: Small radius nose style. 4. Control joints: W-shaped accordion profile style. 5. Expansion joints: [Two piece type slip-joint design] or [pair of casing beads spaced for application of sealant bead] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Division 2. B. Walls 1. Substrates a. As specified in section 09250 and recommendations in conjunction with manufacture requirements. b. Sheathings must be securely fastened per applicable building code requirements and manufacturers recommendations. c. When applying direct to concrete/unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C926, verify concrete/unit masonry is free of dust, dirt, grease, oils, laitance, efflorescence, biological residue, existing paint or coatings, curing compounds, form release agents, or any other contaminants which might affect the bond of SENERGY STUCCOBASE™/STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX. Masonry walls should be properly cured to full load bearing capacity, laid true, and with joints tooled. Properly prepared concrete will have an open texture similar to fine grit sandpaper. 2. Flashings a. All flashings are by others and must be installed in accordance with specific manufacturer’s requirements. Where appropriate, end-dams must be provided. b. Openings must be flashed prior to window/door, HVAC, etc. installation. Refer to Senergy’s Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall Systems bulletin for further guidance. c. Windows and openings shall be flashed according to design and building code requirements. d. Individual windows that are ganged to make multiple units require continuous head flashing and/or the joints between the units must be fully sealed. 3. Water-Resistive Barrier (If installed by others, examine installation at this time) a. Verify that the water-resistive barrier is installed over the substrate per applicable building code requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and wrapped into rough openings in accordance with Senergy’s Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall System bulletin prior to application of the Senergy Stucco Wall System. b. The water-resistive barrier shall be free of any damage such as holes or breaks, and must be applied to all surfaces to receive the Senergy Stucco Wall System. 4. Roof Verify that all roof flashings have been installed in accordance with the guidelines set by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA). 5. Kick-out flashing Kick-out flashing must be installed where required. The kick-out flashing must be leak-proof and angled (min 100˚ ) to allow for proper drainage and water diversion. Refer to Senergy’s Sentry Stucco System Typical Details. C. Do not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect all surrounding areas and surfaces from damage and staining during application of Senergy Sentry Stucco System. B. Protect finished work at end of each day to prevent water penetration. 3.03 MIXING General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close containers when not in use. Prepare in a container and/or mixer that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do not use a container and/or mixer which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product. Clean tools and equipment with water immediately after use. Dried material can only be removed mechanically. A. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier 1. Tyvek Stucco Wrap B. Stucco Base Coat: STUCCOBASE™ 1. Use mixer which is clean and free of foreign substances. 2. Add 18.9–22.7 liters (5–6 gallons) of clean potable water to mixer per one bag of STUCCOBASE™. 3. Add one bag of STUCCOBASE™. 4. Add one half 45.4–54.4 kg (100–120 lbs) of the required plaster sand (ASTM C144 or ASTM C897). 5. Mix for 3–4 minutes at normal mixing speed while adding the remainder 45.4–54.4 kg (100–120 lbs) of the plaster sand. Allow material to set for 2–4 minutes, then remix adding water to achieve desired consistency. Note: Continuous mixing may cause excessive air entrainment. C. Stucco Base Coat: STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX 1. Use mixer which is clean and free of foreign substances. 2. Add 7.6–9.5 liters (2–2.5 gallons) of clean potable water to mixer. 3. Slowly add one bag of STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX. 4. Mix for one minute at normal mixing speed. Allow material to set for 2–4 minutes with mixing blades at rest. Then re-mix, adding water to achieve desired consistency. Desired consistency varies with type of application (trowel or gun), substrate (paper-backed lath or block) and whether the stucco is applied to a wall or a ceiling. Note: Continuous mixing may cause excessive air entrainment. D. Senergy FINISH COAT 1. Thoroughly mix the factory-prepared material with a clean paddle and drill until thoroughly blended. 2. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. 3. Additives are not permitted. 4. Close container when not in use. 5. Clean tools and equipment with water immediately after use. Dried material can only be removed mechanically.. 3.04 APPLICATION General: Apply Senergy Sentry Stucco System materials in accordance with all Sentry Stucco System typical details, system specification and related product literature. A. Apply STUCCOBOND substrate bonding agent as per specifications to concrete/unit masonry that will receive SENERGY STUCCOBASE™/STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX applied directly in accordance with ASTM C926 mixture within 12 hours.] B. Water-resistive barrier (Not required on concrete/unit masonry substrates surfaces to receive the STUCCOBASE™/STUCCOBASE™ PREMIX applied direct in accordance with ASTM C926). 1. Install according to the specific water-resistive barrier manufacturer’s specifications and all applicable building code requirements. 2. The water-resistive barrier shall be free of any damage such as holes or breaks, and must be applied to all surfaces to receive the Senergy Sentry Stucco Wall System. 3. Wrap the water-resistive barrier into rough openings (doors, windows, etc.) in accordance with Senergy’s Secondary Moisture Protection Barrier Guidelines for Senergy Stucco Wall System bulletin to increase the level of moisture protection to the building frame and interior. 4. Coordinate work with other trades to assure proper sequencing, detailing and installation of materials. C. Trim junction 1. When two pieces of trim abut: a. Set intersection of trim in a minimum 100 mm (4”) bed of acceptable trim sealant. b. Allow 3–5 mm (1/8”–3/16”) gap between the abutting trim pieces. Do not overlap trim. c. Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. True expansion joints must be fastened to the structural substrate. 2. When two or more pieces of trim intersect: a. The vertical trim piece shall be continuous with all horizontal pieces. b. Miter all corners at intersections of trim. c. Set intersection of trim in a minimum 100 mm (4”) bed of acceptable trim sealant. d. Allow 3–5 mm (1/8”– 3/16”) gap between the intersecting trim pieces. Do not overlap the trim e. Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and ASTM C1063. 3. Application over open framing: a. The weather-resistive membrane is placed over open wood or steel framing spaced a maximum of 610 mm (24”) on center. Wall bracing, in accordance with the applicable code, shall be installed. Square wall corners and parapet corners, metal corner reinforcement are optional. E. STUCCOBASETM exterior wall coating (ICC-ES AC-11) over 3.4# Self-Furring Galvanized Metal Lath: 1. Apply mixed SENERGY STUCCOBASETM to approved substrate by hand toweling or machine spraying in one or two coats to a minimum thickness of 9.5 mm (3/8”) and a maximum thickness (2 coats) of 1/2”. If applied in a two coat scratch brown application, the thickness is a minimum 3/16–1/4” per coat for a total thickness of 1/2”. Ensure the first coat is sufficiently rigid to resist cracking prior to application and leveling of the second coat. For localized areas, a slightly thicker application is acceptable. Level surface using rod or darby. Trowel SENERGY STUCCOBASE™ or other cementitious exterior wall coating into trim to seat trim. The lath shall be fully embedded in the coating and shall be completely covered. Note: Recommended method of cementitious exterior wall coating application is double back or scratch and brown. Use of tighter (less water) cementitious exterior wall coating mix in initial double back or scratch coat can ease stucco application. 2. After surface has sufficiently hardened, use sponge or hard rubber float as required to fill voids, holes or imperfections, leaving the surface ready to receive Senergy Finish. D. Metal Lath 1. The metal lath shall be applied with minimum 1/2" side laps and 1" end laps. 2. When end laps occur between supports, lace or wire tie the ends of the sheets with 0.0475" galvanized annealed steel wire. 3. Refer to ASTM C1063 for additional information. 4. Corrosion-resistant fasteners for lath attachment shall penetrate a minimum of 25 mm (1") into wood framing. 5. Apply the Senergy Stucco Wall System over steel framing [minimum No. 20 gauge, 0.0359" thick]. Lath is secured to framing using No.8-18, S-12, pan-head, self-tapping screws spaced a maximum of 6 inches vertical on center to studs. The screws shall penetrate framing at least 3/8". 3. Cure completed STUCCOBASETM by fog spraying with clean, potable water once or twice daily for 48 hours under normal conditions; fog spray more frequently if hot, dry conditions exist. 4. Allow SENERGY STUCCOBASETM to cure 6 days prior to primer or Finish Coat application. F. STUCCOBASETM or field mix exterior cement plaster conforming to ASTM C926 at a thickness of 3/4” to 7/8” over 3.4# Self-Furring Galvanized Metal Lath: 1. Apply mixed SENERGY STUCCOBASETM or field mix exterior cement plaster conforming to ASTM C926 to approved substrate by hand toweling or machine spraying in two coats to a minimum thickness of 9.5 mm (3/4”) and a maximum thickness of 7/8”. Apply in a two coat scratch brown application. The thickness is a minimum 3/8” per coat for a total thickness of 3/4” to 7/8”. Ensure the first coat is properly “scratched” and sufficiently rigid to resist cracking prior to application and leveling of the second or “brown” coat. Level surface using rod or darby. Trowel SENERGY STUCCOBASE™ or field mix Exterior Cement Plaster into trim to seat trim. The lath shall be fully embedded in the coating and shall be completely covered. G. FINISH COAT 1. SENERFLEX FINISH: [SAHARA] [FINE] - OR - SENERLASTIC FINISH: [SAHARA] [FINE] a. Apply FINISH directly to the dried base coat with a clean, stainless steel trowel. b. Apply and level FINISH during the same operation to minimum obtainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. c. Maintain a wet edge on FINISH by applying and texturing continually over the wall surface. d. Work FINISH to corners, joints or other natural breaks and do not allow material to set up within an uninterrupted wall area. e. Float FINISH to achieve final texture.] 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01004. B. Clean adjacent surfaces and remove excess material, droppings, and debris. 3.06 PROTECTION Protect finished work in compliance with general conditions. END SECTION 09240 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-1 March 2019 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior nonload-bearing steel stud partition framing 20 (30 mil) gage (designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load perpendicular to partition minimum). 2. Gypsum board. 3. Backer materials: Backer panels for wall tile and plastic wall panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Load-bearing steel stud exterior and interior wall framing 20 gage and heavier and ceiling joists. Cold formed deep leg track for interior nonload- bearing steel stud partitions. Metal stud header wall framing and bracing supported from roof structure. 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips, plywood, blocking, and fasteners attached to partition framing. 3. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. 4. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Installation of firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated partitions. 5. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish applied to gypsum board. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the test by these basic designations only. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C 475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C 840 - Application and Finishing Of Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C 1177 - Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 4. ASTM C 1178 - Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 5. ASTM C 1396 - Gypsum Board 6. ASTM C 1658 - Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. 7. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surfaces of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of light gage metal framing co mponents and gypsum wallboard with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. C. Store and protect metal framing with weatherproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. D. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-2 March 2019 manufacturer or supplier. E. Stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. Products used in the assembly shall carry a classification label from a testing laboratory acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: 1. CertainTeed Corp, Tampa, FL. (866) 427-2872. 2. Georgia-Pacific, Atlanta, GA. (800) 284-5347. 3. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC. (800) 628-4662. 4. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, IL. (800) 874-4968. B. Standard Gypsum Board: Sheetrock, ASTM C 1396; 1/2 inch and 5/8-inch-thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. Provide one of the following products: 1. ProRock by Certainteed. 2. ToughRock by Georgia-Pacific. 3. Gold Bond Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. 4. Sheetrock by United States Gypsum. C. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 or C 1658, 1/2-inch-thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges. Mold resistance of water-resistant gypsum board shall score a rating of not less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. 1. ProRoc M2Tech by Certainteed. 2. DensArmor Plus by Georgia-Pacific. 3. Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. 4. Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough by United States Gypsum. D. Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X; 5/8-inch-thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges; core material as required to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) assemblies indicated on Drawings. 1. ProRock Type X by Certainteed. 2. ToughRock Fireguard by Georgia-Pacific. 3. Gold Bond Fire Shield by National Gypsum. 4. Sheetrock Firecode X by United States Gypsum. E. Water- and Fire-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X; 5/8-inch-thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges, core material as required to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) assemblies indicated on Drawings. Mold resistance of water- and fire- resistant gypsum board shall score a rating of not less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. 1. Gold Bond Brand XP Fire-Shield C Gypsum Board, by National Gypsum. . 2. Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode “C” Core, by United States Gypsum. F. Impact Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, thickness shown, manufactured to produce greater SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-3 March 2019 resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels. 1. ProRoc Brand Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by CertainTeed. 2. DensArmor Plus Impact Resistant by Georgia-Pacific. 3. Hi-Abuse Brand Wallboard by National Gypsum. 4. Sheetrock Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard by United States Gypsum. G. Impact and Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, thickness shown, manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels and providing water resistant gypsum core with paperless facing and mold resistance with a rating of not less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. 1. DensArmor Plus Impact Resistant by Georgia Pacific. H. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X, 5/8” thick, gypsum wallboard manufactured to produce extra resistance to moisture and sagging. 1. ProRoc Brand Exterior Soffit Board by CertainTeed. 2. DensArmor Plus by Georgia-Pacific. 3. Gold Bond Brand Exterior Soffit Board by National Gypsum. 4. Type X Soffit Board by Temple Inland. 5. Sheetrock Brand Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board by United States Gypsum . I. Gypsum Board Fasteners: 1. Metal Framing: ASTM C 954 and C 1002, Type S -12 bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. a. One Layer 1/2 Inch: 1 inch. b. One Layer 5/8 Inch: 1-1/8 inch. c. Two Layers: 5/8 Inch: 1-7/8 inch. 2. Wood Furring: ASTM C 1002, 1-1/4-inch, Type W bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling steel screws. J. Gypsum Board Accessories: 1. Corner Beads: Sheetrock Brand No. 104 Dur-A-Bead galvanized steel corner bead by United States Gypsum. 2. Edge Trim: Galvanized steel casing. a. No. 200-B, L shape by United States Gypsum for tight abutment at edges. b. No. 200-A, J shape by United States Gypsum at other locations. 3. Control Joint Accessory Piece: a. No. 093 roll-formed zinc by ClarkDietrich. 4. Vertical Movement Joint Trim: a. No DRMZ-625-200 aluminum Z shape trim by Fry Reglet. 5. Adhesive: a. Commercial Adhesive complying with ASTM C 557. 6. Acoustical Insulation: a. Unfaced fiberglass batts specified in Section 07210. 7. Firestopping: a. Specified in Section 07840 for penetrations of fire-resistive rated gypsum board. 2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper tape. 2. Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. 3. Backer Panels: a. Glass-Mat Backer Material: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-4 March 2019 C. Joint Compound 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: a. Sheetrock Brand Ready-Mixed Lightweight All-Purpose Joint Compound with Dust Control, by United States Gypsum. b. ProForm Lite Ready-Mix Joint Compound with Dust-Tech by National Gypsum. 2. Exterior Applications: a. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound. b. Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. 3. Backer Panels: a. Glass-Mat Backer Materials: Use setting-type taping compound as recommended by backer panel manufacturer and that is rated 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 3274. 2.4 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD A. ASTM C 1396 and ASTM C 1177; water resistant gypsum core surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats; thickness shown on the Drawings, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut. Provide one of the following products: 1. Dens-Glass Gold Type ‘X’ gypsum sheathing as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific. 2. Gold Bond Brand 5/8” e2XP Fire Shield Type ‘X’ Gypsum Panel by Sheathing by National Gypsum. B. Sheathing Board Fasteners: ASTM C 954 and ASTM C 1002, 1 inch length for 1/2 inch sheathing board and 1-1/4 inch length for 5/8inch thick sheathing board, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion- resistant self-drilling steel screws. 2.5 BACKER MATERIALS A. Provide cementitious backing materials as follows where ind icated to receive cement board, cement backer board, or cementitious backer board. 1. Fiber Cement Backing Board: Hardibacker by James Hardie Building Products, Mission Viejo, CA (888) 542-7343. 2. Thickness as indicated. a. Hardibacker 250, 1/4". b. Hardibacker 500, 1/2". c. Durock Next Gen (used at exterior walls behind walk-in coolers and freezers and elsewhere as indicated in drawings): i. 5’ x 3’ x ½” Cement Board ii. 4’ x 8’ x ½” Cement Board d. Other as noted on Drawings. B. Glass-Mat Backer Materials: Provide glass-mat moisture resistant gypsum core backer materials complying with ASTM C 1178. Glass-Mat Backer Material shall score a rating of 10 when tested according to ASTM D 3273. Thickness as shown on the Drawings. Provide Type X where required as shown on Drawings. Provide one of the following products: 1. GlasRoc Tilebacker by Certainteed. 2. DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific. 3. GreenGlass Tile Backer by Temple-Inland. 4. Gold Bond e2XP Tile Backer by National Gypsum. PART 3 - EXECUTION SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-5 March 2019 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive Work. Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine panels to assure they are dry and free of moisture and mold damage as evidenced by discoloration, sagging, irregular shape, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination, a nd discoloration. C. Beginning of erection and installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door and window frames, sliding window, and overhead coiling door frames. B. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building accessory items installed within framing. 3.3 INSTALLATION - STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation and with further details and instruction by gypsum board manufacturer's written construction guidelines. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply, if nonavailable, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." 3.4 INSTALLATION - PARTITION FRAMING A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 754, GA- 216, and GA-600. B. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. D. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. E. Metal Stud Spacing: Unless otherwise noted, provide interior framing at maximum 24 inches on center. Provide spacing of 16 inches on center maximum for walls to receive ceram ic tile. F. Align stud web openings horizontally. G. Splice studs with minimum 8-inch nested lap, fasten each stud flange with minimum two screws. H. Construct corners using minimum three studs. I. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, maximum 2 inches from each side of openings. J. Place studs as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-6 March 2019 K. Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing C-shaped joists specified in Section 05400. L. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. M. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. N. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to building structure above. O. Maintain clearance under structural members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 1. Where indicated, construct partition to accommodate vertical deflection. 2. Install optional products specified in Part 2 above in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. a. Install clip with step bushing in center of slotted hole. b. Use a minimum of two fasteners per clip leg to connect clip to structure and partition framing. c. Attach clip to each stud by screwing through the center of each step bushing. P. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 2. Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bend at each end, fasten with minimum one screw per flange. 3. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to top runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. Q. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. R. Lateral Bracing for Metal Studs: 1. In metal stud partitions and bulkheads where length of metal studs is over 8 feet, install la teral bracing using one of the following methods: a. Install 1-1/2 inch cold-formed channel through stud web holes and screw attach in place with clip angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie together. b. Install optional products specified in Part 2 above in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. c. Install field-cut runner for solid bridging at each end of wall, adjacent to wall openings, and 10 feet on center maximum. Install 1-1/2-inch-wide, 20 (30 mil) gage strap bracing on both sides of stud. Fasten strap bracing to each solid bridging runner section with four screws. 2. Gypsum Board Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: a. Provide bracing at ceiling line or at mid-span of studs at areas without ceilings. 3. Wire Mesh Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: a. Stud Length Greater Than 8 Feet and Up To 10 Feet: Provide bracing at midpoint. b. Stud Length Greater Than 10 Feet and Up To 15 Feet: Provide bracing at third points. c. Stud Length Greater Than 15 Feet and Up To 20 Feet: Provide bracing at quarter points. S. Install braced framing of steel stud framing as indicated on Drawings. Use only screw attachments. T. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories and hardware. U. Framing Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-7 March 2019 schedule below, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. CONNECTION FASTENER Floor Track to Concrete ........................................................... 1 - Pin at 24 inches on center. Partition Stud to Floor Track .................................................... 1 - Screw each side at each flange. Stud Brace Web to Stud Web ................................................. 2 - Screws. Plates and Straps to Studs ...................................................... 2 - Screws. Stud Web to Stud Web ............................................................ 2 - Screws. Stud Brace Web to Attachment Angle ..................................... 2 - Screws. Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using clip Angles ................. 2 - Screws to stud and 2 - Screws to cold formed channel. Runner to Header .................................................................... 1 - Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum 6 inches from each end. V. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. W. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 3.5 INSTALLATION - FURRING A. Furring Channels: 1. Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, to masonry and concrete surfaces with hammer set or powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. 2. Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor with 2 fasteners in each wing. B. Wall Furring: 1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2. Space metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center. 3. Furring for Fire Rating: Install metal furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings, and to GA-600 requirements. 3.6 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions as specified on Drawings. Or specified in section 07210. 3.7 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C 840, GA-216, and GA-600. 1. Use water resistant gypsum board at wet areas including walls and ceiling in toilet rooms, janitor closets, and food prep areas as applicable and where shown. 2. Use fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 3. Use water- and fire-resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies where water resistant gypsum board is specified. 4. Use standard gypsum board at locations not indicated to be fire resistant or water-resistant type. B. Where applicable, install ceiling panels before the installation of wall panels. SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-8 March 2019 C. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction in accordance with ASTM C 840, with attachment to firm bearing surfaces over framing members. Do n ot align panel joints with edges of openings. D. Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with screws; apply second layer with screws, staggering joints with those of first layer. Use adhesive only to hold second layer until screwed in place. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. E. Treat cut edges, holes, fastener heads, and joints, including those at angle intersections, in water resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with specified joint compound. Tr eat prior to installation. F. Place gypsum panels over supporting framing members with panel ends aligning and parallel with framing members. Leave bottom edge spacing above floor in accordance with GA-216. G. Install fasteners spaced and located in accordance with GA-216 or ASTM C840. 3.8 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Install gypsum board sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, GA -216 and GA-600. B. Erect single layer gypsum board horizontally with attachment to firm bearing. C. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. Use longest practical length. D. Using screws, attach panels in place at maximum 12 inches on center, perimeter and field, to supporting framing. E. Protect exposed gypsum core at perimeter edges and penetrations by covering core with metal trim. 3.9 INSTALLATION - BACKER MATERIALS A. Install glass-mat backer materials where indicated to receive glass-mat backer material. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.10 INSTALLATION - JOINT TREATMENT A. Install joint treatment in accordance with GA-216. B. Install corner bead, trim, and casing in accordance with GA-216. C. Install control joints full height of partition with 1/2-inch gap between board edges and between studs. Control joints shall be installed in accordance with the gypsum manufacturer’s recommended guidelines for control joints or the Gypsum Association GA-234 for control joint in fire rated systems. Apply sealant at base of joint and control joint accessory piece at face. Install control joints at the following locations: 1. Where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet. 2. At pairs of doors, install vertical control joint at each jamb. At single doors, install control joint at latch side of jamb. 3.11 FINISH A. Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and GA -214 Finish SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-9 March 2019 Levels. B. Provide gypsum board finish levels at locations as follows: 1. Level 0 (GA-214): No taping, finishing, or accessories necessary. a. Exposed surfaces above 12 ft high in Back of house and Storage Area. 2. Level 1 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedment set in joint compound. Surface free of excess joint compound. Tool Marks and ridges are acceptable. a. Areas above ceilings where required by drawings. b. Concealed areas. c. Interior exposed gypsum surfaces not indicated to be painted. 3. Level 3 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior ang les and two separate coats of joint compound are applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a. Interior gypsum surfaces indicated to be painted. b. Exterior exposed gypsum surfaces. 4. Level 5 (GA-214): All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints. A thin skim coat of joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured especially for this purpo se and applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a. Interior gypsum surfaces indicated to receive wallcovering. b. Interior gypsum surfaces indicated to receive graphic decals. C. Painted Gypsum Sheathing: Exposed exterior gypsum sheathing to receive a paint finish shall be prepared as follows in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions: 1. Apply fiberglass mesh joint tape over joints and embed in setting-type joint compound specified. 2. Skim coat surface with setting-type joint compound for smooth finish. 3. Finish painting is specified in Section 09900. D. Textured Coating. 1. Apply textured coating to gypsum board surfaces as scheduled on the drawings. a. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. b. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equip ment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. c. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 09300-1 January 31, 2017 SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic tile materials and applications including the following: 1. Ceramic wall tile and trim units (glazed). 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Glass tile (including mosaics). 4. Installation adhesives, mortars, grouts and sealants. 5. Trim, cementitious backer units and other accessories specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tile Manufacturer (Single Source Responsibility): Company specializing in ceramic and/or porcelain tiles, mosaics, and/or trim units . Obtain tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. a. All wall tile and mosaics shall be provided by Owners vendor: Haines, Jones, & Cadbury. General Contractor is responsible for coordination and installation. Haines, Jones, & Cadbury contact: David Lightfoot David.Lightfoot@hjcinc.com (479) 366-0642 Cell (800) 459-7099 Toll Free (484) 708-9732 Fax B. Installation System Manufacturer (Single Source Responsibility): Co mpany specializing adhesives& mortars. Obtain installation materials from single source manufacturer to ensure consistent quality and full compatibility a. All wall tile adhesives and mortars shall be provided and installed by General Contractor. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of ceramic and/or porcelain tiles, tile, mosaics, trim units with five years documented exp erience with installations of similar scope, materials and design. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Acceptance at Site: deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels, including grade seal, intact until time of us e, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Store tile and installation system materials in a dry location; handle in a manner to prevent chipping, breakage, and contamination. C. Protect latex additives, organic adhesives, epoxy adhesives and sealants from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, store at room temperature when possible. 09300-2 January 31, 2017 D. Store Portland cement mortars and grouts in a dry location. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide ventilation and protection of environment as recommended by manufacturer. B. Prevent carbon dioxide damage to tile, mosaics, trim units as well as adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials, by venting temporary heaters to the exterior. C. Maintain ambient temperatures not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or more than 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) during installation and for a minimum of seven days after completion. Setting of Portland cement is retarded by low temperatures. Protect work for extended period of time and from damage by other trades. Installation with latex Portland cement mortars requires substrate, ambient and material temperatures at least 37 degrees F (3 degrees C). There shall be no ice in slab. Freezing after installation will not damage latex Portland cement mortars. Protect Portland cement-based mortars and grouts from direct sunlight, radiant heat, forced ventilation (heat & cold) and drafts until cured to prevent premature evaporation of moisture. Epoxy mortars and grouts require surface temperatures between 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) at time of installation. It is the General Contractor's responsibility to maintain temperature control. D. Do not install epoxy-based materials when surface temperature is less than 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) or over 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of tile work with related work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The Contractor warrants the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship. The manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, and other installation materials shall provide a written warranty per Contract Documents which covers materials and labor. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Submit maintenance data Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions recommended, stain removal methods, as well as polishes and waxes recommended. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer of grout and silicone joint sealant: LATICRETE International, Inc., which is located at: 1 LATICRETE Park N.; Bethany, CT 06524-3423; Toll Free Tel: 800- 243-4788; Tel: 203-393-0010; Fax: 203-393-1684; Email: request info (technicalservices@laticrete.com); Web: www.laticrete.com/Mvis | www.drytek.com B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Obtain products from a single manufacturer. 2.2 TILE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with product requirements and performance requirements, provide products by manufacturers as noted on Contract Documents/Drawings 09300-3 January 31, 2017 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES - CERAMIC TILE A. Lightweight, Waterproof Tile Backer Board to comprised of high-density polystyrene core and reinforced, waterproof cementitious coating on both sides. Available in thicknesses from 1/4 inch to 2 inches (6 millimeters to 50 millimeters) and specifically d esigned for use in bonded tile installations. B. Cementitious backer board units: size and thickness as specified, complying with ANSI A118.9. 2.4 INSTALLATION Material’s – ALL WALL TILE ADHESIVES AND MORTARS SHALL BE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ALL WALL TILE, GROUT AND TILE JOINT SEALANT SUPPLIED BY OWNER’S VENDOR INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. A. Epoxy Adhesive to be chemical resistant 100% solids epoxy with high temperature resistance, GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to ISO R2, and meet the following minimum physical requirements: 1. UL GREENGUARD Certified for Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and UL GREENGUARD Gold Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCO M/GG UL 2818). 2. Compressive strength (ANSI A118.3): > 5000 psi (34.4 MPa). 3. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): > 1250 psi (8.6 MPa). 4. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): > 600 psi (4.1 MPa). 5. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.3): > 1400 psi (9.6 MPa). 6. Shrinkage (ANSI A118.3): 0 - 0.1%. 7. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3. 8. ISO 13007 Classification: R2. 9. Cured Epoxy Adhesive to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, detergents, brine, sugar, cosmetics and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute food acids, dilute alkalis, gasoline, turpentine and mineral spirits. B. Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set and slurry bond coats to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-flammable, GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to ISO C2TES2,and meet the following physical requirements: 1. UL GREENGUARD Certified for Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and UL GREENGUARD Gold Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG UL 2818). 2. 28 Day Porcelain Tile Shear Strength (ANSI A118.15): > 450 psi (3.1 MPa). 3. 28 Day Dry Cure / 20 Cycle Freeze-Thaw Porcelain Tile. 4. Shear Strength (ANSI A118.15): = 250 psi (1.7 MPa). 5. 7 Day Cure / 7 Day Water Immersion (ANSI A118.15): > 280 psi (1.9 MPa). 6. Extended Open Time (ANSI A118.15): > 100 psi (0.7 MPa). 7. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0. 8. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3. C. Rapid-Setting Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-flammable, conform to EN12004:2007 + A1:2012 for Class C2FTS2 adhesive, and meet the following physical requirements: 1. 28 Day Porcelain Tile Shear Strength (ANSI A118.4): > 400 psi (2.8MPa). 2. 7 Day Cure / 7 Day Water Immersion (ANSI A118.4): > 200 psi (1.4 MPa). 3. Shear Bond / Quarry Tile to Plywood (ANSI A118.11): > 190 psi (1.3 MPa). 4. Open Time (ANSI A118.4): >= 30 minutes. D. Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Glass Tile Adhesive to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-flammable, GreenGuard compliant, conform to ISO C2TS1, and meet the following physical requirements: 09300-4 January 31, 2017 1. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4 5.2.4): > 370 psi (2.55 MPa). 2. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4 5.2.3): 199 psi (1.37 MPa). 3. Total VOC Content: <=0.22 mg/m3. 4. mm. 5. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3. E. Organic Adhesive shall be a non-flammable, water resistant, latex adhesive and shall meet the following physical requirements: 1. Open Time (ANSI A136.1): 70 minutes @ 75 degrees F (24 degrees C). 2. Color: White 3. Density (ANSI A136.1): 13.2 lbs./gal (1.6 kg/l). 4. Total VOC Content: < 36.00 g/L. F. Epoxy Grout (Commercial/Residential) shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, and shall meet the following physical requirements: 1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout supplied by Owner’s Vendor. 2. UL GREENGUARD Certified for Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and UL GREENGUARD Gold Certified for Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG UL 2818). 3. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): 3,800 psi (26.2 MPa). 4. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1,100 psi (7.6 MPa). 5. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1,100 psi (7.6 MPa). 6. Thermal Shock (ANSI A118.3): > 800 psi (5.5 MPa). 7. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): < 0.05%. 8. Vertical Joint Sag (ANSI A118.3): Pass. 9. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3. 10. Cured Epoxy Grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, brine, sugar, cosmetics, and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute acids and dilute alkalis. G. Latex Portland Cement Grout to be weather, frost and shock resistant, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, as well as meet the following physical requirements: 1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Select Grout supplied by Owner’s Vendor. 2. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.7): 4500 psi (31 MPa). 3. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.7): 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 4. Flexural Strength (ANSI A118.7): 1,250 psi (8.6 MPa). 5. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.7): < 5%. 6. Linear Shrinkage (ANSI A118.7): < 0.O5 %. 7. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0. 8. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3. H. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant to be a one component, neutral cure, exterior grade silicone sealant and meet the following requirements: 1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE LATASIL and LATICRETE LATASIL 9118 Primer supplied by Owner’s Vendor 2. Tensile Strength (ASTM C794): 280 psi (1.9 MPa). 3. Hardness (ASTM D751; Shore A): 25 (colored sealant) /15 (clear sealant). 4. Weather Resistance (QUV Weather-ometer): 10,000 hours (no change). 5. . I. Spot Bonding Epoxy Adhesive for installing tile, Ceramic tile over vertical and overhead surfaces shall be high strength, high temperature resistant, non-sag and shall meet the 09300-5 January 31, 2017 following physical requirements: 1. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): > 1,000 psi (6.9 MPa). 2. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): 0.1 %. 3. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): > 8,300 psi (57.2 MPa). 4. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3 Modified): > 730 psi (5 MPa). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to be covered with ceramic tile, mosaics, are: 1. Sound, rigid and conform to good design/engineering practices. 2. Systems, including the framing system and panels, over which tile will be installe d shall be in conformance with the International Building Code (IBC) for commercial applications, or applicable building codes. 3. Clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence, form oil, loose plaster, paint, and scale. 4. For thin-bed tile installations when a cementitious bonding material will be used, including medium bed mortar: maximum allowable variation in the tile substrate - for tiles with edges shorter than 15 inches (375mm), maximum allowable variation i s 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6mm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1/16 inch variation in 12 inches (1.5mm variation in 300mm) when measured from the high points in the surface. For tiles with at least one edge 15 inches (375mm) in length, maximum allowable variation is 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3mm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1/16 inch variation in 24 inches (1.5mm variation in 600mm) when measured from the high points in the surface. For modular substrate units, such as exterior glue plywood panels or adjacent concrete masonry units, adjacent edges cannot exceed 1/32-inch (0.8mm) difference in height B. Advise General Contractor and Owner Project Manager of any surface or substrate conditions requiring correction before tile work commences. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of substrate or surface conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES - TILE 1. Control Joints: Tile installations shall include sealant filled joints between the ceramic tile, which is over any control joints in the substrate. However, the sealant filled joints shall be offset horizontally by as much as one tile width from the substrate control joint location to coincide with the grout joint pattern. 2. Movement Joints: Ceramic tile installations shall include expansion joints at coves, corners, other changes in substrate plane and over any expansion joints in the substrate. Expansion joints in ceramic tile are also required at perimeters, at restraining surfaces, at penetrations and at the intervals described in the Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA) Handbook Installation Method EJ171. Use LATICRETE LATASIL and backer rod. 3. B. Adjusting: Correction of defective work for a period of one year following substantial completion, return to job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without limitation, tiles broken in normal abuse due to deficiencies in setting bed, loose tiles or grout, and all other defects which shall develop as a result of poor workmanship. 3.3 INSTALLATION - TILE A. General: Install in accordance with current versions of American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) "A108 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" and TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation." Cut and fit , neatly around corners, fittings, and obstructions. Perimeter pieces to be minimum 09300-6 January 31, 2017 half tile, brick or stone. Chipped, cracked, split pieces and edges are not acceptable. Make joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform width to tolerance +/- 1/16 inch over 8' (1.5mm in 2.4m). Install divider strips at junction of flooring and dissimilar materials 1. B. Thin Bed Method (interior adhered veneers): 1. Install latex Portland cement mortar in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.11), A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the latex Portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much latex Portland cement mortar as shall be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format (> 8 inches x 8 inches/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone, rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread latex Portland cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. ' back-butter') each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling latex Portland cement mortar over the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the latex Portland cement mortar with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex Portland cement mortar from tile or stone face and joints between pieces. C. Epoxy Thin Bed Method: 1. Install epoxy adhesive in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.14) and ANSI A108.6. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile or stone selected. Work the epoxy adhesive into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much epoxy adhesive as shall be covered while the adhesive surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format (> 8 inches x 8 inches/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone, rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread epoxy adhesive onto the back of (i.e. ' back-butter') each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling epoxy adhesive over the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the epoxy adhesive with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess epoxy adhesive from tile or stone face and joints between pieces. D. Thin Bed Method (Glass Tiles): 1. Ensure that the backs of the glass tiles have been thoroughly washed, rinsed, and completely dried prior to installation. Install latex Portland cement thin-set mortar in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.11), A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Remove any excess setting material from in between tile edges. If voids or water spots in the adhesive are visible through the tile, remove the tile and correct the installation. Allow the tile installation to cure a minimum of 48 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) prior to grouting. Clean excess latex Portland cement mortar from the face of the glass tiles and joints between pieces. E. Grouting or Pointing (Interior Adhered Veneers): 1. Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Grouting Epoxy (ANSI A118.3): Follow manufacturer‘s recommendations for minimum cure time prior to grouting. Store liquid components of LATICRETE SpectraLOCK® PRO Premium Grout† for 24 hours @ 70 -80°F (21-27°C) prior to use to facilitate mixing and application. Substrate temperature must be 40- 95°F (4-35°C). Verify joints are free of dirt, debris or grout spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off tile faces and remove water standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured ceramic tile, or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning. Cut open pouch and pour LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Premium Grout Part A Liquid into a clean mixing pail. Then open pouch and pour LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Premium Grout Part B Liquid into the mixing pail. Mix by hand or with a 09300-7 January 31, 2017 slow speed (<300 rpm) mixer until the two liquids are well blended. Then, while mixing, add LATICRETE SpectraLOCK Grout Part C Powder an d blend until uniform. For narrow joints, it is acceptable to leave out up to 10% of the LATICRETE SpectraLOCK Grout Part C Powder to produce a more fluid mix. Install LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Premium Grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.13) and ANSI A108.6 (3.0 - 4.0). Spread using a sharp edged, firm rubber float and work grout into joints. Using strokes diagonal (at 45° angle) to the grout lines, pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Then hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to avoid pulling grout out of filled joints. Once excess grout is removed, a thin film/haze will be left. Initial cleaning of the remaining film/haze can begin approximately 20 minutes after grouting (wait longer when temperatures are cooler). Begin by mixing one cleaning additive packet with 2 gallons (7.6 L) of clean water in a clean bucket to make cleaning solution. Dip a clean sponge into the bucket and then wring out cleaning solution until sponge is damp. Using a circular motion, lightly scrub grouted surfaces with the damp sponge to loosen grout film/haze. Then drag sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Rinse sponge frequently and change cleaning solution at least every 50 ft2 (4.7m2). Discard sponges as they become "gummy" with residue. Check work as you clean and repair any low spots with additional grout. One (1) hour after finishing first cleaning, clean the same area again following the same procedure but utilizing a clean white scrub pad and fresh cleaning solution. Rinse scrub pad frequently. Drag a clean sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Use each side of sponge only once before rinsing and change cleaning solution at least every 50 ft2 (4.7m2). Allow cleaned areas to dry and inspect tile/stone surface. For persistent grout film/haze (within 24 hours), repeat scrubbing procedure with undiluted white vinegar and clean pad. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. Inspect grout joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed LATICRETE® SpectraLOCK® PRO Premium Grout†. Cautions: Do not use undiluted white vinegar on polished marble or limestone unless a test spot in an inconspicuous area indicates no change in finish appearance; do not use acid cleaners on epoxy grout less than 7 days old a. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout. References: LATICRETE Data Sheets: 681.0, 681.5 LATICRETE MSDS: Premium Part A, Premium Part B, Part C Powder, Cleaning Additive GREENGUARD Certificate: PRO Premium LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 111, 198, 216, 400 2. Polymer Fortified Cement Grout (ANSI A118.7) Allow ceramic tile installation to cure a minimum of 24 hours @ 70° F (21°C). Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris or tile spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non- slip or rough textured Stone, or trim units to facilitate cleaning. Surface temperature must be between 40-90° F (4-32°C). Mixing: Pour approximately 64 oz. (1.9 L) of clean, potable water into a clean mixing container. Add a 25 lb. (11.3 kg) bag of LATICRETE® PERMACOLOR® Grout to the container while mixing. Mix with a slow speed mixer to a smooth, stiff consistency. Allow to slake for 5–10 minutes and remix. Install latex Portland cement grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1A (7.0 Grouting of tile), ANSI A108.02 (4.5 Cleaning tile) and ANSI A108.10. Dampen dry surfaces with clean water. Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints. Using diagonal (at 45° angle to direction of grout line) strokes, pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to reduce pulling grout out of filled joints. Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 15-20 minutes after grouting @ 09300-8 January 31, 2017 70° F (21°C). Higher temperatures may require faster time to initial cleaning; wider joints or lower temperatures may require a longer time to initial cleaning. Begin initial cleaning by lightly dampening the entire grouted area with a damp sponge. Then wash clean the entire area with a damp (not wet) sponge. Drag a clean towel, dampened with water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the veneer face to remove any grout haze left after “squeegeeing.” Rinse towel/sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 200 ft2 (19m2). Repeat this cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present. Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. With in 24 hours, check for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and a nylon scrubbing pad, using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces and dissolve haze/film. Do not use acid cleaners on latex Portland cement grout less than 10 days old. a. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Select Grout. References: LATICRETE Data Sheets: 250.0; LATICRETE MSDS: 2500; GREENGUARD Certificates: 2500; LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 201, 400 F. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide control or expansion joints as located in contract drawings and in full conformity, especially in width and depth, with architectural details. 1. Substrate joints must carry through, full width, to surface of tile, brick or stone. 2. Install expansion joints in tile, brick or stonework over construction/cold joints or control joints in substrates. 3. Install expansion joints where tile, brick or stone abut restraining surfaces (such as perimeter walls, curbs, columns), changes in plane and corners. 4. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCNA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters. 5. Joint width: ≥ ⅛” (3mm) and ≤ 1” (25mm). 6. Joint width: depth ~2:1 but joint depth must be ≥ ⅛” (3mm) and ≤ ½” (12mm). a. Layout (field defined by joints): 1:1 length: width is optimum but must be ≤ 2:1. Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as dirt, dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer. Use LATICRETE Latasil™ 9118 Primer for underwater and permanent wet area applications, or for porous stone (e.g. limestone, sandstone etc…) installations. Install appropriate backing material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint design and as specified in § 07920. Apply masking tape to face of tile, brick or stone veneer. Use caulking gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints with sealant. Within 5-10 minutes of filling joint, ‘tool’ sealant surface to a smooth finish. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint. Wipe smears or excess sealant off the face of non-glazed tile, brick, stone or other absorptive surfaces immediately. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE® Latasil™ LATICRETE Latasil 9118 Primer References: LATICRETE Detail Drawings: WP300, EJ-01, EJ-02, EJ-05, EJ-06, EJ-08, EJ-10 (Sealant treatments only) LATICRETE Data Sheets: 6200.1, 6524.1, 6526.1 09300-9 January 31, 2017 LATICRETE MSDS: Latasil, Primer LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 211, 252 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean excess mortar/epoxy from veneer surfaces with water before they harden and as work progresses. Do not contaminate open grout/caulk joints while cleaning. Sponge and wash veneers diagonally across joints. Do not use acids for cleaning. Polish with clean dry cloth. Remove surplus materials and leave premises broom clean. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation to avoid damage to finished tile work. END OF SECTION SECTION 09500 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS March 2019 09500-01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 01.1 ACT1: Armstrong “Health Zone” Square Lay -in #1935 (Scrubbable), 24” x 24” x ¾”, Color: White. Location: Retail, Food Service, Backroom/Food Prep., and Washroom. Verify ceiling coverage with drawings and according to local Board of Health requirements. 01.2 ACT2: Armstrong “Cortega,” Square Lay-in #770, 24” x 24” x 5/8”, Color: White. Location: Associates Room, Office, Electrical Room, Restroom Corridor, Delivery Corridor, Delivery Staging, and Janitor Area. Verify ceiling coverage with drawings and according to local Board of Health requirements. 09500-02 ACOUSTICAL CEILING ACCESSORIES 02.2 Armstrong Angle Molding: Hemmed with prefinished exposed flanges #7808, 2” x 2”, Color: White. (Alternate: CertainTeed #WA32-32). Location: Interior adhered manufactured stone veneer wall. 09500-03 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SUSPENSION 03.1 Material: Armstrong, Prelude 15/16" exposed tee system, Color: White. Alternate: CertainTeed Celotex “Classic Hook” (or stab) for 15/16” exposed grid system, Color: White. 03.2 Installation A. Unless otherwise shown, install suspended ceilings in accordance with the following requirements. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from the building structure as follows: 1. Install 1 ½” cold rolled channels 4’-0” oc with 8 ga hanger wire spaced a max of 4’-0” oc along carrying channels. Attach 7/8” screw furring channels spaced 16” oc perpendicular to the 1 ½” channel with double strand of saddle tied #16 ga galvanized tie wire or 1 ½” furring channel clips. Apply ½” gypsum board with its long dimension at right angles to the furring channels. Attach gypsum board with 1” self-drilling drywall screws 12” oc in the field of the board 8” or 12” oc at butt joints, located not more than ½” from edges. 2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter splaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interferes with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 4. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so SECTION 09500 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS March 2019 members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. END OF SECTION 09500 SECTION 09600 FLOORING March 2019 01-1 TERRAZZO 01.1 Project Conditions: 01.1.1 All work shall be in accordance with National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. specifications. 01.1.2 The General Contractor is responsible for Terrazzo floor installation. 01.1.3 The General Contractor shall provide sufficient water, temporary heat and light, and adequate electric power with suitable outlets connected and distri buted for use within 100 feet of any working space. 01.1.4 The General Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to protect adjacent spaces from damage during installation. 01.1.4.1 Maintain ambient temperatures in the area to receive terraz zo at not less than 50 deg. F. 01.1.4.2 Maintain adequate ventilation in the area to receive terrazzo. 01.2 Terrazzo Sample: Provide a 4”x4” sample panel of the terrazzo prior to commencement of construction for owner and architects approval. 01.3 Patching: Patch terrazzo as required: Fill with concrete, add terrazzo mix to match, then ground down flush with existing. 01.4 Initial Floor Slab Inspection: 01.4.1 The Terrazzo Contractor shall examine the floor slab with the General Contractor’s Superintendent present for compliance with requirements regarding the installation tolerances and other conditions affecting finished quality of the terrazzo. 01.4.2 Verify that concrete surfaces to receive monolithic terrazzo flooring are sound, free of cracks, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form -release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with terrazzo flooring materials. 01.4.3 The Terrazzo Contractor shall proceed with the installation upon the inspection and acceptance of the floor slab. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, including, but not limited to levelness/flatness tolerance issues, etc., they must be corrected prior to proceeding with the installation of terrazzo. 01.5 Install Terrazzo Strip Material: 01.5.1 Terrazzo Divider and Control Joint Strips: 01.5.1.1 Locate divider strips in locations indicated on sheet S2 in the architectural plan set. 01.5.1.2 Install control-joint strips back to back in locations indicated along control joints. 01.5.1.2.1 Install strips in epoxy adhesive setting bed without voids below strips 01.5.1.3 Install accessary strips as required to provide a complete installation. 01.5.1.4 Mfr. Manhattan American Terrazzo Strip Company. Phone: (888) 462-2813 01.5.1.4.1 Rijtex “T” strips ½” high 16ga zinc installed over top of the slab control joints. 01.5.1.4.2 “L Angle” strips ½” high 16ga zinc and used at the door openings, restroom thresholds and cooler/freezer edges. SECTION 09600 FLOORING March 2019 01.5.1.4.3 Alternate: 1” high by 1/8” thick zinc divider strip used at the entry mat edge locations. To be installed by terrazzo contractor, not G.C. 01.5.1.4.4 Column isolation joint strips: Expansion “T” 01.6 Install Terrazzo Floor: 01.6.1 Monolithic Terrazzo: Provide ½" thick, bonded to structural water -cured concrete slab. 01.6.1.1 Terrazzo Mix (When patching floor, match existing mix.) Terrazzo Color Formula #7 (New Stores) 10% Raven Black #1 & #2 25% New Pure White #1 & #2 10% Boston Cream #1 & #2 20% Mocha #1 & #2 20% Chocolate #1 & #2 10% Arim Mirror 6-9 mm 5% Arim Red Glass 6-9 mm Type II Gray Cement with 2 oz. black color per bag cement 01.6.2 Place Terrazzo Mixture in sections formed by divider strips and trowel mixture to above the tops of the strips. 01.6.3 Broadcast additional marble and chips as necessary to match required mix/pattern. 01.6.4 Roll and compact surface until all excess cement and water has been extracted. 01.6.5 Trowel to a dense uniform flat surface disclosing lines if divider strips. 01.7 Terrazzo Curing: 01.7.1 Once the terrazzo has sufficiently set, continue to cure with water or polyethylene sheeting. 01.7.2 Cure until topping develops sufficient strength to prevent lifting or pulling of stone/chips during the grinding process. 01.8 Terrazzo Finishing: 01.8.1 The Terrazzo Contractor shall protect other adjacent work from water and dust generated by grinding operations. 01.8.2 Rough Grinding: 01.8.2.1 Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. 01.8.3 Grouting: 01.8.3.1 Clean the floor with clean water and then rinse thoroughly. 01.8.3.2 Remove excess rinse water and machine or hand-apply grout, taking care to fill all voids. 01.8.3.3 Cure until grout is ready for grinding. 01.8.4 Fine Grinding/Polishing: 01.8.4.1 Grind with 200 grit stone or comparable diamond abrasives until grout is removed from the surface. 01.8.4.2 Grind with 400 grit stone or comparable diamond abrasives until entire floor has been polished to 400 grit. 01.8.4.3 Grind with 600-grit stone or comparable diamond abrasives until the entire floor exhibits a high gloss polish. SECTION 09600 FLOORING March 2019 01.9 Terrazzo Cleaning: 01.9.1 Remove grinding residues from the terrazzo surface and properly dispose of them from the site utilizing a lined container. Terrazzo should never be introduced into the sanitary drainage system as a means of disposal, or buried on site. 01.9.2 Wash terrazzo surfaces immediately after grinding of terrazzo flooring with water and allow surfaces to dry thoroughly. 01.10 Terrazzo Sealing: 01.10.1 The terrazzo installer shall seal terrazzo with 2 coats of the following sealer manufactured by NCL: 01.10.1.1 NCL product “Surface Barrier” at nclonline.com. 01.11 General Contractor Cleaning Responsibility 01.11.1 Once terrazzo has been poured, ground, and sealed with a construction sealer, the floor must be broom swept at least daily, and more frequently if conditions require (excessive dust, dirt, spills, etc.). Special care sho uld be taken to avoid moving heavy items across the floor without the aid of a hand -truck or other wheeled moving device. In addition, spills on the terrazzo floor surface must be avoided. 01.11.2 Night before opening. Clean floor using auto-scrubber with Hurricane, detail clean along edges and in corners, polish with Rock Hard and Diamond Gloss. 09600-02 VINYL BASE 02.1 Material: Johnsonite Traditional Rubber Wall Base, 4’-0” Straight Lengths with Toe (coved). Pre-Manufactured Inside and Outside Corners with 4” Returns Height: 4” Thickness: 1/8” Color: Black 40 Adhesive: Tarkett 960 Cove Base Adhesive (Porous Surfaces) or Tarkett 946 Premium Contact Adhesive (non-porous surfaces) applied per manufacturer’s standard recommendations and installation instructions. 02.2 Location: At all exposed wall bases, including those behind movable shelving and equipment, at all cabinets including Checkout, and at equipment bases, including store side of Walk-In (Freezer and Refrigerator), if none exist. Seal Cove Base top and bottom. 09600-03 VESTIBULE FLOORING 03.1 Vestibule Mat: Mats, Inc. Ultra Entry Mat. Color: Charcoal (Base Color: Black). Mat installed over terrazzo. Fill entire vestibule. Mat seams set parallel to front of store. Do not install mat spacer bar. All work to be in compliance with manufacturer’s current installation instructions. Furnished and installed by General Contractor. No substitutions allowed. SECTION 09600 FLOORING March 2019 Manufacturer: Mats, Inc. Contact: Mary Crane Phone: (781) 573.0265 Email: mcrane@matsinc.com 09600-04 ECORE ANTI-FATIGUE ECO SURFACES FLOORING AND TRANSITION STRIP 04.1 Materials: 04.1.1 ECOsurfaces Classic #1005 Sandpiper ECO RX – Color Jail House Rock #910 i24 Interlocking Tiles, 6mm. ECOsurfaces Classic is Pre-sealed with factory- applied ECOguard. Dimensions – 24”x24”. Install over Terrazzo at Checkout. Manufacturer Ecore Commercial Flooring Kathie Marchalonis 717-517-5404 khm@ecorecf.com 04.1.2 Transition Strip: Roppe Rubber Transitional Reducer #25, 5/16”H x 1-5/16”. Color: #193 Black-Brown. http://www.roppe.com/roppeweb/includes/rubberreducers.html Manufacturer Roppe Supplier and Contact Stanley Stephens 800-523-5200 04.2 Location: Checkout Core as indicated on drawings. 04.3 Application: As per Manufacturer’s detailed instructions found on ECOsurfaces website at www.ecosurfaces.com. Clean after installation with E-Cleaner as per Manufacturer’s instructions. 04.4 Maintenance: TaskiProfi Cleaner: PH-neutral cleaner. Spread Rate 10,000sf. 09600-05 BEER CAVE FLOORING by owner 05.1 Materials: Armstrong Sheet Rejuvenations TimberLine Shaw Quiet Cover, #0186V, Color: Mink #00720, Vinyl Planking with In-Step Locking. By Wawa. 05.2 Wall Base: Armstrong Vinyl. Color: brown. To match flooring. Johnsonite 4” Rubber Base (Coved). Color: Black 40. By general contractor. 05.3 Vinyl flooring transition at beer cave door to match beer cave flooring. Johnsonite #CTA-XXJ at doors. Color: To match flooring. By general contractor. SECTION 09600 FLOORING March 2019 09600-06 RESTROOM FLOORING 06.1 Materials 06.1.1 Urethane Cement Floor. Color: Wawa custom blend. ¼” thick w/ 6” high integral formed base. Transition to ½” over 20” horizontal distance to match terrazzo thickness. Manufacturer Key Resin Co. Supplier & Contact Gary Rader PremUs of Orlando, Inc. Phone: 407-654-3099 Cell: 407-509-4726 06.2 Location: Restroom Floors and Restroom Wall Bases. END OF SECTION 09600 SECTION 09700 WALL FINISHES March 2019 09700-01 FRP PANELS 01.1 Material (A) Crane Composites FRP ‘Glasbord-P’, Class C Fire-Rated, .09” (2.3 mm). See Drawings for color. Colors other than white require lead time. (B) Crane Composites FRP ‘Fire-X Glasbord’, Class A Fire-Rated, .09” (2.3 mm). See Drawings for color. Colors other than white require lead time. See drawings for location. 01.2 General: Fastened and glued installation. 01.3 Base Molding: Provide all moldings as required and Marlite FRP Base molding M612 P200 (Black), etc. as recommended and specified by manufacturer for complete installation. 01.4 Trim: Where FRP is used to cover the lower four(4) feet or (8) feet of drywall (Vestibules, Corridors, Office, Associate and Retail Area) use 1” half round wood trim, painted. All other areas use FRP 1/2“ Outside Corner Trim OC”. See drawings for location. 01.5 Manufacturer and Distributors: Manufacturer Crane Composites Inc. Address:23525 W Eames, Channahon, IL60410 Phone: 1.815.467.8600 or 1.800.435.0080 Fax: 1.815.467.8666 09700-02 ACROVYN WALL COVERING 02.1 Manufacturer: Impact Specialties Contact: Michelle Buehler Phone: (908) 849-3073 Email: mbuehler@impactspecialties.com 02.2 Material: Rigid Acrovyn 4000 Sheet. Nominal .040” thickness. Class 0.060 48”x96” sheets. Texture: Suede and Irish Linen. See Drawings for color and texture. 02.3 Application: Install using adhesive and standard trims following manufacturer’s installation instructions. Corner guards to be VA Series 3/4” 1 1/2”. 02.4 Location: where shown on the Drawings. 09700-03 CORNER PROTECTION 03.1 Corner protection at FRP to be Crane Composites/Kemlite Vinyl Trim for Glasbord, color to match FRP. Verify location on Drawings. 03.2 Where bullnose tile is unavailable, install Schluter transition strip. Styles and Colors as SECTION 09700 WALL FINISHES March 2019 indicated on drawings. 03.3 Where two FRP colors come together at outside corner in Wash area, supply 2” x 2” stainless steel corner guard. Refer to drawings for height. 09700-04 WALLPAPER 04.1 Material: Wallpaper supplied by Wawa and installed by General Contractor. Color: “Wawa Yellow”. Manufacturer Eykon Linda Lemieux, 800-222-7866 Fax: 901-366-0447 04.2 Application: As per manufacturer’s instructions. ‘Railroad’ wallpaper with seams in the corners. (A) Surface preparation: Proper surface preparation is essential for a quality wallcovering installation. The wall surface should be clean, dry, structurally sound and free of mildew, grease or other stains. Any loose paint must be removed from the wall. Glossy and semi-gloss paint should be sanded to dull the surface and a coat of adhesion-promoting primer applied prior to the installation of wallcovering. Any wall irregularities should be corrected. (B) Adhesive: Heavy duty clear non-staining cellulose. 09700-05 CAULKING 05.1 Material: Silicone caulk. Clear at sinks, cabinets, and Restrooms. Match grout color at tiles. 05.2 Location: Run a continuous bead of caulk around all cabinets, sinks, top of Food Service Area tiles and vertical corners of tile at Food/Prep Area and Food Service Area. Caulk at corner guards, back splashes, and all corners (horizontal and vertical) in Restrooms. END OF SECTION 09700 SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900-1 February 25, 2019 09900-01 GENERAL 01.1 Ordering Procedure (A) General Contractor shall remove and reinstall certain items to facilitate painting operation. (B) Verify procedure with the Wawa Project Manager. (C) Manufacturer: As noted. All specified paints are Class A rating for Flame Spread. No exceptions or substitutions without prior approval. 01.2 Preparation for Painting/Repainting Interior Wood Trim& Doors: Surface must be clean and free of dirt, grease, wax, mildew, and scaling paint. Glossy surfaces can be primed without sanding or surface deglossing. If surface is already stained, remove as much as possible by washing, sanding and scraping before apply ing recommended product. 09900-02 INTERIOR SURFACES 02.1 Gypsum Wall Board (See Drawings) (A) Walls: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel & Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell #274. See Drawings for color. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.) Alternate: Provide one (1) coat Sherwin Williams PrepRiteProBlock Latex #B51W20. Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel #B20-2200.See Drawings for color. (A) Ceilings When Exposed: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel &Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Finish 276 (color Muslin #1037). (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.) Alternate: One (1) coat Sherwin Williams PrepRiteProBlock Latex #B51W20. Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg gshell #B20-2200 (color Luminous White Satin). 02.2 Fascias (See Drawings) (A) 1” Half Round Trim:Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Aura Interior/Exterior Color Foundation #521. Followed by two (2) coats Aura Semi-gloss Waterborne Interior Paint #528. See Drawings for color . (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.) (B) Vertical Drywall: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel &Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss #276. See Drawings for color. Alternate: Provide one coat Sherwin Williams PrepRiteProBlock Latex #B51W20. Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg -Shel Finish #B20-2200.See Drawings for color. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.) 02.3 Wood Trim: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel &Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats DTM Acrylic Semi -Gloss #M29. See Drawings for color. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.) SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900-2 February 25, 2019 Alternate: Provide One (1) coat Sherwin Williams PrepRiteClassic Interior Latex Primer #B28W101. Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss (B31Series). See Drawings for color. 02.4 Doors and Frames: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel & Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss #M29.See Drawings for color. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.) Alternate: Provide one (1) coat Sherwin Williams Kem Bond HS Universal Metal Primer #B50WZ4. Followed by two (2) coats Sherwin Williams ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss (B31Series). See Drawings for color. 02.4.1 Doors, Frames and metal Cased Openings, as well as Access Panel covers and frames. shall receive Benjamin Moore Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy P42 paint. See Drawings for color. These interior, HM doors, frames and metal casings include the interior (not exterior) face of the exterior HM doors. 02.5 Return Air Grilles (A) Ceilings: Prefinished, color: white. (B) Walls: Paint to match adjacent wall. 02.5 Electrical Room Walls Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel & Undercoater Primer Sealer #253. Followed by two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel. Color AF-700 Storm Gray. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.) 09900-03 EXTERIOR SURFACES 03.1 General: Verify with the Wawa Project Manager exterior work required in Remodel Stores. 03.2 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore & Co unless otherwise noted. 03.3 Metal Doors, Frames, and Metal RWC's: Provide one coat Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Metal Primer #P06 for ferrous metal, where required. Followed by two coats MoorGlo Latex House and Trim Paint #N096 (color 01-White) soft gloss. Provide one coat Acrylic Metal Primer #P04 for galvanized metal, where required. Two coats MoorGlo Latex House and Trim Paint #N096 (color 01-White) soft gloss. (See TDS on Benjaminmoore.com for prep instructions.) 03.4 Parking Lots: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Safety Zone Marking Latex #M58. Parking Stalls- color 01 White. Barrier Free Zone, Fire Zone, and Fire Lane – color 30 Blue. Curbs, Directional, and No Parking – color 10 yellow. Alternate: Provide two (2) coats Sherwin Williams Setfast Acrylic Latex Traffic Marking Paint. Parking Stalls- color TM2160, White. Barrier Free Zone, Fire Zone, and Fire Lane- color TM2133, Blue. Curbs, Directional, and No Parking- color TM2159, Yellow. 03.5 Trash Compound Interior Walls: Provide one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Waterborne Epoxy Block Filler #P31and one (1) coat Benjamin Moore Moorcraft Super Spec Urethane Enamel #P22.Color as indicated on drawings. SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900-3 February 25, 2019 03.6 Fiber Cement Siding color Woodland Cream (for repairs): Use Benjamin Moore - Aura Exterior Satin #631, color HC-30 Philadelphia Cream. 03.7 Fiber Cement Trim color JH10-20 Arctic White (for repairs): Use Benjamin Moore - Aura Exterior Satin #631, color 2144-50. 09900-04 GASOLINE CANOPY PAINTING (See Section 05120-03) 09900-05 WORKMANSHIP 06.1 Before painting or applying natural finishes, General Contractor shall remove hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items or provide protection for same and replace upon completion of each space. 06.2 After they have been fitted, General Contractor sha ll remove all doors to finish all edges (side edges, top and bottom edges). 06.3 Work to be painted under this Contract on exposed finished surfaces shall be completely cleaned of all hand marks, grease, dirt and dust before painting is started. All sanded surfaces shall be well brushed and left dust free. 06.4 Should wood contain knots, pitch streaks or sappy spots, work to be painted shall first be touched up with shellac. 06.5 Do necessary puttying of nail holes, cracks, etc., after first coat, with putty of color to match that of finish. Bring putty flush with adjoining surface in neat, workmanlike manner. 06.6 Sand smoothly all woodwork to be finished with enamel or varnish, clean surface before proceeding with application of the first coat. Use fine sandpaper #100 or steel wool between coats of enamel or varnish finish applied to wood or metal to produce even, smooth finish. 06.7 Do no exterior painting while surface is damp or during rainy or frosty weather, as per paint manufacturer’s specifications. 06.8 All cut edges of plywood or other interior millwork, if exposed, shall be filled and sanded to smooth condition ready for finishing. 06.9 Final coats of paint shall cover, without streaks. END OF SECTION 09900 SECTION 09960 COATINGS FOR STEEL 09960-1 September 9, 2015 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of asphaltic -based emulsion coating systems on the following: 1. Structural steel directly in contact with soil. 2. Anchor bolts and other steel components in contact with soil. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Asphaltic Based Corrosion Resistance Coating: (as referred in the drawings) refers to asphalt-base emulsions applied in a relatively thick film as a protective coating for metal surfaces. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 1187 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. Use latest edition at the time of project building submittal. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). Do not allow coating in pail to freeze. B. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply if there is a threat of rain or temperatures below 50 deg F within 24 hours. D. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. SECTION 09960 COATINGS FOR STEEL 09960-2 September 9, 2015 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Henry Company, 788 Non-Fibered Asphalt Emulsion Damp Proofing. B. Western Colloid, Product #298 Asphalt Emulsion Roof Surfacing. C. Approved Equal by Structural Engineer of Record. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be utilized are not limited to the products listed. Alternate products may be submitted for approval. Approval must be received in writing prior to approval of product. Unapproved products installed may require removal at Contractor’s cost. 2.2 GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: asphaltic based corrosion resistant coating system shall be compatible with substrates indicated, under conditions of service and a pplication as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Use same product and manufacturer for all asphaltic based corrosion resistant coating applications. B. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have alr eady been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible . PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for performance of the Work per manufacturer’s technical data sheet or other installation requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations . SECTION 09960 COATINGS FOR STEEL 09960-3 September 9, 2015 B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. C. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.5 COATING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Apply a minimum 1/16” thick coating in two applications. 2. Coating to be applied on all sides of members – to include where steel will be covered or adjacent to cast-in-place concrete. 3. Bring coating to 6-inches above top of concrete slab for building structures. Gas canopies require the coating be terminated at the top of the finished slab. END SECTION 09960 SECTION 10155 HDPE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-1 March 2019 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid plastic toilet compartments including the following: (Hiny Hiders) 1. Floor mounted overhead-braced toilet compartments. 2. Privacy screens. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Anchorage/blocking for attachment of partitions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. B. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01002-14. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 3. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Provide layout drawings and installation details with location and type of hardware required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions for not less than 5 years. B. Installer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this Section, with a minimum of 5 years experience. C. Materials: Doors, panels and pilasters shall be constructed from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) resins. Partitions shall be fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming a single component which is waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self- lubricating surface that resists marks from pens, pencils, markers and other writing instruments. All plastic components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking. SECTION 10155 HDPE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-2 March 2019 D. Performance Requirements: 1. Fire Resistance: Partition materials shall comply with the following requirements, when tested in accordance with the ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials: a. Class B flame spread/smoke developed rating, tested to ASTM E84. 2. Material Fire Ratings: b. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 286: Pass. c. International Code Council (ICC): Class B. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer guarantees its plastic against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions for 25 years from the date of receipt by the customer. If materials are found to be defective during that period for reasons listed above, the materials will be replaced free of charge. (Labor not included in warranty.) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Scranton Products, which is located at: 801 E. Corey St. ; Scranton, PA 18507; Toll Free Tel: 800-445-5148; Email: request info (info@scrantonproducts.com); Web: www.scrantonproducts.com 1. Fabricator: Santana Toilet Partitions. 2. Fabricator: Comtec Toilet Partitions. 3. Fabricator: Capitol Toilet Partitions. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Plastic Panels: High density polyethylene (HDPE) suitable for exposed applications, waterproof, non-absorbent, and graffiti-resistant textured surface; 1. Fire-resistance Rating: Class B. 2. Fire-resistance Rating: NFPA 286. B. Zinc Aluminum Magnesium and Copper Alloy (Zamac): ASTM B 86. C. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A167, Type 304. D. Aluminum: ASTM 6463-T5 alloy. SECTION 10155 HDPE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-3 March 2019 2.3 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Basis of Design: Hiny Hiders Toilet Partitions as manufactured by and supplied by Scranton Products. 1. Style: Floor mounted overhead-braced toilet compartments. B. Doors, panels, and pilasters shall be 1 inch (25 mm) thick with all edges rounded to a radius. Doors and dividing panels shall be mounted based on height of specified system. 1. Door and Panel Height: 55 inches standard (1397 mm) (standard). 2. Door & Pilaster Edge: Standard. 3. Pilasters shall be 82 inches (2083 mm) high fastened to floor. C. Panel Color: Warm Series: 1. Sandcastle - Orange Peel. 2. Pilaster shoes shall be 3 inches (76 mm) high stainless steel (type 304, 20 gauge) secured to the pilaster with a stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt. D. Headrail shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with anti-grip design. The headrail shall have a clear anodized finish and shall be fastened to the headrail bracket by a stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt, and fastened at the top of the pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws. Headrail brackets shall be 20-gauge stainless steel with a satin finish and secured to the wall with a stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws. E. Wall Brackets: 1. Aluminum Brackets: Wall brackets shall be made of heavy-duty aluminum 6463-T5 alloy. 2. The brackets are fastened to the pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws and fastened to the panels with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. 3. Bracket Type: Stirrup double ear aluminum. 4. Bracket Type: Continuous 54 inches (1372 mm) aluminum. F. Door Hardware: 1. Hinges: 54 inches (1372 mm) continuous aluminum. 2. Door strike/keeper shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6436-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish and secured to the pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. Bumper shall be made of extruded black vinyl. a. Style: 6 inches (152 mm) aluminum 3. Aluminum Slide Bolt Latch and housing shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy). The latch housing shall have a bright dip anodized finish, and the slide bolt and button shall have a black anodized finish. 4. Equip outswing handicapped doors with second door pull and door stop. 2.4 SOLID PLASTIC PRIVACY SCREENS A. Provide plastic privacy screens in urinal and entry toilet room applications as indicated or scheduled. SECTION 10155 HDPE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-4 March 2019 B. Panels, and pilasters, if required, shall be 1 inch (25 mm) thick with all edges rounded to a radius. Screens shall be mounted at 14 inches (356 mm) above the finished floor. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of current colors. C. Type: Wall mounted screen. 1. Screen: Urinal screens shall be 18 inches (457 mm) wide by 42 inches (1067 mm) high. 2. Wall brackets shall be 41 inches (1041 mm) long. D. Wall brackets shall be 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) stirrup type made of heavy-duty aluminum (6463-T5 alloy). Stirrup brackets shall be fastened to panel/pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. PART 3 GENERAL 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Examine areas to receive toilet partitions, screens, and shower compartments for correct height and spacing of anchorage/blocking and plumbing fixtures that affect installation of partitions. Report discrepancies to the architect. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level manor, with plastic laid out as shown on shop drawings. C. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not exceed 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). D. No evidence of cutting, drilling, and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work. E. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of imperfections. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SECTION 10155 HDPE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-3 March 2019 2.3 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Basis of Design: Hiny Hiders Toilet Partitions as manufactured by and supplied by Scranton Products. 1. Style: Floor mounted overhead-braced toilet compartments. B. Doors, panels, and pilasters shall be 1 inch (25 mm) thick with all edges rounded to a radius. Doors and dividing panels shall be mounted based on height of specified system. 1. Door and Panel Height: 55 inches standard (1397 mm) (standard). 2. Door & Pilaster Edge: Standard. 3. Pilasters shall be 82 inches (2083 mm) high fastened to floor. C. Panel Color: Warm Series: 1. Sandcastle - Orange Peel. 2. Pilaster shoes shall be 3 inches (76 mm) high stainless steel (type 304, 20 gauge) secured to the pilaster with a stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt. D. Headrail shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with anti-grip design. The headrail shall have a clear anodized finish and shall be fastened to the headrail bracket by a stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt, and fastened at the top of the pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws. Headrail brackets shall be 20-gauge stainless steel with a satin finish and secured to the wall with a stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws. E. Wall Brackets: 1. Aluminum Brackets: Wall brackets shall be made of heavy-duty aluminum 6463-T5 alloy. 2. The brackets are fastened to the pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws and fastened to the panels with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. 3. Bracket Type: Stirrup double ear aluminum. 4. Bracket Type: Continuous 54 inches (1372 mm) aluminum. F. Door Hardware: 1. Hinges: 54 inches (1372 mm) continuous aluminum. 2. Door strike/keeper shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6436-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish and secured to the pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. Bumper shall be made of extruded black vinyl. a. Style: 6 inches (152 mm) aluminum 3. Aluminum Slide Bolt Latch and housing shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy). The latch housing shall have a bright dip anodized finish, and the slide bolt and button shall have a black anodized finish. 4. Equip outswing handicapped doors with second door pull and door stop. 2.4 SOLID PLASTIC PRIVACY SCREENS A. Provide plastic privacy screens in urinal and entry toilet room applications as indicated or scheduled. SECTION 10155 HDPE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-4 March 2019 B. Panels, and pilasters, if required, shall be 1 inch (25 mm) thick with all edges rounded to a radius. Screens shall be mounted at 14 inches (356 mm) above the finished floor. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of current colors. C. Type: Wall mounted screen. 1. Screen: Urinal screens shall be 18 inches (457 mm) wide by 42 inches (1067 mm) high. 2. Wall brackets shall be 41 inches (1041 mm) long. D. Wall brackets shall be 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) stirrup type made of heavy-duty aluminum (6463-T5 alloy). Stirrup brackets shall be fastened to panel/pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. PART 3 GENERAL 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Examine areas to receive toilet partitions, screens, and shower compartments for correct height and spacing of anchorage/blocking and plumbing fixtures that affect installation of partitions. Report discrepancies to the architect. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level manor, with plastic laid out as shown on shop drawings. C. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not exceed 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). D. No evidence of cutting, drilling, and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work. E. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of imperfections. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SECTION 10200 SPECIALITIES 10200-1 March 2019 10200-01 SANITARY ACCESSORIES 01.1 Manufacturer: As noted on Drawings. Provide wall blocking as required. Provide accessories if required on Drawings. 01.2 Barrier Free Requirements: Locate as per Barrier Free Accessibility requirements. 01.3 Pipe Covers: See Plumbing Section. 01.4 Public Rest Rooms: See Drawings for accessories. 10200-02 ITEMS SUPPLIED BY WAWA, INC, AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR 02.1 General Contractor to install the following items: (A) Bulletin Boards (minimum of 2). (B) Produce Bag Holders. (C) Lockers. Bolt Lockers top and bottom. (D) Job Aid Holders and Clipboards. (E) License Board. (F) Complete Graphics Package including LCD Monitors. (G) Soap Dispensers in Food Service and Wash Areas. (H) Toilet Tissue Dispensers. (I) Paper Towel Dispenser in Food Service Area. (J) CSR Filter System, See Section 15002. (K) Safes (G.C. to bolt safes to floor). (L) Mop Holder (M) Hose Holder (N) Air Delight Dispenser Economizer 9000, model #401375 (attach with screws) and Air Delight Micro-Burst 9000 refills (two per Restroom) (O) Sanitizer Neat Seat Dispenser (one per restroom stall) (P) Wawa Toilet Bowl Cleaner #89 Spray Bottle shelf manufactured by Chemstar (Q) Bollards (R) Clocks (S) Clipboard Racks (T) Charity Collector @ Checkout Counter SECTION 10200 SPECIALITIES 10200-2 March 2019 (U) Broom Holders (2) (V) Trash Bag Holders (2) (W) BAS (X) Cleaning Solution Rack (1) (Y) Wallpaper covering (Z) Grab bars. See drawings for sizes and mounting locations. (AA) Restroom Mirror (locate per drawings) (BB) Hand Dryer with recessed kit in Rest Rooms (CC) Toilet Partitions (see drawings and Specification Section 10155) (DD) Restroom Coat Hooks (EE) Restroom Lavatory Cabinets (FF) Restroom Lavatory solid surface countertop (GG) Restroom Lavatory Shield (HH) Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit (II) Restroom door stops and partition wall stops (JJ) Toilet Seat cover dispenser (KK) Restroom waste receptacles (LL) Solid Surface wall panel beneath restroom hand dryer (MM) Restroom ADA signs 10200-03 ITEMS SUPPLIED BY WAWA, INC, INSTALLED BY OTHERS & COORDINATED BY GC: 02.1 Items to be installed by others: (A) Graphics (B) Cabinets (except Restroom Lavatory Cabinets) (C) Refrigeration (D) Trash Compactors (E) First Aid Kit (F) Sanitary Equipment (G) Fire Extinguishers SECTION 10200 SPECIALITIES 10200-3 March 2019 (H) Intercom System & Muzak (I) ATM’s (J) Soda & FCB Equipment (K) Coffee Equipment (L) Milkshake Equipment & Espresso (M) Iced Coffee Equipment (N) Phones (O) CAT System (P) Computers (Q) Register & Cash System (R) Office Furniture (S) Self-Serve Beverage System 10200-04 WIRE SHELVING 04.1 Over Sink Storage - Location: At Three Compartment Sink (4 shelves required). General Contractor to install “Metro” wire shelving Item # WAWA-SINK72 above Three Compartment Sink and other locations per drawings. with “lip” at front of shelving facing upwards toward ceiling. 04.2 Materials: Metroseal 3 with built-in Microban. Open-wire construction. 04.3 Provide wood blocking support as required for all shelving. 10200-06 ROLLER SHADE 06.1.1 Retail Area - Flexshade XD Manual Roller Shade for all as required on drawings. Fabric: SW2710-P28, Openness Factor of 10%, Color: Oyster/Charcoal. Length of shade to center horizontal mullion. A cord tensioning device must be installed to all looped operating cords. Provide metal covers and fascia panel for rollers. Color: to match storefront. 06.1.2 Office - Flexshade XD Manual Roller Shade as required on drawings. SW2701-P28, Openness Factor of 1%, Color: Oyster/Charcoal. Length of shade to top of window sill. A cord tensioning device must be installed to all looped operating cords. Provide metal covers and fascia panel for rollers. Color: to match storefront. 06.1.3 All Shades: Internal hem bar. Clutches, color: Vanilla, with stainless steel chain and child safety tension device, color: Vanilla. SECTION 10200 SPECIALITIES 10200-4 March 2019 Manufacturer: Draper Tracy Linville Phone: 765-856-1236 tlinville@draperinc.com 06.2.1 Alternate: Retail Area – Roll-A-Shade Manual Roller Shade for all as required on drawings. Roll-A-Shade shall field measure and install all roller shades. Fabric: SW2710-P28, Openness Factor of 10%, Color: Oyster/Charcoal. Length of shade to center horizontal mullion. A cord tensioning device must be installed to all looped operating cords. 4” Square fascia system. Fascia and brackets shall be powder coated. silver Color: to match storefront. Internal hem bar. Vanilla clutches with stainless steel chain and vanilla child safety tension device. 06.2.2 Alternate: Office – Roll-A-Shade Manual Roller Shade as required on drawings. Roll-A- Shade shall field measure and install all roller shades. SW2701-P28, Openness Factor of 1%, Color: Oyster/Charcoal. Length of shade to top of window sill. A cord tensioning device must be installed to all looped operating cords. 4” Square fascia system. Fascia and brackets shall be powder coated. silver Color: to match storefront. Internal hem bar. Vanilla clutches with stainless steel chain and vanilla child safety tension device. 06.2.3 All Shades: Internal hem bar. Clutches, color: Vanilla, with stainless steel chain and child safety tension device, color: Vanilla. Alternate Manufacturer: Roll–A-Shade Krystal Martinez Phone: 951-245-5077 x 122 Krystal.martinez@rollashade.com 10200-07 OUTDOOR SHED (All building types except F110-Attached) 07.1 Outdoor shed: mfr. shall provide construction, engineering & anchoring drawings, DCA letter and installation of the shed. See architectural drawings for location. 07.2 Shed shall have a finish floor height of not more than 2” above fin. slab. 07.3 Unit size to be 8’-0” x 10’-0” with peak of roof not to exceed 9’-0” AFF. 07.4 GC shall install a turbine vent in shed roof. Manufacturer, installer: Superior Sheds, Inc. Jim Frey Phone: 407-467-0004 10200-8 OUTDOOR SHED (F110 attached only) 08.1 Outdoor shed: mfr. shall provide construction, engineering & anchoring drawings, DCA letter and installation of the shed. See architectural drawings for location. 08.2 Shed shall have a finish floor height of not more than 2” above fin ish slab. SECTION 10200 SPECIALITIES 10200-5 March 2019 08.3 Unit size to be 3’-8” x 7’-0” or 2’-4” x 7’-0” with peak of roof not to exceed 9’-0” AFF. 08.4 GC shall install a turbine vent in shed roof Manufacturer, installer: South Country Sheds LLC. 203 S. Manatee Ave. Arcadia FL, 34266 Contact: Orlando Penner (863-491-8700) 10200-9 ALUMINUM SHUTTERS / ASSOCIATED ALUMINUM PANEL BENEATH 09.1 Powder-coated Aluminum Shutters with seamless, welded frame. Epoxy primed. All holes and cutouts shall be pre-made and powder coated. 7 year finish and lifetime structure warranty. 09.2 Pre-Finished 18 gauge white aluminum closure panel by Pioneer Architectural Systems “MTPN” beneath shutters (See drawings, exterior elevations) Manufacturer: Fenwall Fabrication & Mfg. 13046 Racetrack Rd. Suite 177 Tampa, FL 33626 Kerri Beals (813) 343-5979 specs@fenwalls.com Manufacturer: CFL Architectural, LLC 330 Lemon Lane Casselberry, FL 32707 (407) 408-3932 Alternate Manufacturer: Superior Custom Shutters 620 Douglas Avenue #1302 David Daniels Phone: 407-949-1969 10200-10 ROOF LADDER 10.1 Ladder shall be constructed using the following pre-fabricated aluminum extrusions: 2x1 ladder rungs (knurled) by Eastern Metal Supply or Equivalent. END OF SECTION 10200 SECTION 11400 EQUIPMENT 11400-1 January 10, 2013 11400-01 GENERAL CONTRACTOR 01.1 Food and merchandise display, storage and preparation equipment shall be provided and installed by separate Contractor, including compressor/condenser refrigeration equipment when required. 11400-02 EQUIPMENT LIST 02.1 All equipment listed in Equipment Schedule on Drawings supplied by Wawa, Inc. Installation, including but not limited to Plumbing and Electrical wiring and connections as specified on Drawings. 02.2 Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, General Contractor to supply all accessories and equipment not listed in Equipment Schedule. 02.3 The Equipment listed in the Drawings is a general description of the equipment and utilities required. This may vary somewhat depending on the Refrigeration/Equipment Contractors. General Contractor shall verify with the Wawa Project Manager the equipment that is to be installed. 11400-03 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION STANDARDS 03.1 These apply to the Equipment/Refrigeration/Cabinet Contractor, as well as the General Contractor where he is installing equipment, etc. 03.2 Seal all adjacent perimeters of cabinet-type equipment, make mobile, or space from walls and adjacent perimeters as follows: Length of Side Width of Space 2 feet 6 inches 2-4 feet 8 inches 4-6 feet 12 inches over 6 feet 18 inches Do not seal access panels- they must be accessible. 03.3 Place counter items not readily movable, weighing over 80 lbs., on legs or feet at least 4" high. 03.4 Space backsplash a minimum of 3" from the wall, or seal it to wall. 03.5 All joints, annular spaces, or openings into hollow or inaccessible areas are to be closed to 1/32" or less for food service areas. 03.6 Terrazzo in Trash Room shall be sealed. 03.7 Concrete beneath Trash Compactor shall be sealed. 03.8 Three Compartment Sink and Prep Sink (if required): Provide minimum 2” clearance or must be sealed. 03.9 Install floor anchors for Double Deep Top Track systems. The posts of the stationary units have triangular foot plates designed for this purpose. Each post should be bolted to the floor. The bolt should extend into the flooring material at least one (1) inch and should be 3/8” in diameter and be self-anchoring. END OF SECTION 11400 SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-1 March 2019 15001-01 SCOPE 01.1 The Work required under this section shall include all labor, materials, appliances, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the proper completion of the plumbing and drainage systems and related Work, shown, implied or required by the Drawings and these Specifications. 01.2 Work includes, but is not limited to, all sanitary and grease waste services, domestic water services, pipe insulation, and testing and adjusting of all systems. 01.3 Work not specifically covered or having minor details obviously omitted, but necessary to complete any part of the plumbing services installation, shall be provided by the Contractor without additional cost to Wawa. 01.4 The term “furnish” shall mean to deliver an item to the site. The term “install” shall mean to mount the item in its intended location and make required connections. The term “provide” shall mean to furnish and install. 15001-02 REGULATIONS AND CERTIFICATION 02.1 All Work under this section shall be provided in strict accordance with local municipality, state, and federal, codes and requirements. Where differences may exist between this Specification and Drawings and the Plumbing Code(s), the code shall govern. Additional requirements shall be met at no additional cost to Wawa. + 02.2 Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approvals and pay related fees as required by the municipality. Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Inspection from the local authority, as required, indicating satisfactory compliance with all governing codes. 15001-03 GUARANTEE AND COORDINATION 03.1 Contractor shall unconditionally guarantee in writing all equipment and workmanship for a period of one year from date of acceptance of system by Wawa unless otherwise specified. Contractor shall provide free service for all equipment involved in Contract during this period. Guarantee period shall be extended for all non -operational periods due to failure within the Guarantee Period. 03.2 The Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate all work with the Mechanical, Electrical, Structural and General Contractors as to eliminate field conflicts. 15001-04 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 04.1 Sanitary Waste Piping, 4” and smaller, below grade, shall be PVC Schedule 40, Plastic pipe and fittings, with solvent cement joints. Where PVC piping and fittings are not approved by local authorities, provide Hub-and-Spigot Cast-Iron soil pipe, service class, with compression fittings and rubber gaskets. 04.2 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping, 4” and smaller, above grade, shall be PVC Schedule 40, Plastic pipe and fittings, with solvent cement joints. Where PVC piping and fittings are not approved by local authorities, provide Hubless, Cast -Iron soil pipe with heavy-duty couplings. Or, provide “DWV” copper drainage tubing and soldered “DWV” copper fittings. Exception: Waste piping from the urinal shall not be “DWV” copper, due to corrosion. 04.3 Extend Building Sanitary drain piping and Grease Waste piping to the sanitary sew er SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-2 March 2019 main as shown on the Site Engineers Drawings. Coordinate invert elevations with the Site Engineer prior to installation. 04.4 Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. Provide additional protection during the terrazzo flooring process to prevent terrazzo material from entering the piping. 04.5 Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at the end of the day and when work stops. 04.6 Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water- based latex paint. Paint color shall match roof color. 04.7 Exposed Drainage Pipe and Fittings at plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be chrome - plated brass or chrome-plated copper pipe, with chrome-platted fittings. 04.8 Cleanouts: Round, heavy-duty, nickel bronze top for general floor areas and terrazzo areas. Square, heavy-duty, nickel bronze top for tile floors. 04.9 Exterior Grease Interceptor shall be provided and located by the contractor. Interceptor shall be configured as a two (2) compartment unit with 1250 gallons liquid storage capacity. Provisions for the unit shall include 2-way slot type cleanout plugs (one inlet, one outlet), manhole access, and access via cleanouts over the tank baffles. Cleanouts and manholes shall be set flush with finished grade. Interceptor shall be constructed in accordance with Florida Codes and Regulations for specific locations and highway requirements when installed in traffic areas. 04.10 Interior Grease Interceptor (Remodeled Stores Only): Interior Grease Interceptor shall be provided when no exterior grease interceptor exists or an exterior unit is not permitted. Where Health Department or Plumbing Official requires an indirect connection to sanitary system provide 50 GPM flow rate Grease Interceptor by Wade, W -5150-JCT-SC. Interceptor to be cast iron with standard coating, flow control fitting #W -5013-FC, removable baffles, 3" threaded inlet/outlet, internal air relief, double wall trap with cleanout, gasketed cover, flexible draw-off hose, shut off valve, grease accumulating hood, and fabricated steel fully enclosed housing with anti-skid cover and adjustable interceptor carrier brackets. Install recessed in floor when required. Verify with the Wawa Project Manager. Where Health Department or Plumbing Code require or allows a direct connection, Contractor to provide Grease Interceptor by Wade #W -5150-JCT. Interceptor to be cast iron with standard coating, flow control fitting #W -5012-FC, removable baffles, 2" threaded inlet/outlet, internal air relief, double wall trap with cleanout, gasketed cover, flexible draw-off hose, shut off valve, grease accumulating hood, and fabricated steel fully enclosed housing with anti-skid cover and adjustable interceptor carrier brackets. Install recessed in floor when required. Verify with th e Wawa Project Manager. 04.11 All sanitary waste and grease waste piping shall be jetted and flushed at the completion of construction to ensure that there are no blockages. Clean grease interceptor after grease waste pipe flushing. Provide written confirmation to the Wawa Project Manager that the piping is free from blockages. SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-3 March 2019 15001-05 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE 05.1 Domestic Water Service as indicated on the Site Plans and Plumbing Plans. When Domestic Water Service is to be provided via a W ater Utility, requirements shall include but not limited to, connection to the street main, curb box, water meter, and 2” main from the street to the building. 05.2 Domestic Water Service Main, Underground, from the street main to the building shall be Type “L” copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and 95/5 soldered joints. Where acceptable by the Local Authority, provide PE (Polyethylene Plastic Piping) and fittings with heat-fusion joints. Provide proper transition fitting from PE to copper inside the building. Water main from the curb box or exterior meter to the building, shall be one continuous length of piping. No fittings shall be permitted. All requirements of the Water Authority shall be coordinated and provided. 05.3 Provide main shut-off valve and hose-end drain valve inside the building at the water service entrance. 05.4 Provide Water Meter in strict accordance with Water Authority requirements. Water Meter type, accessories, installation details, and location shall be as required by the Water Authority. Coordinate the water meter location with the Site Engineer and Wawa Project Manager. 05.5 Provide and locate Backflow Preventer in strict accordance with Water Authority and Board of Health requirements. Backflow Preventer type, accessories, installation details, and location shall be as required by the Water Authority and Board of Health. When the Authority does not require a backflow preventer, provide a double check valve backflow preventer in accordance with Wawa’s requirements. All Backflow Preventers shall be provided with a strainer. As dictated by the type of Backflow Preventer, provide a drain cup and indirect waste piping. Indirect waste shall be piped to the floor drain. 05.6 Where water pressure exceeds 75 PSI, or as required by the Water Authority, provide a pressure regulating station. Water pressure regulators shall be provided in a parallel configuration to handle high and low flows. Pressure regulators shall be located directly downstream of the backflow preventer. Pressure regulators shall be Watts Model “U5- GG”, or an approved equal, provided with pressure gauge. Configuration, size, and pressure settings shall be as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. 05.7 Where water pressure falls below 50 PSI after the RPZ, a water booster pump shall be provided. Booster pump model, configuration, and location shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. 05.8 Pressure testing and sterilization of the water main shall be done in strict accordance with the local water authority’s r equirements or as prescribed in the “Florida Building Code 6th Edition (2017) Plumbing”. 15001-06 DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION 06.1 Hot and Cold Water Piping, above grade and inside the Building shall be FlowGuard Gold CTS CPVC pipe and fittings, conforming to ASTM D 2846. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured to the nominal dimension cited in the applicable ASTM standard, and be the product of one manufacturer. 06.2 Hot and Cold Water Piping, below slab, shall be “PEX” tubing, in accordance to ASTM F876 and F877. Tubing located below slab shall be one continuous piece, with no fittings permitted. Tubing below slab shall be limited to serving island fixtures only, and shall be SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-4 March 2019 installed inside PVC piping for protection. 06.3 Provide a shut-off valve above the ceiling or as noted on Drawings, for each Hot and Cold Water branch line, to each piece of equipment and/or fixture. All equipment and fixtures shall be able to be isolated. Valves shall be accessibly located, 12” above ceilings. 06.4 Shut-off valves shall be ¼ turn, 2 piece brass ball valves, standard or conventional port, with lever handle by Nibco. 06.5 Provide a pressure gauge on the domestic water main, located downstream of the backflow preventer. Pressure gauge shall be connected to the piping, locating the gauge on a backflow preventer port shall not be permitted. 06.6 Provide Armstrong "Armaflex SS" insulation ½” on all domestic hot & cold water piping, and CSR water piping. Insulation shall be a m inimum thickness of ½”. Installation, including adhesives and vapor seals, shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Increase insulation thickness per water temperature and pipe size according to Florida Building Code 6th Edition (2017) Energy Conservation. 06.7 Provide identification labels and flow arrows for all cold water, hot water, and CSR water piping. 06.8 Pressure testing and sterilization of the water distribution piping shall be done in strict accordance with the local water authority’s requirements or as prescribed in the Florida Building Code 6th Edition (2017) Plumbing. 15001-07 WELL WATER SERVICE 07.1 Well Water System: When domestic water service is not available from a local utility, water shall be provided via a well system. Well Water Contractor shall provide a complete system consisting of, but not limited to, the well drilling, well pump, pump controls, control wiring, pressure tank, pressure switch, and required piping. 07.2 The design requirements for a well water system shall include the following: (A) Well capacity shall provide a minimum flow rate of 20 GPM for 10 minutes. (B) Well Pump capacity shall be designed to provide a flow rate of 20 GPM at the outlet pressure of 60 PSI. (C) Pressure switch shall operate between 50 and 70 PSI. (D) Pressure tank shall be sized to provide a minimum draw-down capacity of 20 gallons at the 50-70 PSI pressure range. 07.3 After the well system has been installed and the piping flushed, the Well Water Contractor shall provide a water sample and test. Test results shall be forwarded to the Wawa Project Manager and Engineer for review. 07.4 Based on the water test results, Wawa will hire a consultant to provide water treatment equipment. Equipment configuration, sizing, and space requirements shall be coordinated with the Well Water Contractor and Plumbing Contractor. 07.5 Power to the well pump shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. Final power SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-5 March 2019 terminations shall be field coordinated. 15001-08 LAWN IRRIGATION WATER SERVICE 08.1 Provisions shall be made for reclaim water usage for the lawn irrigation system connection. Plumbing Contractor shall provide a 1 ½” water supply line, 1” water meter, and 1” backflow preventer. Irrigation water supply configuration and devices shall be located as shown on the Plumbing Drawings. Plumbing Contractor shall extend the Irrigation water supply to a point on the site as directed by the General Contractor and/or Wawa Project Manager. 08.2 The Irrigation system supply configuration, as shown on the Plumbing Drawings, is bas ed on an anticipated flow rate of 20 GPM, at 40 PSI. Flow rates or pressure requirements, greater than those listed, shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to system installation. 08.3 General and Plumbing Contractors shall coordinate the option of an alternate water source for the Irrigation system, with the Wawa Project Manager. Options shall include a separate connection to the public water system or an individual well water system. Design of the alternate water supply source, meter requirements, backflow preventer requirements, and sizing shall be coordinated with the Irrigation Contractor and Engineer. 15001-10 PLUMBING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES Note: All plumbing fixtures to be lead-free 10.1 Toilets and Flush Valves: (A) Fixture and flush valve shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No substitutions shall be permitted. (B) Seat shall be “Heavy Duty” plastic with stainless steel hinges. (C) Flush valve sensor mounting height shall be coordinated with the grab bar location. Sensor shall be mounted above and clear of the grab bar. (D) Fixtures and installation shall meet the ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1 requirements for people with disabilities. 10.2 Urinals and Flush Valves: (A) Fixture and flush valve shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No substitutions shall be permitted. (B) Fixture rough-in and rim elevation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. (C) Fixtures and installation shall meet the ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1 requirements for people with disabilities. 10.3 Lavatories, Faucets and Accessories: (A) Fixture, faucet, and accessories shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No substitutions shall be permitted. SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-6 March 2019 (B) Fixture rough-in and rim elevation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. (C) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted. (D) Provide chrome plated brass tailpiece and trap. PVC piping shall not be permitted. (E) Waste piping and supplies shall be insulated. Provide McGuire ‘Pro-Wrap’ insulation kit for each fixture. (F) Fixtures and installation shall meet the ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1 requirements for people with disabilities. 10.4 Mop Receptor, Faucet, and Accessories: (A) Fixture, faucet, and accessories shall be as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. (B) Provide with hose and hose holder, mop hanger, and vinyl bumper guard. (C) Faucet shall be set at 36” above finished floor. 10.5 Water Heaters: (A) Provide unit(s) and accessories as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. (B) Substitutions shall be permitted as indicated in the Plumbing Schedules. (C) Provide complete installation including shut-off valves, unions, T&P relief valve and drain, drip pan and drain, thermal expansion tank, and vacuum relief fitting. (D) Coordinate electrical requirements and connections with the Electrical Contractor. 10.6 Floor Sinks and Floor Drains: (A) Provide fixtures and accessories as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No substitutions shall be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. (B) Floor Sink and Floor Drain rims shall be set flush with the finished floor, unless specifically required by the Local Authority to be raised. (C) Contractor shall field verify all locations and verify rim elevations with the General Contractor for finished floor elevation and coordination of equipment. (D) Where PVC drains are not permitted by the Local Authorities, Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate alternate fixtures and submittals with the Engineer prior to installation. (E) Floor sink grates, as required, shall be arranged so the “open” section shall be located at the rear of the fixture. 10.7 Safe Wastes and Hub Drains: (A) Provide fixtures and accessories as specified on the Plumbing Drawings. No substitutions shall be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-7 March 2019 (B) Safe Waste and Hub Drain rims shall be set 1” above finished floor. (C) Contractor shall field verify all locations and verify rim elevations with the General Contractor for finished floor elevation and coordination of equipment. 10.8 Refrigerated Sandwich Station, Eq. B1 and B3: (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa. (B) Provide Indirect Waste piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. 10.9 Hot Food Table, Eq. B9: (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa. (B) Provide Indirect Waste piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. (C) Provide hot water supplies and accessories as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. Accessories shall include, ball valve, backflow preventer and braided steel tubing. 10.10 Refrigerated Deli Display Case: NOT USED. 10.11 Rethermalizer, Eq. B12: (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa. (B) Provide Indirect Waste piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. Two(2) indirect waste connections are required, and shall be run independent of each other. Refer to manufacturer’s installation instructions. (C) Provide hot water supplies and accessories as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. Accessories shall include ball valve, backflow preventor and braided steel tubing. 10.12 Sink (Countertop, Coffee and Prep. Areas), Eq. B20: (A) Fixture and faucet furnished by Wawa. Plumbing Contractor shall provide installation and accessories as required. (B) Verify waste piping configuration (Hard Pi ped or Indirect Waste) as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. (C) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted. (D) Provide specified sink strainer, trap adapter, union fitting, P trap, and mission band coupling kit from DN Supply Co. Kit to be purchased from Ed Ronayne at 610 626 0299 for a cost of $ 145.00 including shipping. Allow one week delivery time. No substitutions will be accepted by Wawa Project Managers. NOTE: Plumbing contractor to provide copper tubing necessary to complete assembly of the trap from the sink to the drain located in the wall. 10.13 Sink (Counter Top), Eq. B24 (NOT USED): SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-8 March 2019 10.14 Sink (Counter Top, coffee & Full Service Drinks area), Eq. B25 and B53: (A) Fixture and faucet furnished by Wawa. Plumbing Contractor shall provide installation and accessories as required. (B) Verify waste piping configuration (Hard Piped or Indirect Waste) as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. (C) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted. (D) Provide soldered DWV copper waste assembly, tailpiece and trap. Provide removable fittings at the fixture connections and at the PVC coupling at wall. Chrome plated brass fittings with slip joints and PVC piping shall not be permitted. (E) Provide clean out plug at trap. 10.15 Coffee Brewers, Eq. B26: (A) Equipment provided by Wawa. (B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information. 10.16 Cappuccino Machines, Eq. B29: (A) Equipment provided by Wawa. (B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information. 10.17 Refrigerated Open Display Case, Eq. C3: (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa. (B) Indirect Waste piping shall be provided by the Refrigeration Contractor. Run piping to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. 10.18 Drop-In Refrigerator (Coffee Condiment Counter), Eq. C17: (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa. (B) Provide Indirect Waste piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. 10.19 Reach-In Freezer, Eq. C19: (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa (B) Indirect Waste piping shall be provided by the Refrigeration Contractor. Run piping to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. 10.20 Soda & Ice Dispenser, Eq. C22: (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa. (B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information. SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-9 March 2019 10.21 Frozen Carbonated Beverage Dispenser, Eq. C23: (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa. (B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information. 10.22 Refrigerated Island Display Case, Eq. C3 (A) Equipment furnished by Wawa (B) Indirect Waste piping as required. Run piping to drain indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. 10.23 Carbonator, Eq. D3: (A) Equipment provided by Wawa. (B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information. 10.24 CSR Water Filtration Unit, Eq. D7: (A) Equipment provided by Wawa. (B) Refer to the CSR Specification for supporting information. 10.25 Power Wash Unit, Eq. D8: (A) Equipment and accessories provided by Wawa, through Hotsy Equipment Company. Hotsy Contact: Jim Turley @ 800-344-6879. (B) Power Wash Outlet Boxes furnished by Wawa, installed by the Plumbing Contractor. Contractor shall coordinate exact number of outlet boxes and locations. (C) Piping into the outlet boxes shall be located in the top of the box, centered, 1” in from the left side. Extend threaded piping 1” into the box. Outlet valve and connection provided by equipment installer. (D) Piping shall be ½”, schedule 80, galvanized steel pipe and threaded fittings. No pipe dope shall be permitted. (E) Piping located in exterior walls shall be insulated, and run tight to the inside of the wall. Piping run above the ceiling does not require insulation. (F) Multiple Outlet Configurations: Provide piped manifold with a valved branch line for each box. Valves shall be high pressure, carbon steel, ¼ turn ball valves. (G) Provide a ½” valved cold water outlet, backflow preventor, and ½” threaded male hose connection as detailed on the Plumbing Drawings. Connection to the water outlet provided by the equipment installer. (H) Provide a ½” threaded female fitting for the power wash discharge connection. Connection provided by the equipment installer. 10.26 Emergency Eyewash: NOT USED SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-10 March 2019 10.27 Three Compartment Sink, Eq. F3: (A) Fixture, faucet, strainers, and lever waste outlets furnished by Wawa. Plumbing Contractor shall provide installation and accessories as required. (B) Verify waste piping configuration (Hard Piped or Indirect Waste) as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. (C) When discharging through Indirect Waste Piping, the piping shall be arranged to spill into the “open” section of the floor sink grate, with beveled end, and required air gap. Each compartment shall be individually piped. (D) Waste piping shall be “DWV” copper or PVC piping. (E) Water supplies shall be hard piped, with ¼ turn ball valves. (F) Lever Waste Operation: Lever arms shall point to the right in the open position and rotate clockwise to the left closed position. (G) Faucet handles shall be aligned to be parallel to the wall when in the closed position. 10.28 Hand Sink (Wash Area), Eq. F5: (A) Provide Krowne Model #HS-9, stainless steel, wall mounted, hand sink with faucet and strainer. Provide with H-107, stainless steel side panels. (B) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted. (C) Provide chrome plated brass tailpiece and trap. PVC piping shall not be permitted. (D) Faucet handles shall be aligned to be perpendicular to the floor when in the closed position. 10.29 Hand Sink ADA (Prep. Area), Eq. F6 (NOT USED): 10.30 Hand Sink (Countertop, Coffee and Prep. Areas), Eq. F7 (NOT USED): 10.31 Hand Sink ADA (Prep. Area), Eq. F8: (A) Provide BK Resources Model # BKHS-ADA-S-P, stainless steel, wall mounted, hand sink with faucet, wrist handles and strainer. G.C. to prove acrylic side splashes as required (detailed in drawings) (B) Alternate: BKHS-ADA-S. (C) Provide chrome plated brass angle stops with chrome plated copper risers and chrome plated escutcheons. Plastic or Braided tubing shall not be permitted. (D) Provide chrome plated brass tailpiece and trap. PVC piping shall not be permitted. (E) Faucet handles shall be aligned to be perpendicular to the floor when in the closed position. SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-11 March 2019 10.32 Garbage Disposal: (A) Provide Garbage Disposal when indicated on the Plumbing Drawings and/or as required by the Local Authority. (B) Garbage Disposal shall be In-Sink-Erator, model #555ss, 120V-60 HZ, single phase, ¾ HP motor. (C) Coordinate electrical requirements and installation with the Electrical Contractor. Electrical contractor shall provide power outlet and switch. (D) Provide a cap on the dishwasher connection outlet. 10.33 Water Softener: (A) Kinetico CP216sOD 15001-11 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 11.1 Wall Hydrant, Stucco and Stone Veneer Finished Exterior Walls: (A) Provide wall hydrants as located on the Plumbing Drawings. (B) Wall Hydrants shall be Jay R. Smith, Figure 5509QT-SAP-RB (Rough Bronze Box Face), automatic draining with ¾” vacuum breaker hose connection. (C) Cold water supply shall be provided with a backflow preventer as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. 11.2 Wall Hydrant, Gas Canopy: (A) Provide wall hydrants as located on the Plumbing Drawings. (B) Wall Hydrants shall be Jay R. Smith, Figure 5618, automatic draining with ¾” vacuum breaker hose connection. (C) Cold water supply shall be provided with a backflow preventer as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. 11.3 Trap Primers: (A) Provide trap primers as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. (B) Trap primers shall be “Precision Plumbing Products” Prime-Rite Model P-1. Substitutions shall be permitted if approved by Engineer. (C) When a single primer serves multiple fixtures, provide trap primer with a distribution unit. SECTION 15001 PLUMBING 15-12 March 2019 15001-12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: 12.1 The Plumbing Engineer will visit the site to perform three (3) Punch List Inspections, determining the quality and completeness of the plumbing installation. The first and second punch list visits shall be conducted prior to the “CO” date. During the first and second punch list visits, the General Contractor shall receive a hand written list of items requiring attention. The third punch list visit shall be conducted after the store has been opened, to verify that the items listed in the previous visits have been addressed and completed. If additional punch list visits are required due to the Contractor’s inability to address and complete all items, the costs associated for the additional visits shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and will be deducted by Wawa from the Contractor’s Final Payment. 12.2 As-Built Drawing: The Plumbing Contractor shall maintain one (1) set o f the latest issued Plumbing Drawings to reflect the actual piping installations, conditions and connections of all equipment and devices, and any other changes to the original design documents. All deviations and/or modifications shall be clearly indicated. As-Built drawings shall be delivered to the Wawa Project Manager at the end of construction. 12.3 Maintenance Manuals: The Plumbing Contractor shall provide one (1) copy of the Manufacturer’s Maintenance Manuals and Installation Instructions for each p iece of equipment provided, to the Wawa Project Manager at the end of construction. END SECTION 15001 SECTION 15002 EVERPURE WATER TREATMENT (CSR UNIT) 15-13 March 2019 15002-01 WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT (CSR ) 01.1 CSR system shall be an “Everpure” Dual High Flow System. Configured and packaged in accordance with Wawa’s requirements. 01.2 CSR system shall be an eight (8) cartridge system, consisting of the following components: Model 202 Parallel pre-filter w/ inlet valve and pressure gauge, Model E20 pre-filter w/ ec210 cartridges, High Flow “MC” filters, Model SR-X Scale Inhibitor (remote mount), Model EV9336-50 Surge tank w/ quick-disconnect hose connection, and shielded tubing. 01.3 CSR system shall be furnished by Wawa and installed by the Plumbing Contractor. Coordinate equipment delivery with the Wawa Project Manager. 15002-02 CONFIGURATION 02.1 CSR system shall be configured with two (2) ¾” water outlets. One outlet shall be located upstream of the SR-X cartridge and one outlet located downstream of the SR-X cartridge. 02.2 Equipment connections fed via a ¾” manifold from the upstream outlet shall include the iced-tea dispenser frozen carbonated beverage dispenser (FCB), soda carbonator(s), and soda still-water. 02.3 Equipment connections fed via a ¾” manifold from the downstream outlet shall include the coffee brewers, roll oven, hot cappuccino makers, smoothie ice and all icemakers. 02.4 Refer to piping details on the Plumbing Drawings for outlet configuration, outlet mounting heights, backflow preventer requirements, and miscellaneous notes. 15002-03 LOCATION AND MOUNTING 03.1 CSR system shall be located as indicated on the Plumbing Drawings. When drawings do not clearly indicate the location, verify with the Wawa Project Manager. 03.2 A minimum clearance of 3” shall be provided below the bottom of the cartridges to allow for proper removal. 03.3 The General Contractor shall provide a shelf for the pressure tank. Shelf shall be located adjacent to the CSR system as shown on drawings. 15002-04 PLUMBING 04.1 Refer to the plumbing specification section for piping materials and installation requirements. 04.2 Plumbing Contractor shall provide an “express” 1” cold water supply to the CSR system. Connection to the domestic cold water main shall be made directly downstream of the water meter and backflow preventer, as the first take-off. No additional fixtures or equipment shall be permitted to be connected to the CSR system water supply. 04.3 Where stores are provided with a well water service, the CSR express main shall be SECTION 15002 EVERPURE WATER TREATMENT (CSR UNIT) 15-14 March 2019 connected downstream of the well system pressure tank. 04.4 Plumbing Contractor shall provide the individual equipment connection outlets as indicated on the drawings, including ball valve shut-offs, and backflow preventers. 04.5 Final equipment termination, including the flexible tubing from the outlet to the equipment, shall be provided by others. 04.6 Piping, tubing, and fittings located downstream of the backflow preventers serving the soda carbonators and frozen carbonated beverage dispensers shall be plastic or stainless steel. No copper or brass components shall be permitted. 15002-05 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) 05.1 CSR system shall be monitored by the BAS for water flow and water pressure. 05.2 Lawn Irrigation Water Meter: Provide a 1” water meter, located in the water service room, on the cold water supply line. Meter shall be configured for 1 pulse per gallon. Meter shall be, Master Meter, Model MJ09-1CH-AAA-2, with no additional substitutions. Meter shall be monitored by the BAS system. 05.3 Domestic water Meter: Provide 1-1/2” water meter, located in the water service room, on the cold water supply line. Meter shall be configured for 1 pulse per 10 gallons. Meter shall be Master Meter Model MJ10-1CH-AAA-2, with no substitutions. Meter shall be monitored by the BAS system. 05.4 Provide a ½’ threaded outlet for the connection of a pressure sensor, on the CSR system outlet piping. Pressure sensor shall be furnished by the BAS Contractor, installed by the Plumbing Contractor. 05.5 Refer to the water riser diagram for additional information and location requirements. 15002-06 TESTING AND ACTIVATION 06.1 Activation drain tubing supplied with the unit shall be coiled, tied and attached to the filter assembly, near the drain outlet valve. 06.2 Drain tubing shall only be connected to the outlet when needed for the activation of new filter cartridges. 06.3 Filter activation procedure shall be in strict accordance with the requirements listed in the Everpure product specifications, provided with each unit assembly. END SECTION 15002 SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-15 March 2019 15003-01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01.1 It is the intent of these Specifications to define a total air conditioning system. As such, these Specifications cover the entire system, including air handling equipment, refrigeration equipment, heating equipment, air distribution equipment and air diffusion equipment. 01.2 The work to be done under these Specifications and the Drawings consists of furnishing all equipment, materials, labor and services, and performing all operations to complete the mechanical construction work for this project. Any work not specifically covered by these Specifications or indicated on the Mechanical/Electrical Drawings, but necessary to complete or perfect any part of this installation in a substantial manner, shall be provided without extra cost to Wawa. 01.3 The term "furnish" shall mean to obtain and supply to the job site. The term "install" shall mean to fix in position and connect for use. The term "provide" shall mean to furnish and install. 01.4 The Drawings indicate diagrammatically the extent, general character and location of the work included. Offsets or changes in duct shape to avoid structural or other interferences, and work indicated but having minor details obviously omitted shall be provided without extra cost. 01.5 Any changes and/or modifications must be reviewed and approved by the Architect or Engineer and Wawa's Project Manager prior to construction. 01.6 Remove all trash, debris and demolition material from premises at the end of each work day 01.7 Schedule all work, cutting and building service interruptio ns with Project Manager prior to completing work. 01.8 Contractor shall provide all roof openings, roof mounting curbs, flashings, auxiliary steel, threaded rods, vibration isolators, turnbuckles, etc., to support his equipment on or from the structure. 01.9 The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate the electrical characteristics of all mechanical equipment with the Electrical Contractor. 01.10 Provide temporary filters on return air grilles from time of startup and prior to air balancing. 01.11 For Remodel Stores Only: When reusing existing equipment, ductwork, grilles and diffusers, Mechanical Contractor shall follow current Wawa Mechanical Specifi cations and Drawing Notes. All re-used equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and sanitized. 01.12 Mechanical Contractor shall ensure that all manufacturer’s installation and clearance recommendations are followed. Verify with the Wawa Project Manager if there is a discrepancy. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-16 March 2019 15003-02 SUMMARY OF WORK 02.1 Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of complete HVAC and control system as indicated. The work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: (A) Provide complete and operational mechanical systems, equipment, and materials as indicated on the Drawings. (B) Provide air distribution systems to include roof top unit, exhaust fans, automatic temperature controls, sheet metal ductwork, insulation, flexible ductwork, diffusers, return air grilles, transfer ducts, etc. (C) Provide systems of temperature control to assure sequences of operation as specified herein. Include all power, control and interlocking 120 volt wiring where required. Provide a Registered Electrician to perform all 120 volt wiring as a direct Subcontractor for this work. Provide new control devices as required and indicated. For all Remodeled Stores provide pan leak detector and local alarm with light and buzzer, and associated wiring. (D) Furnish and install insulation for piping, and ductwork as specified herein. (E) Provide control system testing and commissioning. (F) Provide written operating instructions, equipment cut sheets and a detailed Preventive Maintenance Report explaining which thermostats control which systems, frequency of changing filters, correct sizes noted, and location of filters. This Preventive Maintenance Report must be signed upon completion and given to Project Manager for distribution. This report is also to be signed by the Store Manager representing his understanding of the basic operations of HVAC systems in that particular store. (G) Provide exhaust fans, etc., as indicated on the plans. (H) Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall provide a certified Air Ba lance Report for all diffusers, exhaust fans, controls and equipment. All systems shall be balanced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and W awa’s Project Manager. Balancing test must be executed within five (5) days of start -up and submitted to the Wawa Project Manager within ten (10) days. (I) The maximum flexible duct length permitted is 8'-0". This ductwork shall be installed without kinks or 90 degree bends. If a 90 degree bend is required, provide rigid ductwork and a rigid elbow with insulation up through that point. Provide 1", 18 GA, flat metal support bands mid-span of all flex duct runs. (J) Coordinate location of ductwork, air devices and equipment with light fixtures, sprinkler piping, piping, etc. and Architectural features. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-17 March 2019 02.2 The Contractor shall furnish a schedule indicating time required from receipt of order to completion of the work. Time is of the essence, and earliest possible completion time is required. Verify with the Wawa Project Manager if required in Remodel Stores. 02.3 Contractors shall provide 4 (four) sets (for each A/C unit) of 30% efficient pleated media replacement filters for the A/C units. All filters shall be in place at startup and then changed at the air balancing stage. The extra 2 (two) sets of filters as noted shall be delivered to the Wawa Project Manager, and shall sign a proof of delivery. 02.4 Remodel Stores Only: The existing mechanical systems are to be inspected prior to bidding. Recommendations are to be submitted to the Wawa Project Manager prior to commencing work. Any questions, changes or recommendations to new installations as per Drawings and Specifications are to be authorized in writing between the Wawa Project Manager and General Contractor. Architect should be immediately consulted and advised of the same. 15003-03 PROJECT COORDINATION 03.1 It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify field conditions at the site and notify the Wawa Project Manager of any discrepancies prior to awarding of bid. 03.2 Any changes and/or modifications must be reviewed and approved by the Architect, Engineer and Wawa Project Manager prior to bid award. 03.3 DO NOT OPERATE NEW HVAC EQUIPMENT TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEAT AND COOLING DURING NEW CONSTRUCTION OR REMODELING. PERMANENT COMPONENT DAMAGE AND PREMATURE COMPONENT FAILURE CAN RESULT. OPERATION OF THE HVAC EQUIPMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION VIOLATES THE CONDITIONS FOR THE WARRANTY AND CAN BE DETECTED DURING TEAR DOWN FOR FACTORY INSPECTION. 15003-04 CUTTING AND PATCHING 04.1 Cutting and patching of all general building components shall be performed by the Contractor, utilizing workmen skilled in the particular trades involved, unless otherwise agreed upon with the General Contractor. 04.2 Coordinate and schedule with the Wawa Project Manager and General Contractor the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. 04.3 Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. 04.4 Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical and electrical installations. 04.5 No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-18 March 2019 04.6 Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical and electrical e quipment and materials required or indicated. 04.1 Effectively protect all materials and equipment from dust, dirt and damage until final acceptance. Close all pipe and equipment openings during construction with suitable protective covering for equipment and materials before, during and following installation. Provide new materials and equipment to replace similar items damaged by Mechanical Contractor without additional cost to Wawa. All open ductwork must also be covered and protected against construction dust, etc. Cleaning of all ductwork and equipment shall be required if ductwork and equipment are not protected during construction. 04.8 Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. 04.9 Provide sheet metal flashings at all drywall and ceiling penetrations. 15003-05 REFERENCED STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 05.1 Entire installation, including materials, equipment and workmanship, shall conform with all applicable laws, codes and regulations of municipal, state and federal authorities, also the latest accepted edition of the Florida Building Code, Florida Building Code 6th Edition (2017) Mechanical, National Electrical Code, ASHRAE, NFPA and SMACNA Standards and other regulatory bodies having jurisdiction over this class of work. Where applicable, materials and equipment shall bear stamps or seals of ARI, ASME and, UL and ETL. 05.2 Permits: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, approvals and pay all related fees. 05.3 Safety: During construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing all his employees with safe and healthy working conditions as prescribed in the "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor. 05.4 Secure and deliver to the Wawa Project Manager all certificates of compliance required by the local authorities. 15003-06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 06.1 All Mechanical Contractor's materials, equipment and workmanship shall be guaranteed in writing for one (1) year after final acceptance by the Wawa Project Manager. 06.2 Provide to the Wawa Project Manager the manufacturer's extended five (5) year warranty on all compressors and ten (10) years on all gas burners, heat exchangers and furnaces. 06.3 Contractor shall unconditionally guarantee, in writing, all equipment and workmanship for a period of one year from date of acceptance of system by Wawa unless otherwise specified, and to include all parts and labor, with an additional second through fifth year warranty on the compressor and logic module to include parts only. Contractor shall SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-19 March 2019 provide free service for all equipment involved in contract during this first year period, unless deemed otherwise by the Wawa Project Manager. 06.4 The warranty period for all systems and equipment shall start at the Store “Opening Day”. 15003-07 SUBMITTALS 07.1 Shop Drawings: Mechanical Contractor shall submit electronically, all equipment, piping, and automatic temperature controls to Architect and Engineer. Electronic copies of the submittals shall be accepted. All submittals shall be properly organized, clean copies, with model numbers clearly identified. Maintenance Manuals: Mechanical Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of operating and maintenance manuals, neatly presented in a 3-ring binder. Information shall be provided for all equipment and devices, including wiring and control diagrams, cut sheets, sequence of operations, warranty, etc. In addition, provide copies of the approved air balance report and Lennox EOC check list. 07.2 During construction, the Contractor will maintain a record se t of installation prints. He will record on these prints all deviations from the contract Drawings in sizes, locations and details. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall deliver these prints to the Wawa Project Manager. 07.3 Contractor shall be responsible for checking of proposed equipment prior to submitting to Architect and Engineer. The result of any re-designing caused by a substitution or lack of coordination shall be borne by the Contractor. All substitutions or deviations from the specified equipment shall be highlighted in the submittals and indicated as such. 07.4 Engineer shall review a limit of two submittals review periods per equipment or device. Costs to Engineer for review of additional submittals shall be borne by Contractor. If equipment is installed that is not approved the Contractor shall bear all costs related to replace said equipment. 07.5 Mechanical equipment shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Substitutions shall be prohibited, except as listed below. Where such substitution is allowed, and the substituted item requires modifications to the system or surrounding spaces, the Contractor shall pay for all costs involved such as Architect’s and Engineer's fees and any additional construction costs for his own work and that of other divisions. Equipment shall not be purchased, or work started until Shop Drawings are approved. (A) Roof Top Unit shall be: Lennox Hi-Efficiency “ENERGENCE” Series units. Substitutions shall be prohibited. National account pricing shall be verified. (B) In-Line Cabinet and Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans shall be: Penn Ventilator Company or Greenheck or Cook. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-20 March 2019 15003-08 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 08.1 All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the type and capacity of each piece of equipment used, placed in a position for complete and unobstructed service with 36" minimum clearance in front of electrical access panels. 08.2 Coordinate the installation of mechanical and electrical equipment and materials with other building components. 08.3 Coordinate with General Contractor for all chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical and electrical installations. 08.4 Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices as they are constructed. 08.5 Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and eq uipment for efficient flow of the work. 08.6 Dielectric fittings shall be used where dissimilar metals are joined. 08.7 Filters are to be accessible for replacement, for all HVAC equipment. Filters are to be accessible from within the same room or area in which their respective equipment is installed. 15003-09 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 09.1 All equipment, piping, and ductwork shall be identified with plastic pipe markers and plastic duct markers conforming to ANSI A13.1. Equipment shall be identified with the tag number in a neat legible fashion. Pipe and duct markers shall be applied every fifteen (15) feet of horizontal run or less and every eight (8) feet of vertical rise. 09.2 All mechanical sensors, controls and switches shall be clearly labeled with the equipment they control or with which they interact. Also include, as part of the label, the area that the respective equipment serves or affects. 15003-10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 10.1 This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral or separately mounted part of packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to motors, starters, and disconnect switches, controls and control wiring furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment, or separately mounted. 10.2 Unless otherwise noted, all electrically driven equipment provided or furnished by Mechanical Contractor shall include NEMA motors, combination starters, pushbuttons, relays, and all other controlling devices required for proper and satisfactory operation of the equipment. 10.3 Starters for packaged equipment may be mounted on a common frame at the factory. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-21 March 2019 Deliver loose starters to Electrical Contractor, who will mount them. The Electrical Contractor will provide power wiring from power source through the starters and connect to the motors. 10.4 Mechanical Contractor shall provide all control wiring (minimum 18 gauge for low voltage) and wiring devices required for control it ems, such as float switches, wall switches, pressure and vacuum switches, alternators, aquastats, thermostats and interlock wiring. Provide over-current protection for control circuits. All wiring shall be sized per NEC codes. 10.5 Note that for single phase across the line equipment, Electrical Contractor will provide power wiring from power source to the motor through a motor switch and all intervening control devices. Control devices shall be furnished and installed by Mechanical Contractor. Motor switch shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor. 10.6 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all remote indicating lights and remote keypads for resetting of smoke detectors. Smoke detectors shall be factory mounted in the roof top air conditioning unit by the unit manufacturer. The Mechanical Contractor shall also wire all devices indicated above. The Security and Fire Alarm Contractor shall tie into the smoke detector alarm contacts and wire them to the fire alarm system. The smoke detectors shall be as manufactured by System Sensor. Provide photoelectric sensor for the supply and return air. 15003-11 MECHANICAL INSULATION 11.1 Provide ductwork with fiberglass board insulation for air conditioning supply and return ducts exposed to view or to weather. Provide blanket insulation for interior supply, return and exhaust ductwork. All duct insulation, including laminated jackets, mastic, sealants and adhesives shall conform to ASTM E84. All ductwork insulation shall have a vapor barrier. (A) Flame spread: 25 or less. (B) Smoke developed: 50 or less. 11.2 Fibrous glass insulation shall be: (A) Board Insulation: Density of 3.0 PCF, ASTM C612, thermal conductivity (K value at 75º F) of 0.26., with a metal foil scrim jacket. (B) Blanket Insulation: Density of 1.5 PCF, ASTM C553, thermal conductivity (K value at 75º F) of 0.25, with a metal foil scrim jacket. 11.3 Insulate ductwork with fibrous glass insulation, as specified, seal joints in the insulation vapor barrier to form a continuous shield as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. All ductwork insulation shall have a vapor barrier. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-22 March 2019 (A) All ductwork exposed to the weather shall be insulated with 4” thick rigid board insulation with vapor barrier. Use multiple layers as required to achie ve desired thickness. (B) All interior exposed to view ductwork shall be insulated with 1" rigid fiberglass board with foil and scrim facing. (C) Install minimum 1-1/2" thick blanket reinforced foil faced type insulation for all interior concealed ductwork installed below the trusses. For round duct, a fiberglass insulation sleeve may be used so long as all end seams are sealed as set forth in paragraph ‘G’ of this same specification section. (D) Install a minimum of 3" thick blanket reinforced foil faced type insulation (use multiple layers as required to achieve the desired thickness) for all ductwork located in the truss spaces, and all areas within the building, but outside of the building's insulation envelope. (E) Provide wire banding to support wrap insulation on 24” centers using vinyl coated wire or aluminum ceiling suspension wire. (F) All take-off collars to flexible duct runs shall have their insulation covering properly marked to denote where the manual damper adjustment lever pokes through along with permanent hanging tags from the adjustment levers. (G) Fiberglass duct wrap shall only be applied on tightly sealed, clean, dry sheet metal duct. Insulation shall be wrapped around duct and a 2” foil face flap shall completely overlap all adjacent insulation. Adjacent sections of insulation shall be snugly butted with the circumferential 2” flap overlapping, stapled and sealed. Seams shall be stapled approximately 6” on center with outward clinching staples, then sealed with two coats of vapor retarder mastic reinforced with one layer of 4” wide, open weave glass fabric. 11.4 All exterior ductwork shall be protected by a prefabricated self -adhering, sheet-type waterproofing membrane as manufactured by Polyguard Products, Inc. or MFM Building Products Corporation. (A) The above referenced products shall be Polyguard’s “Alumaguard 60” or MFM’s “Flex-Clad 400”. (B) The waterproofing membrane shall only be applied after the ductwork has been properly sealed and properly insulated. The membrane shall not be used as a means for affixing the board insulation to the ductwork. (C) The waterproofing membrane shall be applied on pinned or banded fiberglass board duct insulation after the insulation surface has been properly cleaned. The insulation surface shall be dirt free, dry and free of all foreign materials. (D) The waterproofing membrane shall be installed so that all seams have a minimum SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-23 March 2019 4” overlap. The membrane shall first be applied to the underside of the duct with enough material to wrap up the sides of the duct a minimum of 4”. The membrane should then be applied to the sides of the duct with enough material to wrap over the top of the duct a minimum of 4”, as well as covering the bottom piece of lapping membrane. Finally the top section of mem brane shall be applied so that 4” minimum of membrane shall lap down over each side. (E) Clean glove shall be used during the waterproofing installation so as to prevent hand oils from contaminating the overlap areas. Waterproofing membrane shall be applied when insulation surface temperature is above 50º F. When the surface temperature is below 50º F, use a hot air heat gun to warm the surface of the adhesive as the membrane is applied. (F) Coordinate the insulation thickness and the A/C unit locations to provide service access to the intake hood. 11.5 Refrigerant piping insulation shall be "Armstrong Armaflex" or "Owen's Corning Ware", flexible foamed plastic, unicellular elastomeric material conforming to ASTM C534. Density of 5 to 7 PCF, a thermal conductivity (K value at 75º F) of 0.28 max., operating temperature range of –20º F to 200º F, and a self -extinguishing fire resistance rating in accordance with ASTM D1692. Provide the manufacturer’s recommended ultra violet protective coating on all insulation exposed to the weather. Flexclad or aluminum guard may be used as a weather and UV protection coat. Use insulation sealant at all joints and seams. 11.6 Condensate drain piping shall be insulated with 3/4" thick "Armstrong Armaflex" or “Owen’s Corning Ware” pipe insulation where routed inside the building thermal envelope. Insulation shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less in accordance with ASTM E89. Use insulation sealant at all joints and seams. 15003-12 CONDENSATE PIPING 12.1 All condensate drain piping shall be type "L" copper with wrought fittings and 95/5 solder. Schedule 40, PVC piping is acceptable where permitted by the local code official. 12.2 Pitch condensate drain piping ¼" per 10 feet in direction of flow. Provide a minimum 4" deep trap at each unit, refer to the equipment manufacturers' recommendations. 12.3 The Contractor shall use eccentric reducers in horizontal piping. 15003-13 REFRIGERANT PIPING 13.1 The Contractor shall provide and install the refrigerant piping required by the equipment that is provided. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed for piping design and installation. All refrigerant specialties recommended by the condensing unit manufacturer shall be provided. The Contractor shall use copper pipe types K, L and M hard temper ASTM B88. Solder joints in copper tubing with type of solder recommended by the manufacturer. Braze joints in refrigerant R-410A refrigerant tubing systems with SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-24 March 2019 the following exceptions: solder joints at valves, controls and other locations where excessive heat transfer could cause damage, with a recommended soft solder metal. 13.2 Refrigerant piping shall be hard drawn type copper tubing especially prepared for refrigerant systems with silver solder fittings. Refrigerant piping shall be installed as follows: (A) Pitch all horizontal lines in direction of gas flow at least ½ inch per 10 feet of pipe. (B) Provide a trap on piping for every 15 feet of lift, refer to equipment manuf acturers' recommendations. (C) A minimum of 500 microns vacuum, verified with an electronic gauge shall be pulled on the system and maintained for six hours. 13.3 Pipe sizes shall be verified with the unit manufacturer to assure delivery of capacities. 13.4 The Contractor shall provide and install refrigerant tube dry sealed, soft annealed ASTM B88 for all underground applications. 15003-14 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING/COOLING UNIT 14.1 General: The following specification applies for all Packaged Electric Rooftop Heating/Cooling Units. Units shall be dedicated down flow or horizontal airflow as indicated on the Drawings. Operating range shall be between 115º F and 0º F cooling as standard from the factory for all units. Cooling performance shall be rated in a ccordance with DOE and/or ARI testing procedures. All units shall be factory assembled, internally wired, fully charged with R-410-A and 100 percent run-tested before leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for simplified identification. Units shall be UL listed and labeled. 14.2 Units shall be as scheduled on Mechanical Drawings. Packaged Air Handling Units shall be: Lennox Hi-Efficiency L Series units. Contractor shall coordinate the actual fit and clearances with the equipment in the equipment pockets on the roof. 14.3 Casing: Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel with 1" insulation. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Unit's surface shall be tested 500 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet construction shall allow for all maintenance on one side of the unit. Service panels shall be provided with hinged, tool - less access while providing a water and air tight seal. The indoor air section shall be insulated with fire resistant, permanent, odorless glass fiber material. The downflow unit's base pan shall have no penetrations within the perimeter of the curb other than t he raised 1-1/8" high supply/return openings to provide an added water integrity precaution, if the condensate drain backs up. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting. 14.4 Unit top: The top cover shall be one piece or where seams exist, it shall be double hemmed and gasket sealed to prevent water leakage. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-25 March 2019 14.5 Roof Curb: The roof curb shall be designed to mate with a downflow or horizontal flow unit and provide support and a watertight installation when installed prop erly. The roof curb design shall allow field-fabricated rectangular supply/return ductwork to be connected directly to the curb. Curb design shall comply with NRCA requirements. Curb shall ship knocked down for field assembly and include wood nailer strips. 14.6 Filters: Two inch, 30% pleated throw-away filters shall be standard on all units. Filters shall be factory supplied. One complete extra set of filters shall be furnished to the Owner. 14.7 Compressors: All units shall be direct-drive hermetic, reciprocating or scroll type compressors with centrifugal oil pump providing positive lubrication to moving parts. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage. External high pressure cutout shall be provided on 5 to 7 ½ ton models. Crankcase heater, internal temperature and current - sensitive motor overloads shall be included for maximum protection. Compressors shall have internal spring isolation and sound muffling to minimize vibration transmission and noise. Low pressure switches shall be standard. Units shall have low ambient controls for cooling operation down to 0F. 14.8 Refrigerant Circuits: Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orific e expansion devices, service pressure ports and refrigerant line filter driers factory installed as standard. An area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers. 14.9 Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Internally finned 3/8" copper tubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum plate fin shall be standard. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The evaporator coil and condenser coil shall be leak tested to 200 psig and pressure tested to 450 psig. Provide coil guards on the condenser coil section. Provide factory applied, phenolic coating for corrosion protection on condenser coils for all units located within 5 miles of large bodies of salt water such as ocean or and bay and all 12.5 ton models. 14.10 Heating: Units under 5 tons shall have a single stage heat option. The 6 and 7 ½ ton units shall have either single or two stage heating options and the 8 ½ through 25 ton units shall have two stage heating. 14.11 Outdoor Fans: The outdoor fans shall be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position. The fan motor(s) shall be permanently lubricated and have built-in thermal overload protection. 14.12 Indoor Fans: The 3 to 5 ton units shall have a belt -drive, where available, FC centrifugal fan. Units over 5 tons shall have belt driven, FC centrifugal fans with adjustable motor sheaves. Units over 7 ½ tons shall have an adjustable assembly for quick -adjustment to fan belts and motor sheaves. All motors shall be thermally protected. Oversized motors shall be available for high static operations. All blower fans and motors shall be mounted on a slide out assembly to allow for servicing. 14.13 Controls: Unit shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-26 March 2019 pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Units shall provide an external location for mounting fused disconnect device. Microprocessor controls shall be provided for all 24 volt control functions. The resident control algorithms shall make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring indoor and outdoor temperatures. The control algorithm maintains accurate temperature control, minimizes drift from set point and provides better building comfort. A centralized microprocessor shall provide anti-short cycle timing and time delay between compressors to provide a higher level of machine protection. 14.14 Outside Air Intake Hoods: For down flow and horizontal air flow units shall be either field or factory-installed depending on the unit size. The assembly includes – manual locking dampers with position setting and bird screen. Refer to the Drawings to determine which units shall receive these hoods. 14.15 Conventional Thermostat Interface (CTI): This field-installed circuit board shall provide interface with electro-mechanical thermostats or automation systems. 14.16 Remote wall mounted temperature sensors shall be provided to interface with the unit control panels. 14.17 Warranty: Units shall have a limited one year warranty on all parts excluding compressors which will have a five year warranty. Mechanical Contractor shall hire unit manufacturer (Lennox) and provide an Equipment Operation Check (EOC) Report. The unit manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified HVAC technician to carry out a comprehensive check (EOC) of the HVAC units and their operation. This comprehensive check shall be conducted once units have been started up and after a final interior air balance. A representative of the installing contractor shall be present at the EOC check to correct any deficiencies. A comprehensive report shall be submitted in duplicate to Engineer and Wawa Project Manager, by the unit manufacturer. Report information shall include, but not necessarily limited to the following: (A) Electrical performance data including amperage and voltage readings for each compressor, blower motor and electric heating unit. (B) Compressor performance data including suction and discharge pressure. (C) Certify correct thermostat installation and operation. (D) Certification of correct electrical power and control wire connections. 14.18 Smoke detectors shall be factory mounted in the RTU as indicated on the Drawings, and easily accessible for service. 14.19 Provide disconnect switches on all rooftop packaged units; spring loaded weatherproof cover, accessible from outside of unit. 14.20 Flexible connectors may be damaged by soap solutions used for leak detection. Make sure that technicians use a solution made specifically for this purpose. Also make sure that the solutions thoroughly rinsed after the leak check has been completed. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-27 March 2019 14.21 Electric heat modules shall be installed within the basic unit. Electric heater elements shall be constructed of helix wound nichrome elements. Staging shall be achieved through the unit control processor (UCP). Each heater package shall have automatic reset high limit control operating through heating element contactors. All heaters shall be individually fused from factory, where required, and meet all NEC and CEC requirements when properly installed. Power assemblies shall provide single-point connection. Electric heat modules shall be UL Listed. 15003-15 METAL DUCTWORK 15.1 Comply with NFPA Standards 90A, 90B and 91, except as indicated otherwise. 15.2 Sheet Metal Materials, General: Provide the following materials. Package and mark sheet metal materials as specified in ASTM A700. (A) Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A527, coating designation G 90, mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts. Connections shall be made with ‘Slip and Drive’ connectors. (B) Flexible Ductwork: Flex-Vent Type KM flexible duct, with 1” fiberglass insulation, polymer inner liner and fire retardant metalized jacketing. The maximum permitted installed length of flexible ductwork is 8'-0". Provide 1" wide flat support bands mid- span. 15.3 Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing where required on galvanized sheet metal ducts. 15.4 Joint and Seam Sealant: Provide sealant at all joints and seams. Sealant shall be butyl. Install prior to insulating. Install on all duct systems including exhaust systems. Joint and seam sealants shall be sealant tape with butyl adhesive as manufactured by C arlisle Hardcast Inc., Aluma-Grip Model AFT-701. Tape shall have 2 mil aluminum backing with 33 mil butyl rubber adhesive. 15.5 Rectangular to Round Collar Sealants: Provide butyl or silicon sealant or caulk at all round duct collar connections and 45º branch take-off collars. 15.6 Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide one-part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 15.7 Rectangular Duct Fabrication: Except as otherwis e indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals. All ductwork shall be constructed to SMACNA static pressure classification of +2" W.C. and seal class of "A". Duct sizes shown are inside free area dimensions. Use a minimum of SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-28 March 2019 26 gauge sheet metal for ductwork construction. 15.8 Rectangular Duct Fittings: Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," latest Edition. 15.9 Install ducts with the fewest possible joints. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections. 15.10 Coordinate layout with lighting layouts, piping, sprinkler piping and similar finished work. Provide access doors or panels on both sides of duct mounted coils and fire dampers. 15.11 If any ductwork, equipment, etc., is going to interfere with proper service, Architect and Wawa Project Manager are to be notified immediately of the situation. 15003-16 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 16.1 Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards." Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. 16.2 Provide manual dampers of single blade type or multi-blade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" at each branch with the handle accessible for service. Damper handles shall neatly protrude through the insulation and be clearly marked. Provide quadrant locks for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft, and end bearing plate. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL 90 DEGREE ELBOWS IN SUPPLY DUCTWORK. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN RETURN DUCTWORK WHERE SHOWN. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS NEAR RETURN ELBOWS WITH TURNING VANES AND AT EACH FIRE DAMPER. 16.3 Duct mounted fire dampers shall be UL classified "Fire Resistance Rating 1-1/2 Hours" and shall be fusible link type B curtain type with dampers out of the airstream. I nstall dampers as indicated on the Drawings. (A) Diffuser mounted fire dampers shall be UL Fire Rated Floor/Ceiling assemblies and Roof/Ceiling assemblies which require specially tested and classified ceiling dampers (also called Ceiling Fire Dampers or Radiation Dampers) to provide fire and heat protection where HVAC components penetrate the ceiling membrane. Standard 1-1/2 and 3 hour primary fire dampers DO NOT provide the necessary protection. (B) For HVAC penetrations of up to 324 sq.in. (2090) through UL rated fire assem blies with fire resistance ratings of 3 hours or less, provide ceiling/diffuser mounted fire dampers as manufactured by Ruskin CFD(R)2, CFD(R)3, or approved equal. For HVAC penetrations larger than 324 sq. in. (2090) and up to 576 sq. in. (3716) through UL rated fire assemblies with fire resistance rations of 3 hours or less, provide ceiling/diffuser mounted fire dampers as manufactured by Ruskin CFD4, CFD6, or approved equal. The quantity and frequency of permissible HVAC ceiling penetrations are described in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-29 March 2019 (C) UL Listed Fusible Volume Adjustment. The standard, fusible link can be replaced with a simple mechanism that permits adjustment of damper blades to balance airflow. A standard 3/16" (5) hex (Allen) wrench is use d for adjustment. In fire conditions, the damper closes regardless of volume setting. This feature must be added to the damper at fabrication. It cannot be field added. 165º F (specify temperature) fusible volume adjustment options are available. 16.4 Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work. 16.5 Provide elbows or tees with turning vanes for all changes in duct direction in supply ductwork. Provide branch duct dampers with locking quadrants for all branches and take-offs. 16.6 Provide flexible connections at all duct connections to vibrating equipment. These connections shall be installed in close proximity to such equipment where shown on the Mechanical Drawings. 16.7 Remodel Stores Only: Provide diffuser boxes of a "Blind Box Type". Example (12x12x12) for neck size which equals diffuser 12". All boxes are dictated by diffuser neck size, which are shown on Mechanical Drawings. These boxes are designed to facilitate flex entry from either of the four sides or at the top depending on ductwork layout. 15003-17 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 17.1 Test and rate registers, grilles, and diffusers in accordance with ADC equipment test Code 1062, provide certified ratings seal on each unit. Construct and install air outlets and inlets in Accordance with NFPA 90A, and 90B. 17.2 Ceiling Air Diffusers, Supply and Return Registers: Except as otherwise indicated, provide ceiling air diffusers, supply and return registers where shown, of size, shape, capacity and type indicated. All diffusers and registers shall have opposed blade balancing dampers. 17.3 Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers, supply and return registers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent construction. 17.4 Types: Provide aluminum ceiling diffusers, supply and return registers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as scheduled on the Drawings. All devices shall be aluminum, except where required to be steel for installation in fire rated partition. 17.5 Finishes: Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish. 17.6 All air outlets and inlets shall be as scheduled on Mechanical Drawings. 17.7 Outdoor Air Dampers and Hoods: Remodel Stores Only: Provide specified OA dampers and hoods when used in combination with split systems. Use only Lennox #35G24 unless specified otherwise on Mechanical Drawings. Remove the aluminum screen from SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-30 March 2019 hood and insert a wire mesh screen with screws and #40, 30% efficient pleated air filter to filter the outdoor air. 15003-18 EXHAUST FAN 18.1 Fan casing shall be acoustically insulated galvanized steel with backdraft damper and bottom access panel. 18.2 Steel, direct drive, centrifugal fan shall bear AMCA seal and UL label. 18.3 Provide variable speed switch mounted on fan housing. 18.4 Fans shall be as scheduled on Mechanical Drawings. 18.5 In-Line Cabinet Exhaust Fans shall be: Penn Vent ilator Company, Greenheck, or Loren Cook Co. 18.6 All exhaust outlets shall be provided with standard bird screen. 18.7 All exhaust fan wall caps shall be constructed of galvanized steel unless specified otherwise. 18.8 Provide separate electrical disconnect switch. 15003-19 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 19.1 All indoor HVAC equipment should be supported by three sections of “shallow unistrut” material suspended by six 3/8” all thread rods. Two supports should be under the heating unit, evenly distributed for weight. Proper clearance for servic e of unit shall be maintained at all times. A single support should be located under the split remote coil, also leaving the proper clearance of piping and servicing. When installing a heat pump system, only two supports are necessary if blower and coil sections are integral. 19.2 New Stores Only and Remodel Stores Requiring Roof W ork: Provide prefabricated equipment supports for all rooftop HVAC equipment. Prefabricated equipment supports shall be 18 Ga. galvanized steel, utilized construction with integral base plate, continuous welded corner seams, pressure treated wood nailer, counter flashing with lag screws. Internally reinforced to conform to equipment load bearing factors. Prefabricated equipment supports shall be a minimum height of 12”. 19.3 Remodel Stores Only: If the scope of work for an existing structure does not include roof work, then, at the discretion of the Architect and the Wawa Project Manager, provide a double layer of 6 x 6 pressure treated lumber framing l ocated on 1/2" thick rubber tread pads between the lumber and the roofing and also between the lumber and the equipment. This method of support may only be used for roof-mounted condensing units and condensing units on grade. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-31 March 2019 15003-20 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 20.1 Mechanical Contractor shall hire a certified, independent, Air Balancing Contractor to balance all of the HVAC system, as outlined below. (A) Test and Balance Engineer's Qualifications: The Air Balancing Contractor and its Employees associated with this project shall be certified by either the “AABC” or “NEBB”, registered in the state where installed, and having at least three years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on Projects with testing a nd balancing requirements similar to those required for this Project. (B) “AABC” or “NEBB” Certification Documentation shall be provided for all persons associated with this project as part of the Air Balance Report. (C) Certified Air Balance Reports: Submit testi ng, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the test and balance agency. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards, are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed, are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. (D) The Air Balancing Report shall indicate and state the A/C unit components (controls, O/A intake hoods, etc.) are operational and were operational during the air balancing. 20.2 Test, Adjust, and Balance the following mechanical systems: (A) All measurements and adjustments shall be completed in accordance with “AABC” or “NEBB” standards. (B) Supply and Return Air Systems; balance entire system and adjust fan speeds as required. (C) Exhaust air systems; balance entire system and adjust fan speeds as required. (D) Outside Air Measurement Methods: 1. Outside Air Intake Hood. 2. Supply Air and Return Air Traverse Differential Readings. 3. Summation of the return air devices subtracted from the summation of the supply air devices shall not be permitted as an acceptable method. (E) Verify temperature control system operation, including sensor calibration. (F) Replace all air filters with 2”, 30 percent efficient pleated filters, prior to system balancing. Filters shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor. (G) Test smoke detectors for proper operation, and confirm shutdown procedure. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-32 March 2019 (H) Contractor shall utilize ductwork branch dampers for coarse airflow adjustment and diffuser opposed blade dampers for fine airflow adjustment as applicable. 20.3 Codes and Standards (A) NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." - OR – (B) AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance". 20.4 Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures. 20.5 Testing & Balancing shall take place no later than five (5) days after system start-up and balancing report shall be submitted no later than ten (10) days later. 20.6 Upon completion of HVAC system balancing and with airflows within 10% of design values, air balancer shall fasten main and branch ductwork quadrant damper handles to the adjacent ductwork with a sheet metal screw thru the end of the damper handle. 20.7 Air Balancer shall measure pressure inside and outside of building to establish that air pressure is positive inside building. 20.8 Southern Island Express Case (C3): Airflow values in the immediate area surrounding the Express Case shall be verified and adjusted to meet the following criteria; (A) Air Measurement Locations: 4’-0” AFF, directly adjacent to the equipment, on all 4 sides. (B) Maximum Air Flow: 75 CFM. (C) Provide documentation of air flow measurements, identifying any measures taken to reduce air flow from surrounding diffusers. 15003-21 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) SYSTEMS 21.1 Provide electronic automatic temperature controls as indicated through sections "Control Systems" and "Sequence of Operations", and as shown on the drawings. 21.2 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary controls, operators, sensors, relays, time clocks dampers, contactors, etc. for a complete and operational system. ATC wiring shall be minimum 18 ga. central wiring. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-33 March 2019 21.3 All control wiring shall be plenum rated or installed in metallic conduit. 21.4 Upon completion of work, the entire ATC system shall be tested for proper operation. 21.5 Provide controls and interlocking wiring for the motor operated dampers, roof top units, fans, etc., as indicated on the Drawings. 21.6 Provide factory mounted photoelectric type smoke detectors for supply and return air for each unit. Interlock smoke detectors with respective fan motors in A/C units for shutdown. Smoke detector reset key pads, mounted on Manager’s Area wall, shall be labeled in accordance with the area served and air conveyed; e.g. "RETAIL S/A", "FOOD SERVICE S/A", etc. Smoke detectors are to be properly cleaned and calibrated before store is turned over to Wawa. Wawa’s alarm company will wire f rom each smoke detector to alarm panel. 21.7 Label all control devices with device designation, area served, and temperature settings for heating and cooling. 21.8 Submit Shop Drawings of each system including schematic diagrams showing all devices and equipment. Submittals shall be provided for all thermostats and controls. Indicate factory and field wiring. Indicate control panels with internal and external wiring clearly shown. Include written sequence of operation. Include Shop Drawings in each Maintenance Manual. 21.9 Temperature control for the spaces shall be controlled by the BAS system. 21.10 Contractor shall verify the calibration of the wall mounted remote space temperature sensors. For conditions where the calibration varies in excess of +/- 1F, Contractor shall adjust the sensor offset at the thermostat. 15003-22 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 22.1 The A/C unit fan shall operate continuously. The unit shall switch between cooling and heating functions as required to maintain the desired space conditions. 22.2 The unit shall be controlled through the space temperature sensor as indicated on the Drawings. The unit shall operate, cycle, load and unload compressors as directed by its built-in controls, to maintain the desired space temperature settings. 22.3 All exhaust fans shall operate continuously unless specified otherwise on the Drawings. 22.5 All air conditioning unit thermostat settings shall be set by BAS for cooling and for heating unless specified otherwise on the Drawings. SECTION 15003 HVAC 15-34 March 2019 15003-23 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: 23.1 The Contractor shall provide, to the Wawa Project Manager, a set of As -Built documents and Drawings indicating the complete and accurate installation of the systems, as they were completed for the project. 23.2 The HVAC Engineer will visit the site and perform two (2) site visit Punch List inspections to determine the quality of the installations. If a third or fourth site visit is required due to the Contractor’s inability to complete all installations per the Drawings and specifications and the Punch List inspections, the costs for those additional visits will be the responsibility of that Contractor and will be deducted from the Contractor’s Final Payment, by Wawa. 23.3 The Mechanical Contractor shall be on site during all inspections by HVAC Engineer and Wawa Project Manager and provide a ladder to gain access to the roof. END SECTION 15003 SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL 16001-1 March 2019 16001-01 SCOPE 01.1 Electrical Contractor is responsible for all building wiring. Electrical Contractor to furnish all materials, labor, and supervision to store, handle, and install equipment and systems as shown on Drawings and described in Specifications. 01.2 The Electrical Contractor shall apply in writing for any information required as part of this scope of Work prior to actual needing of this information for execution of Work. No changes of equipment locations, conduit routings, material types or quantities, or details of mounting shall be permitted unless approved in writing by the Architect. Sam ples and literature of materials shall be provided upon request by Architect, Engineer or Wawa Project Manager. 01.3 Existing system shall be inspected prior to bidding. Recommendations to be submitted to Wawa Project Manager prior to commencing work. 01.4 Any notes and/or specifications on the Electrical Drawings shall be considered as part of this specification. 01.5 Any changes and/or modifications must be reviewed and approved by the Architect or Engineer and Wawa's Project Manager prior to construction. 01.6 Remove all trash, debris and demolition material from premises at the end of each work day. 01.7 Schedule all work, cutting and building service interruptions with building owner and construction manager prior to commencing work. 01.8 Contractor shall provide all hangers, supports, fittings, connectors, auxiliary steel, threaded rods, and any other miscellaneous materials required for complete installation of the electrical system. 01.9 The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the electrical characteristics of all mechanical and refrigeration equipment with the Mechanical and Refrigeration Contractors. 16001-02 COORDINATION 02.1 The Electrical Contractor shall verify that certain refrigeration and storage equipment will be supplied prewired. The Equipment Contractor is responsible for installing circuit feeder to Junction Box at that equipment. 02.2 Water Heaters shall be supplied and installed by Plumbing Contractor. Wiring of same shall be by Electrical Contractor. Coordinate all Work. 02.3 All Electrical Work shall be coordinated with Wawa's Representative and latest copies of Architectural, Mechanical, Structural, and Electrical Drawings. All locations, dimensions and conditions shall be checked to verify roughing in locations and final connection locations prior to commencing work. 02.4 Electrical Contractor shall notify the representative of any utility, code or site conditions that dictate altering the service as specified on the Electrical Drawings. 02.5 Materials furnished by others shall be installed complete. 02.6 Electrical Contractor is responsible for wiring the Ice Maker, Rethermalizer, and Hot Food Table. Electrical Contractor is not responsible for wiring Coffee Brewers. SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL 16001-2 March 2019 02.7 Electrical Contractor is responsible for wiring from MDP to roof mounted refrigeration equipment. For individual pieces of refrigeration equipment, the Electrical Contractor shall provide the wiring from the electrical panels to the equipment, coordinate exact location with Refrigeration Contractor. Leave 15’ of extra coiled wiring. The Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for final termination. Electrical Contractor to coordinate circuit breaker sizes with Refrigeration Contractor. Control wiring from the roof mounted equipment to the individual pieces of refrigeration equipment shall be p rovided by the Refrigeration Contractor. 02.8 Electrical Contractor is responsible for wiring from MDP to roof mounted HVAC Units. HVAC Contractor is responsible for wiring from roof mounted equipment to any HVAC equipment within store. Electrical Contractor to coordinate circuit breaker size with HVAC Contractor 16001-03 REGULATIONS, PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES 03.1 All Electrical Work shall conform to local codes and regulations. All work shall be in accordance with the latest adopted edition of the National Electrical Code, NFPA-70. 03.2 The Electrical Contractor shall obtain at his expense all necessary permits and certificates as required. 03.3 The Electrical Contractor shall have all installations inspected at completion of work by Middle Department or other recognized inspection agency at his expense. Certificate of Inspection shall be transferred to Wawa. 16001-04 CUTTING AND PATCHING 04.1 Cutting and patching of all general building components shall be performed by the Contractor, utilizing workmen skilled in the particular trades involved, unless otherwise agreed upon with the General Contractor. 04.2 Coordinate and schedule with the Wawa Project Manager and General Contractor the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installati on of electrical equipment and materials. 04.3 Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. 04.4 Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical and electrical installations. 04.5 No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. 04.6 Perform cutting, fitting and patching of mechanical and electrical equipment an d materials required or indicated. 04.7 Effectively protect all materials and equipment from dust, dirt and damage until final acceptance. Close all conduit and equipment openings during construction with suitable protective covering for equipment and materials before, during and following installation. Provide new materials and equipment to replace similar items damaged by Electrical Contractor without additional cost to Wawa. 04.8 Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL 16001-3 March 2019 16001-05 GUARANTEE 05.1 The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee all material and labor to be free from defects for a period of one year from the time of Wawa acceptance. Any defects occurring during this period shall be corrected by the Electrical Contractor. Normal usage and replacement of lamps shall not be included in this guarantee. 16001-06 TESTING 06.1 All installations shall be tested at completion of work to be free of grounds and short circuit conditions. All interlock circuits shall be tested to verify correct operation of each device. All rotating equipment shall be energized to verify correct rotation. 16001-07 AS-BUILTS, INSTRUCTION MANUALS, & SUBMITTALS 07.1 During construction, the Electrical Contractor will maintain a record set of installation prints. He will record on these prints all deviations from the contract Drawings in sizes, locations and details. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall deliver these prints to the Wawa Project Manager. 07.2 Shop Drawings: Electrical Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of Shop Drawings, of all equipment. Electronic copies of the submittals shall be accepted. All submittals shall be properly organized, clean copies, with model numbers clearly identified. 07.3 Maintenance Manuals: Mechanical Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of operating and maintenance manuals, neatly presented in a 3-ring binder. Information shall be provided for all equipment and devices, including wiring and control diagr ams, cut sheets, sequence of operations, warranty, etc. 07.4 Contractor shall be responsible for checking of proposed equipment prior to submitting to Architect and Engineer. The result of any re-designing caused by a substitution or lack of coordination shall be borne by the Contractor. All substitutions or deviations from the specified equipment shall be highlighted in the submittals as indicated as such. 07.5 New Stores Only: Engineer shall review a limit of two (2) submittals per equipment or device. Costs to Engineer for review of additional submittals shall be borne by the Contractor. If equipment is installed that is not approved, the Contractor shall bear all costs related to replace said equipment. 07.6 Remodel Stores Only: No substitution of material or equipment specified will be allowed where new equipment is an extension or modification of an existing system, in which case it shall be the same as existing manufacturer. 16001-08 SERVICE AND METERING 08.1 The Electrical Contractor shall submit service and meter applications for this site to include the connected loads of each panel, see Electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall insure that all panels and circuit breakers be sized of adequate interrupting capacity to coordinate with short circuit availabil ity from incoming electrical service. All panels shall be fully rated. 08.2 The electrical service is ultimately sized for incorporation of general and electrical heating/ air conditioning. Individual equipment loads must be determined and verified prior to sizing of actual service. Service conductors shall be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 2%. SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL 16001-4 March 2019 08.3 Provide exterior weather proof CT Cabinet and meters at location of transformer, where and when permitted by local code, utility company, and authorities. Grounding of CT cabinet to building electrical system shall be provided unless CT cabinet is grounded by electrical utility at transformer. See electrical plans. 16001-09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 09.1 All materials shall be new and bear the label or listing of a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory. 09.2 The Electrical Contractor shall verify quantities prior to ordering materials. All Lighting fixtures and lamps to be provided by Wawa. Electrical Contractor shall install lighting fixtures and lamps furnished by Wawa. 09.3 Wiring shall be copper conductor, minimum size #12 awg, 600 volt insulation. Conductors #8 awg and larger shall be copper, 75 degrees C insulation. No aluminum permitted. 09.4 Security Buzzer/Pushbutton (BY OTHERS) – provide system to signal from Checkout Counter and from Food Service Counters to Associates Area, Manager’s Area, Walk -In Refrigerator, Trash Room and any isolated areas. Provide delivery door bell to Backroom, Manager’s Area and Food Service Area. Key Release – Provide system to signal from vendor delivery door to check out counter and office. Release at check out and office. 09.5 Provided by Others: Key Release – Provide system to signal from vendor delivery door to Check-out Counter and Manager’s Area. Release at Check -out and Manager’s Area. 09.6 Provide for 3rd Shift Buzzer System (BY OTHERS). Locate contactors at exterior vestibule or entry doors. Switch at Manager’s Area to be located “away” from doors. Consisting of: (A) Two (2) normally open door contacts (Edwards #1062) (B) Three (3) Piezo Chimes (Food Service, Backroom, W.I.B.) (C) Magnetic switch spacers (D) Hallow wall box for switch (E) Switch (labeled & to be at Manager’s Area) (F) 18 Gauge, 2 conductor bell wire (G) 1 9v. Battery Eliminator 09.7 All Equipment shall be provided with a separate grounding conductor. 09.8 No shared neutral between circuits shall be permitted. 09.9 All panelboards to be General Electric Company type AQ with aluminum bus bars and fully rated for 22 KAIC SC with “BOLT ON” circuit breakers. Provide type written panel schedules within all electrical panels to label all circuits. Remodel Stores: “BOLT ON” breakers shall be provided for all stores where the existing SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL 16001-5 March 2019 panels have been provided with “BOLT ON” breakers. “PUSH ON” breakers shall only be provided for stores where the existing panels have been provided with “PUSH ON” breakers. (A) Main distribution panel (MDP) shall be General Electric Company Spectra Series panelboard type SPO, fully rated for 42 KAIC SC unless otherwise noted. (B) Main distribution panel (MDP) main circuit breaker shall be General Electric Company digital Solid State Spectra RMS type SKHA 12 for 1200A electrical services and SKHH8 (100% U.L. rated) for 800A electrical services. (C) Main distribution panel (MDP) feeder circuit breakers rated at less than 100 ampere trip shall be General Electric Company digital, Solid State Spectra RMS type SEHA. (D) Main distribution panel (MDP) feeder circuit breakers rated at 100 ampere or greater trip shall be General Electric Company digital, Solid State Spectra RMS type SFHA. (E) Main distribution panel (MDP) feeder circuit breakers for HVAC equipment or refrigeration equipment shall be U.L. listed as HACR type. 09.10 All outlet, junction and switch boxes to be pressed steel. No plastic boxes. 09.11 In Food Service Area, Food Prep, and Food Serving including drink serving areas the receptacles are to be White and the cover plates are to be stainless steel. In all other areas the receptacles (except isolat ed ground receptacles), switches, and stainless steel painted cover plates are to be Almond, matching the color of the FRP. See Electrical Drawings for proper color of isolated ground receptacles. Plastic cover plates are not acceptable, including Backroom. 09.12 Floor Receptacles to be Hubbell #B-2527 formed steel round dual level box, deep, with S-3925 Terrazzo brass round cover. 09.13 All duplex receptacles to be 20 AMP type. Receptacles adjacent to any sinks, and all Food Service to be G.F.I. type. 09.14 Telephone jacks to be “wall hung” type. 09.15 Underslab conduits shall be a minimum ¾” PVC or galvanized rigid steel conduit with 90 degree galvanized steel elbows at each end. 09.16 Outdoor receptacles shall be either Ground Fault Interrupt type or protected by Ground Fault Interrupt Breakers. 09.17 Exterior waterproof duplex receptacles to have Intermatic metal weatherproof covers. Coordinate with Wawa Project Manager. 09.18 Electrical Contractor to wire Post Mix Condensing Unit. (Soda Condenser). Also, wire between Split System HVAC units where required. 09.19 All Power-Pole to be Wiremold, #SMDTP-4, including 2 grounding type duplex receptacles, 20A/125V, color white or Ivory. 09.20 Contractor is responsible for underground conduits and wiring from the panel box area to pole signs, directional signs and site lighting. This includes the conduit from the price changers in the managers office to the price signs. Contractor is also responsible for obtaining electrical permit for this work. 09.21 Provide In-Use Weatherproof covers at trash compactor receptacle. Carlon Electric SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL 16001-6 March 2019 Products part # E9UVC. Clear cover, base color gray. 09.22 Provide one-hour timed switch (Intermatic #FF60M) within weatherproof enclosure for operation of Roof Pocket lighting fixtures. 09.23 Provide labeling on receptacle in accordance with the detail on the drawings. 09.24 Interior Vestibule receptacle should be Ground Fault Interrupt type with weatherproof cover. 09.25 Provide seal-off fittings for close turn radius with minimum vertical height. Basis of Design: Appleton EYS type. 16001-10 TELEPHONE 10.1 The Electrical Contractor shall rough-in conduits for incoming service and Individual telephone outlets as required to meet Wawa and Telephone Company requirements. Verify locations prior to installing conduits. 10.2 Phone jack at Manager’s desk to be RJ41-S set at 34" above finished floor. 10.3 Telephone Company to provide a 50 pair cable with interface on interior back wall. 10.4 Electrical Contractor shall run conduit complete with pull strings for all telephones including as shown in the Drawings. Wawa will provide telephones for installation by Wawa’s Contractor. Verify locations prior to installation. Wawa’s communication company will pull and install all wiring. 16001-11 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 11.1 All Panels shall be adequately identified with permanent laminated plastic tags. Wiring shall be identified as to phasing and conductor identification. All panels shall be balanced as evenly as possible across phases. All panels shall have permanent Directories. Other electrical devices such as receptacles shall be identified using plastic labels to indicate intended function or panel and circuit number as directed by the Wawa Project Manager. Devices to be labeled shall include but not be limited to : 3 rd shift chime control switch, Building Master lighting control switch, switches which are used to open delivery door, and the Price Changer receptacle located in the Manager’s Area. All markings shall be made to provide clear and distinct legible type. 11.2 All openings shall be sealed upon completion of installation to prevent spread of smoke and fire through openings. All openings shall be coordinated with other crafts to prevent interference and obstruction. 11.3 Electrical conduits and plumbing pipes are to be kept as high as possible above the floor to provide adequate space for cleaning. Piping, conduit, and similar construction, located outside a wall, must be installed so that there is a minimum of 3/4" space between it and the wall. 11.4 U.L. approved sealing material should be installed in both ends of all conduits traversing between gasoline dispensing islands and the Electrical Room located within the building in accordance with NEC article 501-5. 11.5 All spare/unused/empty conduits traversing between gasoline dispensing islands and the Electrical Room located within the building, should be sealed using duct seal, and conduit caps or plugs as appropriate for the configuration of the installation in accordance with NEC article 504-70. SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL 16001-7 March 2019 11.6 Provide a minimum of 30 foot candles of lighting in all food preparation, serving, and food storage areas. Lights to be shielded against shattering over exposed food and utensils. 11.7 For underground conduits with seal-off fittings entering the electrical panels enclosure keep the vertical height of the stub-up to a minimum. 16001-12 DOOR ALARMS AND SPRINKLER 12.1 Alarms will be provided and installed by Wawa under a separate contract and are not part of this Electrical Work. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor the installation of the Alarm System during construction to avoid surface wiring and to conceal alarm wiring. 12.2 If flow and tamper switches are required for sprinkler system, the Alarm Co. will be responsible for wiring them to the Alarm System, but Plumbing Contractor to provide the switches. 16001-13 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING 13.1 The Contractor shall provide and remove at the conclusion of the project, all temporary Power and Lighting. The main service for temporary power shall be 200 amp, 208 volt, 3 phase, unless otherwise given by the Wawa Project Manager. Verify with the Wawa Project Manager prior to bidding, the specific requirements for the distribution of temporary power and lighting to the building, the site, the constructio n trailer and any other equipment. Install all temporary power and lighting per the latest adopted version of the NEC and other local codes. 13.2 Provide Temporary Power for Refrigerated Trailer(s) as required. Verify with the Wawa Project Manager prior to bidding which type or types are required. Provide the following: For Two Temperature Trailer: Refrigerated and Freezer Refrigeration Unit Specifications: 208 - 240 volt, 3 Phase, 10 Horsepower, 50 Running Amps Electrical Power Line: Minimum voltage, 208 Volts to a maximum of 240 Volts, 3 Phase, using a separate 60 Amp circuit breaker protected power line. 13.3 Local Electrical Code Will Dictate the Size of the Power Line Required. Normally a number 6 Gauge, 5 wire power line is adequate when the distance from the building electrical distribution panel to the electrical connection box located on the front of the trailer / container is less than 100 feet. Distances greater than 100 ft. Will require a number 4 gauge, 5 wire power line. When calculating power line distance, remember to take trailer length into consideration. 5 wire system: 3 = power legs, 1 = neutral, 1 = equipment ground For One Temperature Trailer - Either Refrigerated or Freezer Refrigeration Unit Specifications: 208 - 240 volt, 3 Phase, 10 Horsepower, 40 Running Amps Electrical Power Line: Minimum voltage, 208 Volts to a maximum of 240 Volts, 3 Phase, using a separate 50 Amp circuit breaker protected power line. 13.4 Local Electrical Code Will Dictate the Size of the Power Line Required. Normally a number 8 Gauge, 4 wire power line is adequate when the distance from the building SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL 16001-8 March 2019 electrical distribution panel to the electrical connection box located on the front of the trailer / container is less than 100 feet. Distances greater than 100 ft. Will require a number 6 gauge, 4 wire power line. When calculating power line distance, remember to take trailer length into consideration. 4 wire system: 3 = power legs, 1 = equipment ground 16001-14 ATM (Automatic Teller Machine) 14.1 Provide one 10 AMP, 120V, duplex receptacle, and one 10 AMP, 120V, duplex isolated ground receptacle in quad box, 48” above floor. Provide "lock out" on circuit breaker and label "ATM". 14.2 For telecomm unications, provide 1" O.D. flex conduit located away from electrical power sources or ceiling lights. 14.3 Provide and install conduit and pull string from Electrical Room to ATM for a 2 pair 24 awg bell round cable with the color code of red, green, yellow and black. At both ends of the bell cable, provide about 20 feet of slack and label both ends of the cable "ATM". Cable must be pulled to telecommunication (termination jacks) in Backroom from the ATM location. Slack can be left in ceiling until Phone Company completes their installation. 16001-15 POWER WASH (HOTSY UNIT) 15.1 Provide 30 amp breakers for this unit. 16001-16 EMERGENCY LIGHTS AND EXIT SIGNS 16.1 Finish color of all units “white”. Fixtures to be provided by Wawa. 16.2 Electrical Contractor responsible for installation and wiring. 16001-17 WALK-IN REF AND FREEZER CONDUITS 17.1.1 Run all conduits for the light fixtures above the box. 16001-18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 18.1 The Contractor shall provide, to the Wawa Project Manager, a set of As -Built documents and Drawings indicating the complete and accurate installation of the systems, as they were completed for the project. 18.2 The Engineer will visit the site and perform 3 (three) site visit Punch List inspections to determine the quality of the installations. If a fourth or fifth site visit is required due to the Contractor's inability to complete all installations per the plans and specifications and the Punch List inspections, the costs of those additional visits will be the responsibility of that Contractor and will be deducted from the Contractor's Final Payment, by Wawa. END SECTION 16001 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-1 March 2019 16500-01 LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE ‘AL1’ 12” Linear Wet Location Surface Mounted Adjustable High Output LED. Mounting: Surface - Ceiling Housing: Low copper content extruded aluminum housing with stainless steel hardware Reflector / Lens: Clear tempered glass lens Trim / Finish: Smooth White Lamp: +/- 965 Im, > 78CRI / 4000K, Max Wattage 16 Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Lumenpulse Catalog #: LOG-HO-120-12-40K-30X60-WAM6-SI-NO Location: Self-Serve W alk-in Beer Cooler (Beer Cave) FIXTURE TYPE ‘DL1’ 6” Aperture Recessed LED Downlight Mounting: Recessed in Gypsum Board and Acoustic Ceiling Tile – Coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type. Housing: Steel Reflector/Lens: Satin Clear Parabolic Spun Alzak Aluminum Self Flanged Cone Trim / Finish: Satin Clear Finish Lamp: 1700 lm, > 90CRI / 3500K 30 watts Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Cree Catalog #: Reflector: KR6T-SSGC-FF / Housing: KR6-20L-35K-120 Location: Entry Vestibules, Restrooms SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-2 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘DL2’ 4” Aperture Recessed Adjustable LED Downlight. Mounting: Recessed into Arched Bulkhead – Aim Straight Down - Coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type. Housing: 22-ga. Die-formed Galvanized Steel mounting frame, Aluminum Housing and Extruded Aluminum Heat Sink Reflector/Lens: n/a Trim / Finish: 41L WH 4” Adjustable Lens Shower Trim - White Lamp: 1000 lm, > 90CRI / 3500K, 16.4w LED Array Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: JUNO Catalog #: TC4AL 10LM 35K 90CRI FL MVOLT ECOS3 Location: Arched Entry FIXTURE TYPE ‘DL3’ 4” Aperture Recessed LED Downlight Mounting: Recessed into Gypsum Board ceiling – coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type. Housing: Steel Reflector/Lens: Parabolic Spun Alzak Aluminum Self Flanged Cone Trim / Finish: Satin Clear Finish Lamp: 30w LED Array, 1550 lm, > 90CRI / 3500K Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: CREE Catalog #: Reflector: KR4T-SSGC-FF / Housing: KR4-20L-35K-120V Location: Women’s and Men’s restrooms over the lavatory. SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-3 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘DL7’ 6” Aperture Wet Location Recessed LED Downlight with Goof Ring Mounting: Recessed in overhang structure – coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type. Housing: Steel Reflector/Lens: Parabolic Spun Alzak Aluminum Self Flanged Cone Trim / Finish: Satin Clear Finish Lamp: Field Replaceable Module, 30 watts, > 85CRI / 3500K LED, 1700 Lumen 100,000 Hour Lifetime at 80% Lumen Maintenance, 10 year Warranty, Control Gear: Integral Power Supply. Electronic Power Supply/Driver – Dimmable, Overload and Short Circuit Protected and Thermally Regulated to Prevent Overheating. Sound Rating A. 100,000 hour rated life, 10 Year Warranty. Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Cree Catalog #: Reflector: KR6T-SSGC-FF / Housing: KR6-20L-35K-120V-GR8 (8” Adapter Ring) Location: Exterior Overhang, Exterior Seating FIXTURE TYPE ‘EL1’ Wet Location String of LED Modules with Remote Power Supply Mounting: Surface Mounted with Screws Behind Exterior Fascia. Housing: ABS body filled with epoxy resin IP65 Rated. Reflector/Lens: 140 Degree Wide Beam Trim / Finish: White Lamp: 0.5w / Module LED, 38 lm, 85 CRI, 3500K, 1.5 Watts per foot. Control Gear: Electronic Remote Power Supply provides constant voltage output to provide consistent light output of LED fixtures Volts: 12/120 Manufacturer: GVA LIGHTING / QTRAN (Alt: SEMPER FI POWER SUPPLIES) Catalog #: Approx. (8) Bags of 32 Module Strings of IP-SF-33500K with (4) LED40W -12 power supplies (one power supply per side). Location: Tower Soffit Remarks: GC is responsible for voltage drop calculations and final lengths. Provide feeds and mounting hardware as required. Confirm power supply locations with architect. SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-4 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘EL2’ Wet Location LED Asymmetric W all Grazer with Integral Remote Power Supply. Mounting: Surface Mounted with Adjustable Arm. Housing: Low copper content extruded aluminum housing. Anodized Aluminum. Reflector/Lens: Clear Tempered Flat Glass., Fastener Free, Flush Mounted Glass and End Caps Matching Extrusion Shape for Guarantee Water Run-off. Trim / Finish: Silver Sandtex. Clear Matte Aluminum. Lamp: 80+ CRI, 3500K, 8.5w per FT. Nominal 600lm, 80+ CRI, 3500K, 8.5 Max. Wattage. Control Gear: Remote Integral Power Supply, 5 year warranty. Locate Power Supply Inside Store. Volts: 12VDC/120 Manufacturer: LUMENFACADE LUMENPULSE Catalog #: LOG RO 120 12 35K 10X60 WAMH6 SI WAM12 SI NO CRC Location: On Top of Building Overhangs Remarks: All fixtures to be installed facing straight up and then aimed 5 degrees towards the building. FIXTURE TYPE ‘EL3’ Wet Location LED asymmetric flood with Integral remote power supply Mounting: Surface Mounted with adjustable arm. Housing: Low copper content extruded aluminum housing. Anodized Aluminum. Reflector/Lens: Clear Tempered Flat Glass, Fastener Free, Flush Mounted Glass and End Caps Matching Extrusion Shape for Guarantee Water Run-off. Trim / Finish: Silver Sandtex. Clear Matte Aluminum. Lamp: 80+ CRI, 3500K, 8.5w per FT . Nominal 600lm, 80+ CRI, 3500K, 8.5 Max. Wattage. Control Gear: Remote Integral Power Supply, 5 year warranty. Locate Power Supply Inside Store. Volts: 12VDC/120 Manufacturer: LUMENFACADE LUMENPULSE Catalog #: LOG RO 120 12 35K 30X60 WAMH6 SI WAM12 SI NO CRC Location: On Top of Building Overhangs Remarks: All fixtures to be installed facing straight up and then aimed 15 degrees towards the building. SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-5 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘FD’ Wet Location LED Gas Canopy Mounted LED Area Light Mounting: Direct Mount Housing: Aluminum Reflector/Lens: Acrylic Lens Trim / Finish: White with 10 year warranty on finish Lamp: 60 LED 6000k 11,828 Lumens, 5 year warranty Control Gear: Integral Driver, Power Factor >90% and THD 20% at full load, 5-year warranty Volts: 120 Manufacturer: BETA LED Catalog #: PKG 304 PS DM 06 D UL WH 700 (Reference Beta’s Site Lighting Specifications for accessories) Location: See Site Plan provided by Beta for more information FIXTURE TYPE ‘GL1’ 2’ X 2’ Recessed LED Troffer Mounting: Recessed in Acoustical Tile Ceiling Grid Housing: Cold Rolled Steel Reflector / Lens: Frosted White Acrylic Trim / Finish: White Lamp: 37 w LED Array, 3338 lm, > 80CRI / 3500K Control Gear: Driver: Integral Electronic Volts: 120 Manufacturer: FINELITE Catalog #: HPR-LED-A2X2-DCO-B-935-120-SC-C1 Location: Customer Area SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-6 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘GL3’ 2’ X 4’ Recessed LED Panel Troffer Mounting: Recessed in Acoustical Tile Ceiling Grid and Surface Mount at Gypsum Board. Housing: Cold Rolled Steel Reflector / Lens: #12 Pattern Prismatic White Frost Acrylic Lens Trim / Finish: White Lamp: 40.0 w LED Array, 4990 lm, > 80CRI / 3500K. 4990 lm, >85 CRI / 3500K, Max. Wattage 40.4. Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: METALUX Catalog #: 24FP4735C. Provide surface mount kit as needed: FPSUR24. 2’x4’ Drywall Frame Kit, DF-24-W -U, at gypsum board ceiling locations. Location: Offices, Stockroom, Back of House FIXTURE TYPE ‘GL5’ 6” X 4’ LED Surface Mount with Acrylic Lens Mounting: Surface Mounted at Gypsum Board Ceiling Housing: Steel Reflector / Lens: Frosted Acrylic Trim / Finish: White Lamp: 44 w LED Array, 4000 lm, 100,000 Hour Lifetime at 80% Lumen Maintenance, 10 year Warranty, 90+ CRI CCT, 3500K Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Cree Catalog #: LS4-40L-35K-10V Location: Stockroom, Back of House SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-7 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘HL’ Surface Mount LED Vaportight with Die Cast Guard Mounting: Surface Mounted to Gypsum Board Ceiling or Stainless Steel Housing: Die-cast Aluminum Nominal Dimension: 11.25” Length x 6” Diameter Reflector / Lens: Heavy Frosted White Glass Globe with Aluminum Guard Trim / Finish: Natural Aluminum Lamp: 27W LED Array, 1735 Lumens, 4000K, 82CRI Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: RAB Catalog #: VXLED26NDG Location: Freezers FIXT URE TYPE ‘LL1’ 4’ Recessed Linear LED Wallwasher M ounting: Recessed in acoustic tile ceiling Housing: Steel Reflector/Lens: Clear Acrylic Trim/Finish : White Lamp: 38 watt LED array, 3906 lumens, > 90CRI / 3500K, 10 years, 100,000hrs L90 Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 M anufacturer: Finelite Catalog #: HPW -LED-4’-FR-V-9-35-120V-SC-C1 Location: Perimeter Wall Wash SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-8 March 2019 FIXT URE TYPE ‘LL2’ Surface Mounted Linear LED Tape in Angles Extrusion Providing Continuous Light M ounting: Mounted on Top of Soffits Housing: Extruded Aluminum Reflector/Lens: Frosted Trim/Finish : White Lamp: 173 lm/ft, 90CRI, 3500K, 2.2 W/FT Control Gear: Remote Power Supply Volts: 24/120 M anufacturer: ACOLYTE Catalog #: CH AC3 F S2 90 20 24 2.2 35 TBD MLV. Tilt Stand (As Needed) Location: Top of Soffits FIXTURE TYPE ‘PL1’ 5” Diameter Pendant with White Acrylic Diffuser and Scew in LED Lamp. Mounting: Pendant Housing: Aluminum Reflector / Lens: White Acrylic Trim / Finish: White Lamp: Philips 120V A21 E26 18W 2200K-2700K D Control Gear: N/A Volts: 120 Manufacturer: WAC Lighting Catalog #: PLD-F4-454WT-BN Location: Coffee SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-9 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘RF’ Wet Location LED Area Light Mounting: Surface Mount on Parapet Walls Housing: Die Cast Aluminum Lens: Heavy Frosted White Glass Globe with Aluminum Guard Trim: Natural Aluminum Lamp: 27w LED, 1735 lm, 82 CRI, 4000K Ballast: Integral power supply Voltage: 120 Manufacturer: RAB Catalog#: VXBRLED26NDG Location: Roof, Tower Interior, and Detached Trash Compound Interior FIXTURE TYPE ‘SH’ 4’ Linear Vaportight LED with Acrylic Lens Mounting: Surface mounted to ceiling Housing: One piece fiberglass reinforced polyester housing with closed cell neoprene gasketing bonded to housing. Lens: Clear Acrylic Trim: White Lamp: 4346 Lumens / 3500K, 80CRI 50,000 hrs rated life to L70, 4000K 5 year warranty Ballast: Integral power supply Voltage: 120 Manufacturer: PHILIPS Catalog#: D-W -A-E-43L-835-4-UNV-TBK Location: Refrigerated Areas SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-10 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘SL1’ 4’ Linear Wet Location LED Surface Mount Mounting: Surface – Clip mounting hardware Housing: Extruded Aluminum Reflector / Lens: 120 Degree Beam Distribution with Frosted Acrylic Lens Trim / Finish: Smooth White Lamp: Nominal 3000lm, 4000k, 80CRI Control Gear: Integral power supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Startek Catalog #: SP-V-4S-40K-PW -IC-SM-NS-ND-U-PN Location: Self-service walk-in beer cooler FIXTURE TYPE ‘WC1’ Decorative LED Wall Sconce Mounting: Surface – Wall Mounted Housing: Extruded Aluminum Nominal Dimension: 5 ½” Deep x 9” Width x 20” High. Reflector / Lens: White Powder Coated Reflector Trim / Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel Lamp: 23w LED, 3100 lm, 3000K, 85CRI Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: SCOTT ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING Catalog #: S9131-L23-30K-BS Location: Entry Façade SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-11 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘Z1’ Wet location LED cutoff wall mounted area light with glare shields Mounting: Surface – Wall Mounted Housing: Aluminum Reflector / Lens: Clear Tempered Glass Trim / Finish: White with 10 year warranty on finish Lamp: See Site Lighting Specifications. Will Vary Depending on Site Specific Conditions. Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Cree Catalog #: EDGE Wall Pack (reference Beta’s Site Lighting Plan for specifications) Location: See Site Plan provided by Beta SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-12 March 2019 16500.02 EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE ‘AL1e’ 12” Linear Wet location Surface Mounted Adjustable High Output LED with Emergency Back Up. Mounting: Surface ceiling Housing: Low Copper Content Extruded Aluminum Housing with Stainless Steel Hardware Reflector / Lens: Clear Tempered Glass Lens Trim / Finish: Smooth White Lamp: +/- 965 lm, > 78CRI / 4000K Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Lumenpulse (Bodine) Catalog #: LOG-HO-120-12-40K-30X60-WAM6-WH-NO (BODINE ELI-S-20) Location: Self-service walk-in beer cooler FIXTURE TYPE ‘DL1e’ 6” Aperture Recessed LED with Emergency Battery Backup Mounting: Recessed in Gypsum Board and Acoustic Ceiling Tile – Coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type. Housing: Steel Reflector/Lens: Satin Clear Parabolic Spun Alzak Aluminum Self Flanged Cone Trim / Finish: Satin Clear Finish Lamp: 30w LED Array, 1700 lm, > 90CRI / 3500K Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Cree Catalog #: Reflector: KR6T-SSGC-FF / Housing: KR6-20L-35K-120-EB7 Location: Entry Vestibule, Restrooms SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-13 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘DL2e’ 4” Aperture Recessed Adjustable LED Downlight with Emergency Battery Backup. Mounting: Recessed into Arched Bulkhead – Aim Straight Down - Coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type. Housing: 22- ga. Die-formed Galvanized Steel mounting frame, Aluminum Housing and Extruded Aluminum Heat Sink Trim / Finish: 41L WH 4” Adjustable Lens Shower Trim - White Lamp: 1000 lm, > 90CRI / 3500K, 16.4w LED Array Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: JUNO Catalog #: TC4AL 10LM 35K 90CRI FL MVOLT ECOS3 FIXTURE TYPE ‘DL7e’ Wet Location 6” Aperture LED Downlight with Emergency Battery Backup and Goof Ring. Mounting: Recessed in overhang structure – coordinate mounting requirements with ceiling type. Housing: Steel Reflector/Lens: Clear Acrylic Trim / Finish: White with 8” Adapter Ring Lamp: Field Replaceable Module, 30 watts, 3500K LED 1700 Lumen 100,000 Hour Lifetime at 80% Lumen Maintenance, 10-year Warranty, 90+ CRI CCT Control Gear: Electronic Power Supply/Driver – Dimmable, Overload and Short Circuit Protected and Thermally Regulated to Prevent Overheating. Sound Rating A. 100,000 hour rated life, 10 Year Warranty. Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Cree Catalog #: Reflector: KR6T-SSGC-FF / Housing: KR6-20L-35K-120V-EB7-GR8 (8” Adapter Ring) Location: Exterior Overhang, Exterior Seating SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-14 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘EM1’ Exit sign Mounting: Surface Housing: Injection molded polycarbonate Lamp: LED Manufacturer: Lightolier Catalog #: LLNURW FIXTURE TYPE ‘GL1e’ 2’ X 2’ Recessed LED Troffer with Emergency Battery Backup Mounting: Recessed in Acoustical Tile Ceiling Housing: Cold Rolled Steel Reflector / Lens: Frosted White Acrylic Trim / Finish: White Lamp: 37 w LED Array, 3338 lm, > 80CRI / 3500K Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: FINELITE Catalog #: HPR-LED-A-2X2-DCO-B-935-120-SC-C1-BSL722 Location: Customer Area FIXTURE TYPE ‘GL3e’ 2’ X 4’ Recessed LED Panel with Emergency Battery Backup Mounting: Recessed in Acoustical Tile Ceiling Grid and Surface Mount at Gypsum Board Housing: Steel Reflector / Lens: White Frost Acrylic Lens Trim / Finish: White Lamp: 4990 lm, >85 CRI / 3500K, Max. W attage 40.4 Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: METALUX Catalog #: 24FP4735C-EBPLED7W. Provide surface mount kit as needed: FPSUR24. SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-15 March 2019 Location: Offices, Stockroom, Back of House FIXTURE TYPE ‘GL5e’ 6” X 4’ LED Surface Mount with Acrylic Lens with Emergency Back Up Mounting: Surface Mounted Housing: Steel Reflector / Lens: Frosted Acrylic Trim / Finish: White Lamp: 44 w LED Array, 4000 lm, 100,000 Hour Lifetime at 80% Lumen Maintenance, 10 year Warranty, 90+ CRI CCT, 3500K Control Gear: Integral Power Supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Cree Catalog #: LS4-40L-35K-10V-EB14 Location: Stockroom, Back of House FIXTURE TYPE ‘SHe’ 4’ Linear Vaportight LED with Acrylic Lens with Emergency Back Up Mounting: Surface mounted to ceiling Housing: One piece fiberglass reinforced polyester housing with closed cell neoprene gasketing bonded to housing. Lens: Clear Acrylic Trim: White Lamp: 4346 Lumens / 3500K, 80CRI, 50,000 hrs rated life to L70, 4000K 5 year warranty Ballast: Integral Power Supply Voltage: 120 Manufacturer: PHILIPS Catalog#: D-W -A-E-43L-835-4-UNV-TBK-EMLED Location: Refrigerated Areas SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500-16 March 2019 FIXTURE TYPE ‘SL1e’ 4’ Linear Wet Location LED Surface Mount with Emergency Backup Mounting: Surface – Clip mounting hardware Housing: Extruded Aluminum Reflector / Lens: 120 Degree Beam Distribution with Frosted Acrylic Lens Trim / Finish: Smooth White Lamp: Nominal 3000lm, 80CRI, Max. Wattage 28 Control Gear: Integral power supply Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Startek Catalog #: SP-V-4S-40K-PW -IC-SM-NS-ND-U-PN Location: Self-service walk-in beer cooler FIXTURE TYPE ‘REM2’ Wet Location Wall Mounted Emergency Light with Remote Battery Pack Mounting: Surface – Wall Mounted to 4” recessed outlet box Housing: Thermoplastic Reflector / Lens: Clear Acrylic with Glare Shield Trim / Finish: White Lamp: (2) 8 9 watt 12 volt par 36 sealed incandescent Control Gear: N/A Volts: 120 Manufacturer: Lightalarms Catalog #: EF11D-ZF-WT OP12Q1-M Location: Surface mount, exterior wall at exit doors END OF SECTION